Final

Request for Quotations
For
Chiller and Cooling Tower Replacement at Meadowvale SS and Chiller

Replacement at Morning Star PS
Request for Quotation No.: L15-3811
Issued: March 12, 2015
Submission Deadline: April 1, 2015 at 3:00 p.m., Toronto Time
Peel District School Board Page 1 of 15

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 3
1.1 Invitation and Type of Contract ............................................................................................... 3
1.2 RFQ Timetable................................................................................................................................ 3
1.3 Agreement on Internal Trade ................................................................................................... 4
1.4 Submission Instructions ............................................................................................................. 4
1.5 Respondents to Review RFQ ..................................................................................................... 5
1.6 All New Information to Respondents by Way of Addenda ............................................. 5
1.7 Debriefing ........................................................................................................................................ 5
1.8 Bid Protest Procedure ................................................................................................................. 5
PART 2 EVALUATION OF QUOTATIONS ............................................................................... 6
2.1 Stages of Evaluation ..................................................................................................................... 6
2.2 Mandatory Requirements .......................................................................................................... 6
2.3 Rated Criteria ................................................................................................................................. 6
2.4 Tie Score ........................................................................................................................................... 6
PART 3 TERMS OF REFERENCE AND GOVERNING LAW .................................................. 7
APPENDIX A TERMS AND CONDITIONS ................................................................................ 9
APPENDIX B QUOTATION FORM .......................................................................................... 10
APPENDIX C RFQ PARTICULARS ........................................................................................... 14
OTHER APPENDICES AS ATTACHED:

APPENDIX 1 LETTER OF CREDIT
APPENDIX 2 RATE BID FORMS
APPENDIX 3 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS

PART 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Invitation and Type of Contract

This Request for Quotations (the RFQ) issued by Peel District School Board (the
Board) is an invitation to submit non-binding offers for the provision of Chiller and Cooling
Tower Replacement at Meadowvale SS and Chiller Replacement at Morning Star PS
as further described in Appendix C, for the Rates established in Appendix 2. The respondent
selected pursuant to this RFQ process will be informed in writing. Respondents not selected
will also be informed in writing.
The selected Respondent will be required to enter into an agreement with the Board for the
provision of the Deliverables in the form attached as Appendix C to the RFQ. It is the
Boards intention to enter into the Form of Agreement based on that attached as Appendix A
with one (1) legal entity per school location. The term of the agreement is to be for a period
of Date of Award to August 31, 2015. It is anticipated that the agreement will be executed
on or around April 15, 2015.
For the purposes of this procurement process, the Board Contact shall be:
A. Ljubijankic
Email: aisa.ljubijankic@peelsb.com
The Boards jurisdiction is located to the west of Toronto and has boundaries which extend
to highway #9 in the north, highway #50 and Etobicoke Creek in the east, Lake Ontario in
the south and Winston Churchill Boulevard in the west. The Board operates 209 elementary
schools and 37 secondary schools with a total enrolment of approximately 153,700
students. The Board has a full time staff complement of approximately 15,670.
For further information about the Board please visit www.peelschools.org.
1.2 RFQ Timetable
Issue Date of RFQ March 12, 2015

Mandatory Site Meeting(s) Will occur on March 19, 2015 as follows:
Morning Star Public School at 1:30 P.M.

3131 Morning Star Drive, Mississauga, ON
Meadowvale Secondary School at 2:30 P.M.

6700 Edenwood Drive, Mississauga, ON
All potential Respondents to meet at the front

entrance of the school and await direction from the
Board representative(s). Failure of the potential
Respondent to be present and signed in from the time
the meeting is called to order until the meeting is
adjourned will result in disqualification from bidding.
In addition to signing in, the potential Respondents
will be required to sign out at the adjournment of the

meeting [as called by the Board representative(s)].
FAILURE TO ATTEND THE MANDATORY SITE

MEETING(S) AS DIRECTED WILL RESULT IN THE
REJECTION OF YOUR SUBMISSION.
Deadline for Questions March 23, 2015 at 1:00 P.M. Toronto Time
Deadline for Issuing Addenda March 25, 2015
Submission Deadline April 1, 2015 at 3:00 p.m. Toronto Time.
Submissions that are date and time stamped in the
Purchasing Department on the closing date at 3:01
p.m. Toronto Time or later will be rejected.
The RFQ timetable is tentative only, and may be changed by the Board at any time prior to
the Submission Deadline. Responses submitted after the Submission Deadline will be
rejected.
1.3 Agreement on Internal Trade

Respondents should note that procurements falling within the scope of Chapter 5 of the
Agreement on Internal Trade are subject to that chapter but that the rights and obligations of
the parties shall be governed by the specific terms of each particular procurement. For
further reference please see the Internal Trade Secretariat website at http://www.ait-
aci.ca/index_en.htm.
1.4 Submission Instructions

Respondents are requested to submit their Quotation Form (Appendix B) and Rate Bid
Forms (Appendix 2) in the form prescribed herein by the Submission Deadline to the Board
Contact identified below in the manner set out below:
Quotations should be submitted at:
Board Contact: A. Ljubijankic

Address: 1ST Floor, Purchasing Department
H.J.A. Brown Education Centre
Peel District School Board
5650 Hurontario Street
Mississauga, Ontario, L5R 1C6
Quotations should be submitted in a sealed package at the location set out above on or
before the Submission Deadline. Quotations submitted after the Submission Deadline will
be rejected.
Quotations are to be prominently marked with the RFQ title and number (see RFQ cover),
with the full legal name and return address of the Respondent.
Onus and responsibility rests solely with the Respondent to deliver its bid to the exact
location (including floor, if applicable) indicated in the RFQ on or before the Submission
Deadline. The Board does not accept any responsibility for submissions delivered to any
other location by the respondent or its delivery agents. Respondents are advised to make

submissions well before the deadline. Respondents making submissions near the deadline
do so at their own risk.
1.5 Respondents to Review RFQ

Respondents shall promptly examine all of the documents comprising this RFQ and (a) shall
report any errors, omissions or ambiguities and (b) may direct questions or seek additional
information in writing by e-mail to the Board Contact on or before the Deadline for
Questions. The Board is under no obligation to provide additional information but may do so
at its sole discretion. It is the responsibility of the respondent to seek clarification from the
Board Contact on any matter it considers to be unclear. The Board shall not be responsible
for any misunderstanding on the part of the respondent concerning this RFQ or its process.
Respondents and their representatives may not contact individuals employed or engaged by
any member of the Board, other than the Board Contact, concerning matters regarding this
RFQ. Only information received by the Board Contact will be considered in the RFQ
process. All such communications must be in writing. Any respondent that does not follow
these instructions may be disqualified.
1.6 All New Information to Respondents by Way of Addenda

This RFQ may be amended only by an addendum in accordance with this section. If the
Board, for any reason, determines that it is necessary to provide additional information
relating to this RFQ, such information will be communicated to all respondents by addenda.
Each addendum shall form an integral part of this RFQ. Such addenda may contain
important information, including significant changes to this RFQ. Respondents are
responsible for obtaining all addenda issued by the Board.
1.7 Debriefing
Respondents may request a debriefing after receipt of a notification of award. All requests
must be made in writing to the Board Contact and must be made within sixty (60) days of
notification of award. The intent of the debriefing information session is to aid the
respondent in presenting a better submission in subsequent procurement opportunities. Any
debriefing provided is not for the purpose of providing an opportunity to challenge the
procurement process.
1.8 Bid Protest Procedure

After a respondent has availed themselves of a debriefing, if they still have concerns with
the outcome of the RFQ process, they may bring a formal bid protest challenge to the
Board. In order to commence the bid protest process, a respondent should send a written
request containing the information set out below to the Board Contact within ten (10) days of
the date of the debriefing:
The name and address of the respondent;

Clear identification of which procurement process the protest concerns;
Identification of the respondents specific concerns with the outcome of the
bid process; and
A precise statement of the relevant facts, the respondents arguments and
any supporting documentation.
The Board will respond in accordance with Section 14 of its Procurement Regulations.

PART 2 EVALUATION OF QUOTATIONS
2.1 Stages of Evaluation

The evaluation of quotations will be conducted in the following stages:
Stage I will consist of a review to determine which submissions satisfy all of the
mandatory requirements. Those submissions that satisfy the mandatory
requirements will proceed to Stage II.
Stage II will consist of a scoring on the basis of the Rated Criteria as set out in
Appendix C. Subject to the Terms of Reference and Governing Law, the top-ranked
respondent as established under the evaluation will be selected to enter into a
contract for the provision of the Deliverables. The selected respondent will be
expected to enter into a contract within the timeframe specified in the selection
notice. Failure to do so may, among other things, result in the disqualification of the
respondent and the selection of another respondent, or the cancellation of the RFQ.
2.2 Mandatory Requirements
2.2.1 Quotation Form

Quotations failing to satisfy the following mandatory requirements will be excluded from
further consideration. Each quotation must include the following:
Quotation Form (Appendix B) completed and signed by the Respondent.
Rate Bid Form(s) (Appendix 2) completed in their entirety.
Respondents are permitted to provide quotations for one or more school locations;
however, Respondents are not permitted to submit partial bids per school location. If
item has no charge, Respondent is to indicate: NIL.
2.2.2 Other Mandatory Criteria
N/A
2.3 Rated Criteria

In addition to submitting the Quotation Form, noted above and if applicable, respondents
should respond to the non-price factors described in Appendix C with reference to the
applicable rated criteria categories as set out in Section C of Appendix C RFQ Particulars.
2.4 Tie Score

In the event of a tie score, the selected respondent will be determined by way of a coin toss.

PART 3 TERMS OF REFERENCE AND GOVERNING LAW
In responding to this RFQ, and to be eligible for consideration, each respondent must submit
a completed and signed Quotation Form that, among other things, acknowledges its
acceptance of the RFQ Terms of Reference and Governing Law as contained hereunder:
(a) this RFQ process is not intended to create a formal legally binding bidding
process and shall not give rise to the legal rights or duties applied to a formal
Contract A binding bidding process or any other legal obligations arising out of
any procurement process contract or collateral contract, and instead shall be
governed by the common law applicable to direct commercial negotiations;
(b) neither party shall have the right to make any claims (in contract, tort, or
otherwise) against the other with respect to the award of a contract, the failure to
award a contract or the failure to honour a quotation;
(c) the respondent will bear its own costs associated with, or incurred in, the
preparation and presentation of its quotation, including, if applicable, costs
incurred for interviews or demonstrations;
(d) no legal obligation regarding the procurement of any good or service shall be
created between the respondent and the Board until the Board accepts the
respondents offer in writing;
(e) when evaluating quotations, the Board may request further information from the
respondents or third parties in order to verify, clarify or supplement the
information provided in the respondents submission, and the Board may revisit
and re-evaluate the respondents submission or ranking on the basis of any such
information;
(f) the Board may consider the respondents past performance on previous
contracts with the Board or other organizations, or any other relevant information
taken into account by the Board when determining the acceptability of a
respondent;
(g) disqualify a respondent for any conduct, situation or circumstance that

constitutes a Conflict of Interest, as solely determined by the Board. Conflict of
Interest shall have the meaning ascribed to it in the Quotation Form (Appendix
B);
(h) the respondent consents to the Boards collection of the information as

contemplated under this RFQ for the uses contemplated under this RFQ;
(i) the Board may elect not to consider a respondent whose quotation contains
misrepresentations or any other inaccurate, misleading or incomplete
information;
(j) the respondent may not at any time directly or indirectly communicate with the
media in relation to the RFQ or any contract awarded pursuant to the RFQ
without first obtaining the written permission of the Board Contact.

(k) the Board may prohibit a respondent from participating in a procurement process
based on poor past performance or based on inappropriate conduct in a prior
procurement process, and such inappropriate conduct shall include but not be
limited to (i) the submission of quotations containing misrepresentations or any
other inaccurate, misleading or incomplete information, (ii) the refusal of the
respondent to honour its pricing or other commitments made in its quotation, or
(iii) any other conduct, situation or circumstance, as solely determined by the
Board, that constitutes a Conflict of Interest;
(l) the Board may, in its absolute discretion, reject a response submitted by the
respondent prior to or after the response opening, if the respondent:
(i) is, or has in the past been, a party to litigation with the Board; or
(ii) directly or indirectly, including by common ownership or control or otherwise,
is related to a party currently in litigation with the Board or a party that has in
the past been in litigation with the Board; or
(iii) intends to use a sub-contractor in respect of the specific project who is, or
has in the past been, a party to litigation with the Board, or who, directly or
indirectly, including by common ownership or control or otherwise, is related
to a party currently in litigation with the Board or a party that has in the past
been in litigation with the Board. For the purposes of this section, the phrase,
"litigation with the Board" includes cases in which the respondent or
prospective respondent or any of the parties named above, have advised the
Board in writing of their intention to commence litigation, or have commenced
or have advised the Board of their intention to commence an arbitral
proceeding against the Board. In determining whether or not to exercise its
discretion as set out in this section, the Board will consider whether the
litigation (past or current) is likely to affect a respondent's ability to work with
the Board, its consultants and representatives, and whether the Board's
experience with the respondent, the related party or sub-contractor, as the
case may be, in the matter giving rise to the litigation, indicates that the Board
is likely to incur increased staff and legal costs in the administration of the
contract if it is awarded to the respondent; and
(m) the Board may cancel this RFQ process at any time.
The parties also acknowledge that these terms (a) are included for greater certainty and
are intended to be interpreted broadly and separately (with no particular provision
intended to limit the scope of any other provision); (b) are non-exhaustive (and shall not
be construed as intending to limit the pre-existing rights of the parties to engage in pre-
contractual discussions in accordance with the common law governing direct commercial
negotiations); and (c) are to be governed by, and interpreted and construed in
accordance with, the laws of the province of Ontario and the federal laws of Canada
applicable therein.

APPENDIX A TERMS AND CONDITIONS
A Microsoft Word copy of the Form of Agreement is available for download on the Biddingo
Website.

APPENDIX B QUOTATION FORM
1. Respondent Information
Please fill out the following form, and name one person to be the contact for this RFQ
response and for any clarifications or amendments that might be necessary.
Full Legal Name of
Respondent:
Any Other Relevant Name
under Which the
Respondent Carries on
Business:
Street Address:
City, Province/State:
Postal Code:
Phone Number:
Fax Number:
Company Website (If Any):
RFQ Contact Person and
Title:
RFQ Contact Phone:
RFQ Contact Facsimile:
RFQ Contact E-mail:
2. Acknowledgement of Terms of Reference and Governing Law

The respondent acknowledges that this RFQ process will be governed by the specific Terms
of Reference and Governing Law set out in this RFQ, and that, among other things, the
Terms of Reference and Governing Law confirm that this procurement process does not
constitute a formal legally binding bidding process, and that there will be no legal
relationship or obligations created until the Board accepts the respondents offer in writing.
3. Ability to Provide Deliverables

The respondent has carefully examined this RFQ and has a clear and comprehensive
knowledge of the Deliverables required. The respondent represents and warrants its ability
to provide the Deliverables in accordance with the requirements of the RFQ for the pricing
set out below and has provided a list of any Successful Respondent(s) to be used to
complete the proposed contract.
4. Non-binding Price Estimates

Respondents should provide pricing in the attached Appendix 2 - Rate Bid Form for the
Deliverables as described in Appendix C.

The respondent confirms that the pricing information provided is accurate. The respondent
acknowledges that any inaccurate, misleading or incomplete information, including
withdrawn or altered pricing, could adversely impact the acceptance of its quotation or its
eligibility for future work.
The respondent acknowledges that the pricing includes all applicable duties and taxes
except HST, which should be itemized separately, all labour and material costs, all travel
and carriage costs, all insurance costs, all costs of delivery to the Board, all costs of
installation and set-up, including any pre-delivery inspection charges and all other overhead,
including any fees or other charges required by law.
5. Addenda
The respondent is deemed to have read and accepted all addenda issued by the Board prior
to the Deadline for Issuing Addenda. The onus remains on respondents to make any
necessary amendments to their quotations based on the addenda. The respondent is
requested to confirm that it has received all addenda by listing the addenda numbers or, if
no addenda were issued, by writing the word None on the following line:
____________________________. Respondents who fail to complete this section will be
deemed to have received all posted addenda.
6. Conflict of Interest
Prior to completing this portion of the Quotation Form, respondents should refer to the
following definition of Conflict of Interest:
Conflict of Interest includes, but is not limited to, any situation or circumstance
where
(a) in relation to the bidding process, the respondent has an unfair advantage or
engages in conduct, directly or indirectly, that may give it an unfair
advantage, including but not limited to (i) having, or having access to,
information in the preparation of its quotation that is confidential and not
available to other respondents, (ii) communicating with any person with a
view to influencing preferred treatment in the RFQ process, or (iii) engaging
in conduct that compromises, or could be seen to compromise, the integrity of
the open and competitive RFQ process and render that process non-
competitive and unfair; or
(b) in relation to the performance of its contractual obligations contemplated in
the contract that is the subject of this procurement, the respondents other
commitments, relationships or financial interests (i) could, or could be seen
to, exercise an improper influence over the objective, unbiased and impartial
exercise of its independent judgement, or (ii) could, or could be seen to,
compromise, impair or be incompatible with the effective performance of its
contractual obligations.
If the box below is left blank, the respondent will be deemed to declare that (a) there was no
Conflict of Interest in preparing its quotation; and (b) there is no foreseeable Conflict of
Interest in performing the contractual obligations contemplated in the RFQ.

Otherwise, if the statement below applies, check the box.
The respondent declares that there is an actual or potential Conflict of Interest

relating to the preparation of its quotation, and/or the respondent foresees an actual
or potential Conflict of Interest in performing the contractual obligations contemplated
in the RFQ.
If the respondent declares an actual or potential Conflict of Interest by marking the box
above, the respondent must set out below details of the actual or potential Conflict of
Interest:
The following individuals, as employees, advisers, or in any other capacity (a) participated in
the preparation of our quotation; AND (b) were employees of the Board and have ceased
that employment within twelve (12) months prior to the submission deadline:
Name of Individual:
Job Classification:
Department:
Last Date of Employment with the Board:
Name of Last Supervisor with the Board:
Brief Description of Individuals Job Functions:
Brief Description of Nature of Individuals Participation in the Preparation of the

Submission:
(Repeat above for each identified individual)
The respondent agrees that, upon request, the respondent shall provide the Board with
additional information from each individual identified above in the form prescribed by the
Board.
7. Confidential Information of Respondent

A respondent should identify any information in its quotation or any accompanying
documentation supplied in confidence for which confidentiality is to be maintained by the
Board. The confidentiality of such information will be maintained by the Board, except as
otherwise required by law or by order of a court or tribunal. Respondents are advised that
their quotations will, as necessary, be disclosed on a confidential basis, to the Boards
advisers retained for the purpose of evaluating or participating in the evaluation of their
quotations. If a respondent has any questions about the collection and use of personal
information pursuant to this RFQ, questions are to be submitted to the Board Contact.

Signature of Respondent Representative
Name and Title
Date:
I have authority to bind the respondent.
[End of Appendix B]

APPENDIX C RFQ PARTICULARS
A. Deliverables
The provision of the Deliverables will be governed by the terms and conditions set out in
Appendix A and Appendix 3 specifications and drawings.
B. Material Disclosures
1. GENERAL CONDITIONS
The General Conditions form part of this RFQ document and it is understood by the
Respondent that attaching signature in Appendix B, the Respondent acknowledges
having read and understood the General Conditions, Section 01000, pages 1 - 34 as
posted on the Boards Purchasing website at: http://purchasing.peelschools.org.
2. AWARDING OF WORK FOR MULTIPLE SITES

The Board reserves the right to award contractors only the amount of work to which the
Board is confident can be completed on schedule by the successful Respondent. In
order to expedite the completion of work within the Term of Contract, the Board may
distribute awards from bids at its sole and unfettered discretion. The decision of the
Board will be final.
3. SUBMITTALS FOR RESPONDENT(S) UNDER CONSIDERATION

Respondent(s) under consideration must provide the following information within (7)
seven calendar days of notification:
a) INSURANCE
A certificate of Commercial General Liability insurance coverage and Third Party
Liability insurance coverage for both owned and non-owned motor vehicles in
accordance to the Boards Standard Terms and Conditions Form of Agreement
Appendix A.
b) WORKPLACE SAFETY AND INSURANCE BOARD (WSIB)

A proof of WSIB coverage in accordance to the Boards Standard Terms and
Conditions Form of Agreement Appendix A.
c) PERFORMANCE SURETY
The Performance Surety requirement from the successful Respondent will be in the
amount of 10% of the total dollar award excluding all applicable taxes.
The successful Respondent will secure an original Irrevocable Letter of Credit or a

Certified Cheque or Money Order or Bank Draft payable to Peel District School Board,
which has been issued by a Canadian Chartered Bank or Trust Company, in the
appropriate amount. If the Irrevocable Letter of Credit is the vehicle chosen for the
Performance Surety, it must be identical to the form as presented in this RFQ
document, Appendix 1 attached. The Performance Surety, either a Irrevocable Letter
of Credit or a Certified Cheque, Money Order or Bank Draft will be deposited with and
held by the Board prior to the commencement of the contract. The Performance
Surety may be drawn on by the Board at any time to secure the due performance and
observation of the contract; the payment of all claims, liabilities and obligations incurred

by the successful Respondent during the performance of the contract. Such
Performance Surety will not be released until forty-five (45) days after substantial
performance of the contract and the full discharge of all claims, liabilities and
obligations incurred by the successful Respondent during the performance of this
contract. The successful Respondent further covenants and agrees that, where the
contract has been terminated or cancelled by virtue of the successful Respondents
default, the said Performance Surety will not be revoked or cancelled, and the Board
may draw from the Performance Surety to compensate for such damages, losses or
expenses incurred, or to be incurred, for which the Board may not be otherwise liable.
Should the said damages, losses or expenses be in excess of the amounts drawn, the
successful Respondent shall be liable to the Board for such excesses.
The Performance Surety is to guarantee that the successful Respondent will complete
the contract in a proper and satisfactory manner in accordance with the terms and
conditions of the RFQ and must be presented by the successful Respondent to the
Board as requested at the time of the award. Failure to provide the proper surety may
result in the rescission of the Boards notice of selection. No interest will be either
charged or retained by or to the Board in relation to the Performance Surety.
C. Rated Criteria
Price and Non-Price Factors

Stage II will consist of an evaluation of the submitted pricing to determine the lowest
acceptable Respondent. Respondents to this RFQ must have a minimum of (3) three year
experience providing goods or services which are similar to those requested in this RFQ.
As a result, the Board may request (3) references obtained in the last (3) years, whereby at
least one reference dates three years ago. Subject to satisfactory reference check, the
Respondent who submitted the lowest acceptable price will be the selected Respondent.
[End of Appendix C]

Appendix 1
LETTER OF CREDIT
(BANK)__________________________________ NO.______________________________________
(BRANCH)_______________________________ (DATE)___________________________________
TO:
WE HEREBY AUTHORIZE YOU TO DRAW ON (BANK)
FOR ACCOUNT OF
UP TO AN AGGREGATE AMOUNT OF
AVAILABLE BY DRAFTS AT SIGHT
GUARANTEE AS FOLLOWS:
Pursuant to the request of our customer,

____________________________________________________________
we, (Bank)____________________________________________________________hereby establish and
give to you an Irrevocable Letter of Credit in your favour in the total amount of
$______________________ which may be drawn on by you at any time and from time to time upon
written demand for payment made upon us by you, which demand we shall honour without enquiring
whether you have a right as between yourself and our said customer to make such demand and without
recognizing any claim of our said customer.
PROVIDED, however, that you are to deliver to

(Bank)_______________________________________________
at such time as a written demand for payment is made upon us, a certificate signed by the Associate
Director of Operational Support Services of The Peel District School Board agreeing and/or confirming
that monies drawn pursuant to this Letter of Credit are to be and/or have been expended pursuant to
obligations incurred or to be incurred by you with reference to (description of services or projects)
______________________________________________________________________________________
______
This Letter of Credit shall commence on ___________________________________ and shall expire on
________________________________ subject to the conditions of automatic extension, as set out herein.
IT IS A CONDITION of this Letter of Credit that it shall be automatically extended without amendment for
one year from the expiry date, and thereafter from year to year unless sixty days prior to the present or
future expiry date we shall notify the Associate Director of Operational Support Services of The Peel
District School Board in writing that we elect not to consider this Letter of Credit renewed for any such
additional period. Upon receipt by you of such notice; you may draw hereunder by means of your demand
accompanied by your written certification that the amounts drawn will be retained and used by you to meet
obligations incurred or to be incurred by you in connection with (description of services or projects)
___________________________________________________________.
THE DRAFTS DRAWN UNDER THIS CREDIT ARE TO BE ENDORSED HEREON AND SHALL
STATE ON THEIR FACE THAT THEY ARE DRAWN UNDER
(BANK)__________________________________________
(BRANCH)_____________________________________ LETTER OF CREDIT
NO._______________________ (DATE)____________________________
WE HEREBY AGREE WITH THE DRAWERS, ENDORSERS OF THE BILLS DRAWN IN

COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS CREDIT THAT THE BILLS SHALL BE DULY
HONOURED UPON PRESENTATION AT THE DRAWEE BANK.
________________________________________ __________________________________________
(Accountant) (Manager)
Appendix 2
RATE BID FORM
Name of Respondent: _____________________________________________________
The following are Lump Sum bids for replacement of a Chiller and Cooling Tower as per the
specifications, drawings, terms and condition of this RFQ. Bid to include all supervision, labour,
material, supply, profit and all taxes, with the exception of HST.
Project Location: Meadowvale SS, 6700 Edenwood Drive, Mississauga L5N 3B2
BASE BID:
TOTAL: $ LOT
HST: $
GRAND TOTAL: $
SUPPLEMENTARY BID:
Provide a bid for the replacement of the exsiting

refrigerant monitoring system with a new one, as
per Section 15010, Item 1.20 $
Appendix 2
RATE BID FORM
Name of Respondent: _____________________________________________________
The following are Lump Sum bids for replacement of a Chiller as per the specifications, drawings,
terms and condition of this RFQ. Bid to include all supervision, labour, material, supply, profit and all
taxes, with the exception of HST.
Project Location: Morning Star MS, 3131 Morning Star Dr., Mississauga L4T 1X3
BASE BID:
TOTAL: $ LOT
HST: $
GRAND TOTAL: $
SUPPLEMENTARY BID:
Provide a bid for the replacement of the exsiting

refrigerant monitoring system with a new one, as
per Section 15010, Item 1.20 $
SAB Engineering Inc. Section 15000
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT INDEX
Meadowvale Secondary School Page 1
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15000 Table of Contents

15005 Demolition
15010 Mechanical General Conditions
15015 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB)
15190 Identification
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15241 Vibration Isolation

15260 Piping Insulation
PLUMBING
15412 Domestic Water Piping - Copper

15413 Copper Drains and Overflows
HEAT TRANSFER
15602 Chemical Water Treatment

15674 Centrifugal Chiller
15675 Centrifugal Cooling Tower
15702 HVAC Piping
15715 Hydronic Specialties
15720 HVAC Pumps
15850 Variable Frequency Drives
15885 Refrigerant Monitoring System
15900 Digital Controls
CONTROLS
16010 Electrical Basic Materials and Methods
END OF SECTION
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT DEMOLITION
PART1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION
.1 Demolition work will include the complete removal of existing chiller and accessories,
respectively:
.1 Complete removal of the existing centrifugal chiller including disconnecting it from

power and controls, removal of all redundant wiring and starter/ disconnect, removal
of sections of chilled water and condenser piping as indicated on the drawings and
as required to allow for the installation of the new equipment, removal of redundant
controls and connections to utilities (such as domestic cold water). Work includes
collection and disposal of the existing refrigerant in accordance with current
environmental by-laws.
.2 Complete removal of the existing cooling tower, including all associated piping,
insulation, piping supports, wiring and power supply (conduits, starter in MCC
included), pan heaters, heat tracing, and vibration isolators.
.3 Complete removal of the main chilled water and condenser water pumps, including
wiring, disconnects and sections of the piping as indicated on the drawings and as
required for the installation of the new equipment. Work includes the removal of the
existing pump inertia pads and the floor preparation for the pour of new pads or
extension of existing pads . The existing local pump disconnects and the pumpss
starters located in the existing MCC shall be removed.
.4 Complete removal of the chilled water chemical treatment (pot feeder, filtration
cartridge, associated piping).
.5 Cooling tower chemical treatment to remain. Refer to drawings for which equipment
is to be re-used.
.6 All other work required for the removal of the old equipment and the installation of
the new one, such as coordination with the existing ductwork, conduits, piping,
structural elements and other building elements and services existing in the
mechanical room.
.2 Temporarily remove or relocate any section of piping, ductwork or other building

services so required in order to remove the existing chiller and install the new one. At
the conclusion of the work, all temporarily removed/relocated utilities shall be made
good to their original condition or better.
.3 Temporarily remove a section of exterior wall and acoustic insulation as required for the
insertion of the new chiller. Repair the wall at completion of the job to match existing
condition or better.
.4 Do not re-use any BAS sensors. All sensors including wiring and conduits shall be new.
.5 All existing BAS components that are not designated to be reused, shall be removed.
Where applicable, remove all redundant pneumatic tubing and cap as close as possible
Project #2015-11
to the take-off fitting. Avoid contamination of the remainder of the pneumatic system
and maintain the rest of the pneumatic controls operational during the work.
.6 Drain sections of the chilled water piping system as necessary to perform the work. At
the conclusion of the project, re-fill the system and provide chemical treatment. Also
refer to section 15602.
.7 All existing building services not affected by this work shall be maintained in operation
during and after the demolition work is complete. Any accidental interruption of existing
building services not required by this project will be promptly repaired at no additional
cost to the Board
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS
.1 Work of this section shall be executed by trades personnel with experience in the
demolition field and capable to deploy adequate equipment as required to complete the
work in an efficient and orderly manner.
1.3 EXAMINATION
.1 Examine existing property. Determine the nature of materials to be removed.
1.4 SALVAGE
.1 The Board Representative will review the site prior to commencement of demolition and
instruct the Contractor, in writing, as to the items to be retained for re-use or be turned
over to the Board. In the absence of such specific instructions, materials from
demolition shall become property of Mechanical Contractor who shall promptly remove
all salvageable material and debris from site.
.2 Remove and store indicated items for future use by the Board. Remove, handle and
transport such items to storage area designated by the Board Representative. Perform
such work carefully and with diligence to prevent any damage to the items during
removal and in storage. Store material to be salvaged, neatly on wooden pallets, where
directed by the Board.
1.5 MAINTAINING TRAFFIC
.1 Maintain and preserve Board's access requirements within, to and from existing building
in areas where demolition and removal work is being carried out.
.2 Do not close, obstruct, place or store material in Board's driveways and passageways.
Conduct operations with minimum interference with roads, streets, driveways, user
traffic and passageways.
1.6 HAULING OPERATIONS
.1 Maintain roadways and paving in the hauling areas clean on a daily basis and as
required by Municipal Authorities.
Project #2015-11
1.7 INTERRUPTIONS TO BOARD'S OPERATIONS
.1 There will be absolutely no interruptions to the building schedule during demolition work.
Therefore, it is imperative that operations and machine and equipment movements,
deliveries and removals are executed at time or times that will permit uninterrupted
Board's operations in and around the building, including parking, receiving areas,
deliveries and site and access and egress.
.2 Where interruptions of domestic cold and hot water are necessary, coordinate with the
Board Representatives the timing and duration of such interruptions.
.3 Where interruptions of power supply are necessary, coordinate with the Board
Representatives the timing and duration of such interruptions.
1.8 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
.1 Coordinate posting of danger signs conspicuously around property. Close doorways

and thoroughfares giving access to area of demolition with barricades.
.2 Provide a competent, experienced supervisor in charge of the Work and on Site while
Work is in progress.
.3 Should any suspect designated substance not already identified, be encountered, cease
work in the immediate area and immediately report, to the Board. Board is responsible
for removal of designated substances.
1.9 PROTECTION
.1 Prevent movement, settlement or damage of adjacent structures, services, walks,

paving, parts of existing building to remain. Make good any collateral damage caused
by demolition.
.2 Take precautions to support affected structures and, if safety of building being

demolished or adjacent structures or services appears to be endangered, cease
operations and notify Board.
.3 Prevent debris from blocking drainage systems (floor drains) or other mechanical and
electrical systems that must remain in operation.
.4 Protect building floors against damage from demolition work. Use plywood covers
over floor where lifting, moving, rolling of removed equipment is anticipated. Be
responsible for repairing any damage to flooring caused by the work defined in this
section. Execute repairs to the satisfaction of the Board at no cost to the Board.
PART2 - Products
Not applicable
PART3 - Execution
Project #2015-11
3.1 DEMOLITION
.1 At the end of each days work, leave site in a safe condition and erect safety barriers
and lights as required. Ensure that no parts of the existing building are in danger of
collapsing.
.2 Review the requirements of new equipment to be installed. Perform all demolition work
required to allow for the new equipment to be installed, wether shown on the drawings
or not.
.3 Control dust and dirt produced during demolition.
.4 Provide any additional labour, materials and services not specifically indicated on the
drawings but required to complete the work.
.5 Dispose of demolished materials in accordance with the requirements of Authorities

Having Jurisdiction.
.6 At the end of demolition work, leave site in broom-clean condition. Clean existing
surfaces specified to receive new applied finishes to ensure proper adherence.
.7 Do not disturb adjacent structures or equipment designated to remain in place.
.8 Confine operations and workers to those parts of the building which are defined on the
drawings and exercise great care not to damage existing construction beyond that
necessary for the carrying out of new work. Make good any such damage in every
respect, to the satisfaction of the Board.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
Part 1 - General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification is an integral part of the Contract Documents and shall
be read accordingly.
1.2 DUTIES OF MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR
.1 The mechanical contractor shall assume the responsibilities and duties of a general
contractor including but not limited to the ones described below:
.2 Superintendence
.1 Provide full time on-site superintendent personnel and supporting staff with proven
experience in project of similar value and complexity.
.2 Site superintendent shall have over-all authority to speak for and represent the
mechanical contractor.
.3 Coordination
.1 Coordinate the work with all the sub-trades involved to ensure that the work will be
carried out on schedule and in proper sequence.
.2 Take complete responsibility for all remedial work that results from failure to
coordinate any aspect of the mechanical work prior to its fabrication and/or
installation.
.3 Take responsibility for the delivery of equipment necessary to complete the work in
accordance with the approved schedule.
.4 Staffing and Scheduling
.1 Within seven days after the award of the contract, the Mechanical Contractor shall
provide to the Board representative the following information:
1 Appointment of official representatives in the project.

2 Schedule of work.
3 Delivery schedule for specified equipment.
4 Requirements for temporary facilities, site signs, storage, etc.
.5 Work Completion Meeting
.1 Prior to application for Substantial Performance of the Work, the mechanical

contractor shall participate in the take-over meeting. Agenda to include the
following:
1 Review of outstanding deficiencies.

2 Submission of maintenance manuals, warranties and as-built drawings.
3 Results of performance tests and described further in this section.
Project #2015-11
4 Scheduling of training to Boards personnel.
1.3 INTENT
.1 Bidders for this work shall include for all labor, material, equipment and all other related
cost including all applicable taxes (except HST) and fees to provide the full chiller plant
and ancillary equipment replacement as indicated on the drawing and specified herein
.2 The scope of work includes, but is not limited to:.
.1 Demolition work as indicated in section 15005.
.2 Installation of new chiller c/w with power and controls.
.3 Installation of new cooling tower c/w power, control and structural support
.4 Installation of new chilled water and condenser pumps and connections to existing
piping and new equipment. Replace sections of existing pipes as required for the
new installation and as shown on the drawings.
.5 Installation of new chilled water chemical treatment system. Majority of the existing
cooling tower chemical treatment system equipment is to be re-used. Refer for
drawings for the required new equipment. .
.6 Provide power supply wiring and devices for all new equipment where specified
herein and noted on the drawings.
.7 Connection of all new equipment to existing school BAS system. Provide new wiring
and devices as required. Update the graphical interface to reflect the new
equipment and sequence.
.8 Replacement of the existing refrigerant sensor; new sensor to match new

refrigerant. Adjustment and re-calibration of the existing refrigerant monitoring
system to detect new refrigerant. Test and commission the re-calibrated refrigerant
monitoring system at the completion of the project and provide certification.
.9 Measure the exhaust air flow of the existing refrigerant evacuation fan at the start
of the project. Submit results to the consultant prior to continuing the work. Allow
for replacing pulleys/sheaves/belts on the existing fan in order to match the air flow
requirements based on the new refrigerant content of the chiller.
.10 Provide new concrete pads or extend existing pads as necessary to match new
equipment footprint.
.11 Refill the system and provide chemical treatment as noted in the specifications.
.12 All concrete and metal work, all cutting and patching required to complete the
work.
.13 All electrical work required to power the new equipment, as specified herein and
indicated on the drawings. Provide an ESA inspection certificate for all new
Project #2015-11
electrical work.
.3 Misinterpretation of any requirement of the drawings and specifications will not relieve
the Mechanical Contractor of responsibility. If in any doubt, the Mechanical Contractor
shall contact the PDSB for written clarification prior to submitting a bid for the Work.
1.4 INTERFERENCES
.1 The mechanical drawings do not show all the architectural and structural details, and
any information involving accurate measuring of the building shall be taken from the
building. Make without additional change, any necessary changes or additions to the
runs of ipes, ducts, etc., to accommodate the site conditions. The location of equipment
may be altered without charge providing the change is made before installation and
does not necessitate major additional material.
.2 Wherever differences occur between specifications, or schematics and drawings, the

maximum conditions shall govern and the bid shall be based on whichever information
indicates the greater cost.
.3 Field verifications of dimensions on plans shall be made since actual locations,

distances, and levels will be governed by actual field conditions.
.4 Discrepancies between different plans, or between plans and actual field conditions, or
between plans and specifications shall promptly be brought to the attention of the
Consultant for a decision.
.5 Install all mechanical services including but not exclusive to pipes, and equipment, to
conserve headroom and interfere as little as possible with the free use of the space
through which they pass.
.6 Before commencing work, check and verify all grade and invert elevations, stacks,
levels, and dimensions, to ensure proper and correct installation of the work.
.7 In addition to the work specifically mentioned in the Specifications and shown on the
drawings, provide all other items that are obviously necessary to make a complete
working installation, including those required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction over
the work.
1.5 EXAMINE SITE
.1 Prior to submitting the tender price, examine the site and the local conditions affecting
the work. Examine carefully all drawings and the complete specifications to ensure that
the work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown. No allowance will be made later for
any expenses incurred through the failure to make these examinations or to report any
such discrepancies in writing to the PDSB.
1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR'S SHOP
.1 Provide Job site office, work-shop, tools, scaffolds, material storage, etc., as required
to complete the work.
Project #2015-11
1.7 CLEANING
.1 During the performance of the work and on the completion, remove from the place of
the work all debris, rubbish and waste materials caused by the performance of the work.
Remove all tools and surplus materials after completion and acceptance of the work.
.2 All equipment shall be thoroughly vacuumed out at the time of final acceptance of the
work.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1 Protection of Equipment:
.1 Equipment and material placed on the job site shall remain in the custody of the
Contractor until phased acceptance, whether or not the Board has reimbursed the
Contractor for the equipment and material. The Contractor is solely responsible for
the protection of such equipment and material against any damage.
.2 Place damaged equipment in first class, new operating condition; or, replace same
as determined and directed by the Consultant. Such repair or replacement shall be
at no additional cost to the Board.
.3 Protect interiors of new equipment and piping systems against entry of foreign
matter. Clean both inside and outside before painting or placing equipment in
operation.
.4 Existing equipment and piping being worked on by the Contractor shall be under the
custody and responsibility of the Contractor and shall be protected as required for
new work.
.2 Cleanliness of Piping and Equipment Systems:
.1 Exercise care in storage and handling of equipment and piping material to be

incorporated in the work. Remove debris arising from cutting, threading and welding
of piping.
.2 Piping systems shall be flushed, blown or pigged as necessary to deliver clean

systems.
.3 Clean interior of all tanks prior to delivery for beneficial use by the Board.
.4 Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs, damage, and delay arising from
failure to provide clean systems.
1.9 INSTALLATION OF WORK
.1 Be responsible for:
.1 The layout of the work shown on the drawings and specified herein, and for any
damage caused to the Board by improper location or carrying out of this work.
Project #2015-11
.2 The prompt installation of the work in advance of concrete pouring or similar work.
.3 The condition of all material and equipment supplied and for the protection and
maintenance of work completed.
.2 Coordinate with other trades and schedule all work to suit the date for the substantial
performance established in the construction contract.
.3 Furnish items to be "built-up" in ample time and give necessary information and
assistance in connection with the building in of the same.
.4 Proceed with the work as quickly as practical so that construction may be completed
in as short a time as possible and in accordance with the building schedule.
.5 Ensure that all equipment and material is ordered in time to meet the building schedule.
Provide a schedule of equipment deliveries to the Board within the time limit stipulated.
.6 Furnish promptly information required for the construction schedule.
.7 Manufactured products supplied with instructions for their installation shall be installed
in strict accordance with those instructions.
1.10 CODES, PERMITS, FEES AND CONNECTIONS
.1 Conform to Federal, Provincial and Municipal regulations and perform work in

accordance with requirements of By-Laws and Regulations in force in area where the
work will take place.
.2 Apply for, obtain, and pay for all permits, fees and service connections for the work and
the inspections required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction ( including TSSA where
applicable), in the area where the work will take place.
.3 For information, a specific code or standard might be mentioned. This information must
not be taken as the only code or standard applicable.
.4 When part of equipment does not bear the required CSA label, the contractor shall
obtain from CSA or Hydro Electric Power Commission, when that part of the equipment
is an electric component, a special approval and pay the applicable fees.
.5 Furnish necessary certificates as evidence that the work installed conforms with laws
and regulations of Authorities having jurisdiction. Changes in work requested by an
Authority Having Jurisdiction shall be carried out without charge.
1.11 MATERIALS
.1 Where materials, equipment, apparatus, or other products are specified by the

manufacturer, brand name, type or catalogue number, such designation is to establish
standards of desired quality style or dimensions and shall be the basis of the Bid.
Materials so specified shall be furnished under this Contract. Where two or more
designations are listed, the contractor shall choose one of those listed and state the
choice made on the Bid Form or Supplementary Tender Form (where applicable)
Project #2015-11
1.12 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS
.1 After execution of the Contract, requests for substitution of materials of makes other
than those specifically named in the Contract Documents may be reviewed and
approved by the Consultant, subject to Boards review and acceptance of the financial
credits involved.
.2 In the absence of such express approval by the Consultant, the Mechanical Contractor
will be held to furnish specified items under the base bid.
1.13 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
.1 Within two weeks of award of contract submit to the Consultant detailed dimension
shop drawings and installation wiring diagrams for all mechanical and electrical
equipment. Further details and special requirements called for in these specifications
shall be shown on the shop drawings.
.2 Submit to the Consultant detailed dimensioned shop drawings for the construction and
reinforcement of the new concrete piers and steel beams supporting the cooling tower.
Indicate all sizes, footing depth, reinforcement details, concrete strength, welding details
and calculations as necessary. Structural support shop drawings for the cooling tower
to be sealed and stamped by a licensed Structural Engineer,
.3 Ensure that copies of all reviewed shop drawings are available on the job site for
reference.
.4 Provide samples of mechanical equipment as requested in the specification at the same

time as the shop drawing submission.
1.14 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
.1 Maintain up to date as built drawings on site and submit to Consultant for review in
an electronic format at completion of the project as specified in this section.
.2 The as-built drawings shall be submitted in electronic format (AutoCad 2004 or

higher). For the purpose of producing the as-built drawings, the Consultant shall
provide the Contractor a set of tender documentation files, to be used as backgrounds.
.3 Any subsequent changes found by the Consultant shall remain the responsibility of the
Contractor at no charge to the Board.
1.15 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USAGE
.1 After any part of the work has been completed, the Consultant will make an inspection,
and performance tests of such parts shall be carried out under the direction of the
Consultant. If deficiencies are found, they shall be immediately rectified to the
satisfaction of the Consultant. After such deficiencies have been rectified, the work shall
be placed in service at such time and in such order as the Consultant may direct. If, in
placing a portion of the equipment in service, it is necessary to make temporary
connections in the wiring in order to obtain proper operation, such connections shall be
Project #2015-11
provided to the extent and in the manner required by the Consultant.

.2 Temporary or trial usage of any mechanical devices, machinery, apparatus, equipment
or materials shall not be construed as evidence of the acceptance of same.
.3 No claims for damage will be considered for injury to, or the breaking of any parts of
such work which may be used.
1.16 CONSULTANT'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1 During construction the Consultant will issue such instructions as may be necessary for
verification and correction of the work. These instructions shall be binding as part of the
specification.
1.17 ADDITIONAL WORK AND CHANGES
.1 Unless a written order, reviewed by the Consultant and countersigned or otherwise

approved by the Board Representative, no additional work shall be undertaken by the
Contractor.
1.18 WARRANTY
.1 The Mechanical Contractor shall guarantee all work and apparatus installed under his
contract against all defects of workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year
after the Substantial Performance of the Work , unless otherwise mentioned in the
Specifications, and shall make good any and all defects developing during such time
without expense to the Board. Any materials shall be further guaranteed as may be
called for in these specifications. Where warranties on equipment extend beyond one
(1) year the Mechanical Contractor shall honor the extended warranty.
1.19 ITEMIZED PRICES
.1 Provide itemized prices for the items listed herein. Show itemized prices separately on
the Tender Form and DO include them in the overall price. The itemized prices shall
include for all labor and material required to complete the work.
.2 Provide itemized prices for the following work:
.1 Reserved.
1.20 SEPARATE PRICE
.1 Provide separate prices for the items listed as individual prices on the Supplementary
Tender Form and DO NOT include them in the overall price. The separate prices shall
include for all labor and material required to complete the work described under the
respective paragraphs in the Bid Form.
.2 Provide separate prices for the following work:
.1 Replacement of the existing refrigerant monitoring system with a new one, suitable
for R-134a (new chiller refrigerant). Separate price shall include the supply and
Project #2015-11
installation of the controller, sensor, audio-visual alarms at all entrance points into
the mechanical room and tie in to the existing power supply and controls,
connections to the purge exhaust fan. Standard of Acceptance: MSA Chillguard L
series, Vulcain.
.2 For additional details, refer to section 15885
1.21 SCHEDULING OF WORK
.1 For all work to be performed under this contract, adhere to Construction Schedule
agreed upon with the Board Representative.
1.22 ENERGY CONSUMPTION
.1 The Consultant may reject equipment submitted for approval on basis of performance
or energy consumed or demanded.
.2 All equipment installed on the project shall conform to the requirements outlined in
ASHRAE 90.1.
1.23 ELECTRIC MOTORS
.1 Provide motors for mechanical equipment as specified.
.2 If delivery of specified motor will delay delivery or installation of any equipment, install
an acceptable motor for temporary use. Final acceptance of equipment will not occur
until specified motor is installed.
.3 All motors shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with CSA requirements.
.4 Motor speed shall be 1750 rpm unless otherwise specified.
.5 All motors shall be "T" frame CEMA Standard Design "B" with Class "B" insulation, 40C
ambient, standard drip-proof with a 1.15 service factor, or as otherwise specified.
Motors in air stream or exposed shall be TEFC type.
.6 Motors shall be of adequate size to operate associated equipment and drive

mechanisms under all conditions of load and service and to bring equipment up to
operating speed within 13 seconds without overloading, and be not less than the
nameplate HP specified or indicated on the Drawings.
.7 Integral HP motor sizes HP and above shall be squirrel cage induction motors rated
575 volt or 208/230volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz, unless noted otherwise.
.8 Fractional HP motors up to but not including HP shall be rated 120 volt, single phase,
60 hertz and will be capacitor start, induction motors, with adequate thrust capacity
when used with direct mounted equipment, and shall be provided with integral overload
and overheating protection. Shaded pole starting devices will not be accepted.
Project #2015-11
.9 Multi-speed motors and associated switching devices shall be circuited to protect the
motor at each speed.
.10 All motors, 1 HP and up shall comply with the Ontario Hydro EnerMark Motor
Efficiency Level as tested either CSA 390 M 1985, or IEEE 112B, and be approved
under the Canadian Electrical Safety Code.
.11 All starter panels shall be lockable and supplied with locks.
.12 Special Requirements:
.1 Where motor power requirements of equipment furnished deviate from power

shown on plans, provide electrical service designed under the requirements of
NFPA 70 without additional time or cost to the Owner.
.2 Assemblies of motors, starters, controls and interlocks on factory assembled and

wired devices shall be in accordance with the requirements of this specification.
.13 Wire and cable materials specified in the electrical division of the specifications shall
be modified as follows:
.1 Wiring material located where temperatures can exceed 71 degrees C (160 degrees
F) shall be stranded copper with Teflon FEP insulation with jacket. This includes
wiring on the boilers.
.2 Other wiring at boilers and to control panels shall be NFPA 70 designation THWN.
.3 Provide shielded conductors or wiring in separate conduits for all instrumentation

and control systems where recommended by manufacturer of equipment.
.14 Select motor sizes so that the motors do not operate into the service factor at
maximum required loads on the driven equipment. Motors on pumps shall be sized
for non-overloading at all points on the pump performance curves.
.15 Motors utilized with variable frequency drives shall be rated inverter-ready per
NEMA Standard, MG1, Part 31.4.4.2. Provide motor shaft grounding apparatus that
will protect bearings from damage from stray currents.
.16 Insulation Resistance: Not less than one half meg-ohm between stator conductors
and frame, to be determined at the time of final inspection
1.24 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS AND INSTALLATION
.1 Permit equipment maintenance and disassembly by use of unions or flanges to

minimize disturbance to connecting piping and duct systems and without interference
from building structure or other equipment.
.2 Provide accessible means for lubricating equipment including permanent lubricated

bearings.
.3 For all base mounted, chillers, pumps, provide chamfered edge housekeeping pads a
Project #2015-11
minimum of 4" high and 4" larger than equipment dimensions all around. Work shall be
performed by the trades specializing in this work.
.4 Pipe drain lines, overflows and safety relief vents to drains. If the horizontal drains
present a tripping hazard, use aluminum checkered plate covers.
.5 Line-up equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items with building walls wherever
possible.
1.25 DRIVE GUARDS
.1 For machinery and equipment, provide guards as shown in AMCA 410 for belts, chains,
couplings, pulleys, sheaves, shafts, gears and other moving parts regardless of height
above the floor to prevent damage to equipment and injury to personnel. Drive guards
may be excluded where motors and drives are inside factory fabricated air handling unit
casings.
.2 Pump shafts and couplings shall be fully guarded by a sheet steel guard, covering
coupling and shaft but not bearings. Material shall be minimum 16-gage sheet steel;
ends shall be braked and drilled and attached to pump base with minimum of four 6 mm
(1/4-inch) bolts. Reinforce guard as necessary to prevent side play forcing guard onto
couplings.
.3 V-belt and sheave assemblies shall be totally enclosed, firmly mounted, non-resonant.
Guard shall be an assembly of minimum 22-gage sheet steel and expanded or
perforated metal to permit observation of belts. 25 mm (one-inch) diameter hole shall
be provided at each shaft centerline to permit speed measurement.
.4 Materials: Sheet steel, cast iron, expanded metal or wire mesh rigidly secured so as to
be removable without disassembling pipe, duct, or electrical connections to equipment.
.5 Access for Speed Measurement: 25 mm (One inch) diameter hole at each shaft center.
1.26 LIFTING ATTACHMENTS
.1 Provide equipment with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in

its normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that
might be encountered, without bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering
and braking of load.
1.27 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES
.1 General:
.1 Locate direct reading thermometers and gauges for reading from floor or platform.
.2 Provide remote reading thermometers and gauges where direct reading instruments
cannot be satisfactorily located.
.3 Locate engraved lamacoid nameplate as specified in Section Identification,

identifying medium adjacent to thermometers and gauges.
Project #2015-11
.2 Thermometers:
.1 Industrial, 9" adjustable angle cast aluminum case, CGSB standard CAN/CGSB-
14.4-M88 red reading mercury, lens front tube, white scale black embossed figures,
clear glass or acrylic window, tapered aluminum stem.
.2 Scale shall be suitable for 2 times the temperature range of service. Scale shall be
combined Celsius and Fahrenheit.
.3 Standard of Acceptance: Weiss, Ashcroft, Trerice.
.3 Pressure Gauges:
.1 5" dial, solid front blow out back, fibreglass reinforced polypropylene case, phosphor
bronze bourdon tube and brass 1/4" N.P.T. socket, bottom connection, stainless
steel rotary type movement, gauge to be registered with the Provincial Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Safety Branch with a registration number and conform to ANSI
B40.1. Accuracy to be grade "A".
.2 On pumps liquid filled gauges shall be utilized.
.4 Provide bronze stop cock, bronze bar stock 1/4" N.P.T. bronze porous core
pressure snubber for pulsating operation and diaphragm for corrosive service.
.5 Use materials compatible with system requirements.
.6 Gauges shall have combined kilopascal and psi scales.
1.28 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS (INDOOR)
.1 General
.1 Pipe Supports: Comply with MSS SP 58. Type Numbers specified refer to this
standard. For selection and application comply with MSS SP 69.
.2 Attachment to Concrete Building Construction:
.1 Concrete insert: MSS SP-58, Type 18.
.2 Self drilling expansion shields and machine bolt expansion anchors: Permitted in
concrete not less than 102 mm (four inches) thick when approved by the Consultant
for each job condition.
.3 Power driven fasteners: Permitted in existing concrete or masonry not less than 102
mm (four inches) thick when approved by the Resident Engineer for each job
condition.
.3 Attachment to Steel Building Construction:
Project #2015-11
.1 Welded attachment: MSS SP 58, Type 22.
.2 Beam clamps: MSS SP-58, Types 20, 21, 28 or 29. Type 23 C clamp may be used
for individual copper tubing up to 23mm (7/8 inch) outside diameter.
.4 Attachment to Metal Pan or Deck:
.1 As required for materials specified Steel Decking section of the specification.
.5 Hanger Rods
.1 Hot rolled steel, ASTM A36 or A575 for allowable load listed in MSS SP 58. For
piping, provide adjustment means for controlling level or slope. Types 13 or 15 turn
buckles shall provide 38 mm (1 1/2 inches) minimum of adjustment and incorporate
locknuts. All thread rods are acceptable.
.6 Hangers Supporting Multiple Pipes (Trapeze Hangers):
.1 Galvanized, cold formed, lipped steel channel horizontal member, not less than 41
mm by 41 mm (1 5/8 inches by 1 5/8 inches), 2.7 mm (No. 12 gage), designed to
accept special spring held, hardened steel nuts. Not permitted for steam supply and
condensate piping.
.2 Allowable hanger load: Manufacturers rating less 91kg (200 pounds).
.3 Guide individual pipes on the horizontal member of every other trapeze hanger with
6 mm (1/4 inch) U bolt fabricated from steel rod. Provide Type 40 insulation shield,
secured by two 13mm (1/2 inch) galvanized steel bands, or preinsulated calcium
silicate shield for insulated piping at each hanger.
.7 Supports for Piping Systems:
.1 Select hangers sized to encircle insulation on insulated piping.To protect insulation,

provide Type 39 saddles for roller type supports or preinsulated calcium silicate
shields. Provide Type 40 insulation shield or preinsulated calcium silicate shield at
all other types of supports and hangers including those for preinsulated piping.
.8 Piping Systems (MSS SP 58):
.1 Standard clevis hanger: Type 1; provide locknut.

.2 Riser clamps: Type 8.
.3 Wall brackets: Types 31, 32 or 33.
.4 Roller supports: Type 41, 43, 44 and 46.
.5 Saddle support: Type 36, 37 or 38.
.6 Turnbuckle: Types 13 or 15. Preinsulate.
.7 U bolt clamp: Type 24.
.8 Copper Tube:
1 Hangers, clamps and other support material in contact with tubing shall be
painted with copper colored epoxy paint, plastic coated or taped with non
Project #2015-11
adhesive isolation tape to prevent electrolysis.
2 For vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps.
3 For supporting tube to strut: Provide epoxy painted pipe straps for copper tube
or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps.
.9 Insulated Lines:
1 Provide pre-insulated calcium silicate shields sized for copper tube.
.10 Supports for plastic or glass piping: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer
with black rubber tape extending one inch beyond steel support or clamp.
.9 Piping with Vertical Expansion and Contraction:
.1 Movement up to 20 mm (3/4 inch): Type 51 or 52 variable spring unit with integral

turn buckle and load indicator.
.2 Movement more than 20 mm (3/4 inch): Type 54 or 55 constant support unit with
integral adjusting nut, turn buckle and travel position indicator.
1.29 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS (OUTDOORS)
.1 New piping supports shall be installed using structural elements (cooling tower metallic
frame or structural wall). Do not support cooling tower piping using the roof as a base.
.2 The piping supports shall consist of:
.1 Heavy-duty carbon-steel welded steel brackets, primed and painted as described

below in this section under `Painting` max. load 3,000 lbs - Grinnell fig. 199 or
equal.
.2 Free-standing, large diameter, laterally stable steel springs in series with an

elastomer-in shear insert, assembled into a stamped or welded hanger bracket. To
assure stability, the spring element has a minimum lateral spring stiffness of 1.0
times the rated vertical stiffness. Springs are polyester powder coated, with a
1000-hour salt spray rating per ASTM B-117. All hangers incorporate a high
deflection, color-coded spring element with load transfer plate and a 0.4" (10 mm)
deflection elastomeric isolator complete with load transfer plate.
1 Standard of acceptance: Kinetics Noise Control model SRH
.3 Adjustable clevis clamp, carbon steel, primed and painted as described below in this
section under `Painting - Grinnell fig. 260
1.30 PIPE PENETRATIONS
.1 Install sleeves during construction for other than blocked out floor openings for risers
in mechanical rooms.
Project #2015-11
.2 Penetrations are not allowed through beams or ribs, but may be installed in concrete
beam flanges. Any deviation from these requirements must receive prior approval of
Consultant.
.3 Sheet Metal: Provide for pipe passing through floors, interior walls, and partitions,
unless brass or steel pipe sleeves are specifically called for below.
.4 Cast Iron or Zinc Coated Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through exterior walls
below grade. Make space between sleeve and pipe watertight with a modular or link
rubber seal. Seal shall be applied at both ends of sleeve.
.5 Galvanized Steel or an alternate Black Iron Pipe with asphalt coating Sleeves: Provide
for pipe passing through concrete beam flanges, except where brass pipe sleeves are
called for. Provide sleeve for pipe passing through floor of mechanical rooms. Except
in mechanical rooms, connect sleeve with floor plate.
.6 Sleeve Clearance: Sleeve through floors, walls, partitions, and beam flanges shall be
one inch greater in diameter than external diameter of pipe. Sleeve for pipe with
insulation shall be large enough to accommodate the insulation. Interior openings shall
be caulked tight with fire stopping material and sealant to prevent the spread of fire,
smoke, and gases.
1.31 PAINTING
.1 General
.1 Paint the entire length of condenser water piping, fittings, outdoor supports and
accessories.
.2 Paint all exterior structural support elements and cooling tower components which
are not galvanized.
.3 Paint the entire chiller room floor at project completion (colour: battleship grey).
.2 Materials
.1 Steel piping and cooling tower supports priming: Marine Alkyd Metal primer: MPI
79.
.2 Steel piping and supports finish: Two coats of MPI 8 (Exterior Alkyd, Flat).
.3 Unpainted or otherwise not finished metal surfaces, except aluminum, of cooling

towers exposed to view, including connected pipes, rails, and ladders: Two coats
of MPI 8 (Exterior Alkyd, Flat).
.4 Copper piping priming (outdoors): MPI 95 (Fast Drying Metal Primer).
.5 Finish color: to be selected by Consultant at shop drawing stage
.3 Atmospheric and Surface Conditions:
Project #2015-11
.1 Do not apply coating when air or substrate conditions are:
1 Less than 3 degrees C (5 degrees F) above dew point.

2 Below 10 degrees C (50 degrees F) or over 35 degrees C (95 degrees F),
unless specifically pre-approved by the Project Supervisor and the product
manufacturer. Under no circumstances shall application conditions exceed
manufacturer recommendations.
3 Maintain interior temperatures until paint dries hard.
4 Do no exterior painting when it is windy and dusty.
5 Do not paint in direct sunlight or on surfaces that the sun will soon warm.
6 Apply only on clean, dry and frost free surfaces
.4 Pre-Painting preparation:
.1 Remove pre finished items not to be painted such as lighting fixtures, escutcheon
plates, hardware, trim, and similar items for reinstallation after paint is dried.
.2 Remove items for reinstallation and complete painting of such items and adjacent
areas when item or adjacent surface is not accessible or finish is different.
.3 See other sections of specifications for specified surface conditions and prime coat.
.4 Clean surfaces for painting with materials and methods compatible with substrate
and specified finish. Remove any residue remaining from cleaning agents used. Do
not use solvents, acid, or steam on concrete and masonry.
.5 Remove oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, flux and other detrimental
foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP 1 (Solvent Cleaning).
.6 Remove loose mill scale, rust, and paint, by hand or power tool cleaning, as defined
in SSPC-SP 2 (Hand Tool Cleaning) and SSPC-SP 3 (Power Tool Cleaning).
Exception: where high temperature aluminum paint is used, prepare surface in
accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions.
.5 Paint Application
.1 Unless otherwise specified, apply paint in three coats; prime, body, and finish.
When two coats applied to prime coat are the same, first coat applied over primer
is body coat and second coat is finish coat.
.2 Apply each coat evenly and cover substrate completely.
.3 Allow not less than 48 hours between application of succeeding coats, except as
allowed by manufacturer's printed instructions, and approved by the Project
Supervisor.
.4 Finish surfaces to show solid even color, free from runs, lumps, brushmarks, laps,
holidays, or other defects.
.5 Apply by brush, roller or spray, except as otherwise specified.
Project #2015-11
1.32 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
.1 Furnish, and turn over to the Board special tools not readily available commercially, that
are required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and machinery furnished.
.2 Grease Guns with Attachments for Applicable Fittings: One for each type of grease
required for each motor or other equipment.
.3 Tool Containers: Hardwood or metal, permanently identified for in tended service and
mounted, or located, where directed by the Owner
.4 Lubricants: A minimum of 0.95 L (one quart) of oil, and 0.45 kg (one pound) of grease,
of equipment manufacturer's recommended grade and type, in unopened containers
and properly identified as to use for each different application.
1.33 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
.1 Furnish spare parts as follows:
.1 One set of packing for each pump.

.2 One glass for each gauge glass installed.
.3 One set of v-belts/bolts for each piece of machinery.
1.34 DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS
.1 Provide wherever pipes of dissimilar metals are joined.
.2 Provide insulating unions for pipe sizes larger than 2" diam. and under; same for
flanges of pipe sizes over 2" diam.
.3 Cast brass adapters may be used on domestic water systems and where approved by
the Consultant.
.4 Provide rubber gaskets to prevent dissimilar metals contact.
1.35 INSTRUCTION OF OPERATING STAFF
.1 Supply certified personnel to instruct Board operating staff on operation of new

mechanical equipment. Supply maintenance specialist personnel to instruct operating
staff on maintenance and adjustment of mechanical equipment and any changes or
modification in equipment made under terms of guarantee.
.2 Provide min. 8 hrs of instruction time during regular work hours prior to acceptance and
turn-over to operating staff for regular operation.
.3 Use operation and maintenance data manual for instruction purposes. On completion
of instruction, turn manuals over to the Consultant.
.4 Scheduling of the timing for the training of the operating staff shall be arranged 10 days
prior to the completion of the project.
Project #2015-11
.5 For training on controls, refer to section 15900
1.36 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
.1 Provide minimum of four (4) digital only on CD/DVD copies of Mechanical

Maintenance Manuals, in accordance to the following:
.1 Mechanical Maintenance Manuals to be delivered to the Consultants office 10 days

prior to the substantial completion of the Contract.
.2 Manuals to be bound in a hard cover neatly labeled: "OPERATING AND

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS".
.3 The Maintenance Manuals shall be divided into sections with neatly labeled and tabbed
dividers between each section. The sections to be included in the manual are:
.1 Section I - General.
.2 Section II - Piping and Pump Systems, and Accessories.
.3 Section III - Chiller, Cooling Tower chemical treatment equipment
.4 Section IV - Automatic Controls
.5 Section V - Water Balancing
.4 The following information shall be contained within the sections:
.1 SECTION I: A list giving name, address and telephone number of the Consultant,
Engineers, General Contractor, Mechanical Trade and Controls Trade. Written
guarantees for the Mechanical Systems. A copy of the Valve directory giving
number, valve location, normal valve position, and purpose of valve ( a framed copy
of Valve Directory to be hung in Chiller Room). Equipment lists and certificates
shall be provided - certificates shall be signed and sealed by the appropriate
suppliers.
.2 SECTION II, III: A copy of all pressure tests and operational tests. A list giving
name, address and telephone number of all suppliers. Details of chemical treatment
equipment and substances. A copy of all reviewed Shop Drawings for all
mechanical equipment and ancillary devices (chiller, pumps, valves, strainers,
plumbing, etc). Copies of warranties.
.3 SECTION IV: Complete Control Diagrams, Wiring Diagrams and description of

Control system and the functioning sequence of the system. Also refer to section
15900.
.4 SECTION V: For balancing reports and formats, refer to section 15015 of these
specifications.
1.37 CONCRETE
.1 All concrete work required to complete this project, wether shown on the drawings or
not, shall be the Contractors responsibility.
.2 Refer to this specification section for requirements for housekeeping pad.
Project #2015-11
1.38 METALS
.1 All steel construction required for the completion of this project, wether shown on the
drawings or not, shall be the Contractors responsibility.
1.39 CUTTING, PATCHING, ROOFING AND X-RAY
.1 All cutting, patching, roofing and X-Rays required for the completion of this project
wether shown on the drawings or not, shall be the Contractors responsibility. The
cutting and patching work shall be performed in accordance with the following:
.1 All cutting and patching shall be done by the trades specializing in the materials to
be cut.
.2 All flashing and equipment supports on the roof shall be done in strict accordance
with the Board standards by Board-approved roofing contractors only.
.2 Any cutting, roofing and/or repairing of finished surfaces be required, the Sub-trade
contractor for the Contractor shall employ the particular trades engaged on the site for
this type of work to do such cutting and/or repairing. Obtain the approval of the
Consultant before doing any cutting. In the event that tradesmen required for particular
cutting and/or repairing are not already on the site, bring to the site tradesmen to do this
work.
.3 Supporting members of any floor, wall or the building structure shall be cut only in such
a location and manner as approved by the Consultant.
.4 Where slabs in the portions of the building which are existing must be saw-cut or core
drilled, all locations shall be x-rayed prior to saw-cutting or core-drilling. All x-raying
shall be done by personnel qualified in the use of the type of equipment required to x-
ray the saw-cuts shall be permitted to perform this work on the site. No allowance will
be made later for expenses incurred through the failure of performing these x-rays.
1.40 MECHANICAL PROJECT COMPLETION
.1 10 (ten) days prior to substantial performance of work obtain documentation and/or

prepare certification of the following items and submit them to the Board's
representative.
.1 All inspection certificates.

.2 Guarantee certificates as called for under "Warranty".
.3 Record drawings.
.4 Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
.5 Test certifications as called for under "Testing".
.6 Provide a signed statement to the effect that all tests for mechanical systems and
equipment have been completely carried out in the Trade Sections of these
Specifications and to the manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with
the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.
1.41 PERFORMANCE TESTS AND EQUIPMENT START-UP
Project #2015-11
.1 After all equipment has been installed, adjusted, balanced and started up, subject
equipment to a series of performance tests, as soon as conditions permit.
.2 The timing of the tests shall be arranged to suit the convenience of the Consultant, and
the manner and duration shall be as the Consultant deems necessary. Record the daily
start and stop times, operating hours and functions performed. Ensure that the
performance tests are witnessed by the Consultant.
.3 All major equipment including but not limited to chillers, cooling towers, chemical
treatment and pumps are to be inspected by the manufacturer to ensure that the
equipment has been installed in accordance with their recommendations.
.4 Operate equipment under varying load conditions, demonstrate start-up sequence,

normal shutdown, simulated emergency shutdown, operation of temperature, etc., and
safety controls. Operate switches and electrical devices for correct wiring sequences.
Adjust components to achieve a proper functional relationship among all the
components of all the systems. Repeat these functions as many times as deemed
necessary by the Consultant to achieve reliable operation.
.5 Repair defects and repeat tests as necessary. During test maintain lubrication schedule,
set, align and tension drives.
.6 At the successful completion of Performance Tests and all testing and balancing, make
the systems ready for final inspection and subsequent acceptance of the Board.
Replace and clean filters, flush out lines and equipment, remove and clean strainers,
fill liquid systems and purge air. Provide water treatment to pipes and report in
accordance to Section 15602. Disinfect all domestic water as required by current by-
laws and Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
.7 Conduct tests to demonstrate operation and ability to meet requirements of all

equipment and freedom from undue noise and vibration at the time of final inspection,
having ensured that it has previously been subjected to Performance Tests.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB)
1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by
the requirements of Section 15010.
.1 TAB: means to test, adjust and balance all systems, including equipment, to perform
in accordance with Contract Documents.
.2 Follow start-up procedures as recommended by manufacturer.
.3 Special start-up procedures may be specified elsewhere.
.4 The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all assistance required by the water balancing
contractor to complete the balancing contractors work. This shall include but not be
limited to:
.1 Provision of all required shop drawings and pump curves.
.2 Provision of all required test ports
.5 TAB to apply to following systems, equipment and related controls (refer to values in
equipment schedules):
.1 All new pumps

.2 Chiller
.3 Cooling Tower
.6 Prior to commencing work, shop drawings shall be submitted showing equipment, proof
of calibration, testing methods to be used with each different style of diffuser and
measuring point, and forms and diagrams to be used for air balance.
1.2 ACCURACY
.1 Do TAB to within plus or minus 5% of design values.

.2 Measurements to be accurate to within plus or minus 5 % of actual values.
.2 Instrument calibration: In accordance with referenced standard, within 3 months of

commencement of TAB.
.1 Provide proof of calibration to Consultant.
1.3 REPORT
.1 Format to be in accordance with referenced standard listed above, but using

design drawing units.
.2 Produce "as-built" full system schematics. Use as-built drawings for reference.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB)
.3 Submit 2 copies of preliminary TAB reports, each in "D" ring binders, complete with
index tabs for verification and approval of Consultant.
.4 Submit 3 copies of final TAB reports after approval by the Consultant.
.2 Completion: TAB to be considered complete only when final reports are approved by
Consultant.
1.4 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
.1 General: measurements as required by referenced standards, including, but not limited

to, following:
.1 Measurements:
.1 Flow.
.2 Pressure.
.3 Temperature.
.4 Specific gravity.
.5 RPM (where applicable).
.6 Electrical power: Voltage and Current draw (where applicable).
.2 Location of equipment measurements:
.1 Inlet and outlet of each:
C new chiller (condenser and evaporator),

C cooling tower
C new pump balancing valves
.3 Provide pump curves indicating operating point with superimposed power draw, rpm
and impellor size.
2 - PRODUCTS
NIL
3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
.1 The Contractor to provide the required assistance to the balancing contractor as

deemed necessary for the performance of TAB and as instructed by the Consultant.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT IDENTIFICATION
1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
the requirements outlined in Section 15010.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1 CGSB 24-GP-3a Identification and Classification of Piping Systems.
1.3 EQUIPMENT
.1 Manufacturer's nameplates:
.1 Provide metal nameplate on each piece of equipment, mechanically fastened with

raised or recessed letters.
.2 Provide Underwriters' Laboratories or CSA registration plates, as required by

respective agency.
.3 Manufacturers nameplate to indicate size, equipment model, manufacturer's name,

serial number, voltage, cycle, phase and power of motors.
.4 Locate nameplates so that they are easily read. Do not insulate or paint over plates.
.2 System nameplates:
.1 Provide laminated plastic plates with black face and white centre of minimum size
90 x 40 x 2.5 mm nominal thickness, engraved with 6 mm high lettering. Use 25
mm lettering for major equipment.
.2 Fasten nameplates securely in conspicuous place. Where nameplates can not be

mounted on cool surface, provide standoffs.
.3 Identify equipment type and number (eg Pump No. 2) and service or areas or zone
of building served eg "Perimeter Heating".
.4 Submit list of nameplates for review prior to engraving.
1.4 PIPING
.1 Identify medium in piping with markers showing name and service including
temperature, pressure and directional flow arrows in accordance with CGSB 24-GP-3a.
.2 Block capital letters 2" high for pipes of 3" nominal and larger including insulation and
not less than 3/4" high for smaller diameters.
.3 Direction arrows 6" long by 2" wide for piping of 3" nominal or larger including insulation
and 4" long by 3/4" wide for smaller diameters. Use double headed arrows where
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT IDENTIFICATION
direction of flow is reversible.
.4 Waterproof and heat resistant plastic marker tags for pipes and tubing 3/4" nominal and
smaller.
.5 Black pipe marker letters and direction arrows, white on red background for fire
protection pipe markers.
.6 Standard of Acceptance: WH Brady identification tapes, bands, markers; Seton Name

Plate Corporation; Setmark pipe markers.
.7 Location:
.1 Locate markers and classifying colours on piping systems so they can be seen from
floor or platform.
.2 Piping runs at least once in each room.
.3 Maximum 45 ft between identifications in open areas.
.4 Both sides where piping passes through walls, partitions and floors.
.5 At point of entry and leaving, where piping is concealed in pipe chase or other
confined space, and at each access opening.
.6 At start and end points of runs and at each piece of equipment.
.7 At major manual and automatic valves immediately upstream of valves.
.8 Identify branch, equipment or area served after valve.
1.5 VALVES AND CONTROLLERS
.1 Provide brass tags with 12 mm stamped code lettering and numbers filled with black
paint, secured with non-ferrous chains or "S" hooks for valves and operating controllers
except at plumbing fixtures and radiation.
.2 Provide Consultant with three identification flow diagrams of approved size for each
system. Include tag schedule, designating number, service, function, and location of
each tagged item and normal operating position of valves.
.3 Install where directed one copy of flow diagram and valve schedule mounted in glazed
frame. Provide one copy in each operating and maintenance instruction manual.
.4 Consecutively number valves in systems.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT VIBRATION ISOLATION
1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2 Provide separate shop drawings for each isolated system complete with performance
and product data.
.3 Submit type of isolator, size, height when uncompressed and maximum allowable static
deflection weight of all isolated equipment, loads on each isolator and static deflection
of each isolator under the specific design load.
.4 Submit marked up plans indicating all locations where pipes are to be isolated in
mechanical rooms and as specified.
2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 Vibration isolator sizes and layout shall be determined by the vibration isolator supplier.
.2 All mechanical equipment not specifically identified in this specification that contains
rotating or vibrating elements shall be installed on elastomeric pads as specified below.
.3 Elastomeric elements that will be exposed to temperatures below freezing shall be

fabricated from natural rubber instead of neoprene.
.4 All isolators to be installed outdoors or exposed to weather shall be hot dipped

galvanized and shall be furnished with neoprene mounting sleeves for hold-down bolts
to prevent any metal to metal contact.
.5 Standard of Acceptance (All vibration isolators): Kinetics Noise Control, Mason, Vibron,
Vibro-Acoustics.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC PADS
.1 Neoprene waffle or ribbed; 9mm minimum thick; 50 durometer; maximum loading 350
kPa. Mason type W
.2 Application: chiller and all pump frames where resting on the concrete pads.
2.3 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS
.1 Flexible pipe connectors shall be used on all piping connected to rotating equipment
Project #2015-11
(chiller, pumps, cooling tower) to reduce the transmission of noise and vibration, and
to eliminate stresses in piping systems due to misalignment and thermal movement of
the piping.
.2 Indoors:
.1 Flexible connectors shall be of the single- or double-sphere molded joint

configuration and shall meet or exceed specifications of the Rubber Expansion Joint
Division, Fluid Sealing Association.
.2 Connectors shall be made of molded neoprene reinforced with nylon tire cord and
shall have mild steel floating flanges or female union ends.
.3 Control rods shall be used with unanchored systems or with spring-mounted

equipment where the pressures and movements exceed those the connectors are
designed to withstand.
.4 Applications: all piping connections to pumps and chillers
.3 Outdoors:
.1 Connectors shall be made of stainless steel flexible bellows with stainless steel
braided outer cover and shall have flanged carbon steel end fittings.
.2 Application: all piping connections to cooling towers
.4 Standard of acceptance: Kinetics model Kinflex
2.4 COOLING TOWER SPRING VIBRATION ISOLATORS
.1 Housing assemblies shall be fabricated steel members and shall consist of a top load
plate complete with adjusting and leveling bolts, vertical restraints, isolation washers
and a bottom plate with internal non-skid noise isolation pads. Housing shall be
electrozinc plated or hot dip galvanized for corrosion resistance. Housing should be
designed to provide a constant free and operating height within 1/8" (0.06 mm).
.2 Spring elements shall have a lateral stiffness greater than 1.2 times the rated vertical
stiffness and shall be designed to provide a minimum of 50% overload capacity.
Non-welded spring elements shall be polyester powder coated, and shall have a 1000
hr rating when tested in accordance with ASTM B-117.
.3 Springs shall be selected to provide static deflections shown on the Vibration Isolation
Schedule or as indicated on the project documents. Springs shall be color coded or
otherwise identified to indicate load capacity.
.4 Standard of Acceptance:
.1 Provided by the chiller manufacturer, installed by the contractor.

.2 Acceptable equal isolators: Kinetics Noise Control FLS Series
Project #2015-11
2.5 PIPE HANGERS
.1 Colour coded springs, rust resistant, painted box type hangers. Swivel arrangement to
permit hanger box or rod to move through a 30 deg. arc without metal to metal contact.
Unless specified otherwise, the static deflection shall be 9mm, with a strain not
exceeding 15%, and spring hangers to have minimum static deflection of 2". A
neoprene sleeve shall be provided where the lower hanger rod passes through the steel
hanger box such that the hanger rod cannot contact the steel hanger. The diameter of
the clear hole in the hanger box shall be at least 19mm larger than the diameter of the
hanger rod.
.2 Standard of acceptance: Kinetics model SRH
3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Provide vibration isolation for new equipment as noted in the specification and shown
on the drawings.
.2 Install vibration isolation equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions and

adjust mountings to level equipment.
.3 Ensure piping and electrical connections to isolated equipment do not reduce system
flexibility.
.4 Inlet and outlet piping serving the chiller shall be provided with flexible pipe connections.
.5 Inlet and outlet piping serving the cooling tower shall be provided with flexible pipe
connections or flexible hoses (suitable for outdoor use), as specified.
.6 Suction and discharge serving each new pump shall be provided with flexible pipe
connections.
.7 Unless indicated otherwise, support all piping connected to the chiller with spring
equipped hangers as described in these specifications, as follows:
.1 first 3 points of support.
.2 First point of support shall have a static deflection of twice deflection of isolated
equipment, but not more than 2".
.8 Unless specified otherwise, all pump assemblies will be mounted on concrete pads and
supported by elastomeric isolators.
.9 Unless specified otherwise, the chiller will be mounted on elastomeric isolators as per
manufacturer recommendation.
.10 Unless specified otherwise, the cooling tower will be mounted on manufacturer-
supplied springs or approved equal, as described herein.
Project #2015-11
.11 The last 3 ft of wiring connections to the pumps, cooling towers and chillers shall be
made using wiring in flexible liquid tight jacket; maintain wiring size and current
carrying capacity.
.12 Provide suitable supports for all equipment which does not have a frame with
adequate rigidity.
.13 There shall be a minimum of 4" clearance between isolated equipment and the
walls, ceiling, floors, columns and any other equipment not installed on vibration
isolators.
.14 Piping, ductwork, conduit or mechanical equipment shall not be hung from or
supported on other equipment, pipes or ductwork installed on vibration isolators.
It shall be supported on or suspended from building structure.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT PIPING INSULATION
1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 Fire resistance
.1 Meet NFPA 90A-2006. Maximum flame spread rating of 25 and maximum smoke
developed rating of 50 in accordance with NFPA 255-2006 and CAN4-S102-M83.
.2 Materials tested in accordance with ASTM C411-82 shall not flame, smoulder, glow
or smoke at temperature to which exposed in service.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.2 Submit for approval manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation,

fabrication for pipe, fittings, valves and jointing recommendations.
.3 Prior to ordering insulation materials submit a sample board demonstrating the cross
section of each type of insulation that will be utilized on the project for approval.
Submission to include insulating material, exterior jacket and adhesive for each type of
insulation. After review and acceptance the sample board shall be kept on site for the
duration of the project for reference purposes.
2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMED FIBROUS GLASS WITH VAPOUR BARRIER
.1 Application:
.1 Chilled water piping including pot feeder, filter and pot feeder piping, expansion tank
fittings, automatic air eliminator and all other associated piping accessories
connected to chilled water circulating cooling system
.2 All domestic cold water piping
.2 Material:
.1 CGSB 51-GP-9M, rigid mineral fibre sleeving for piping and CGSB 51-GP-52M,
vapour barrier jacket.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Fiberglas 850, Manson, Knauf.
Project #2015-11
.3 Thickness:
.1 Domestic cold water: 1

.2 Condensate water 1"
.3 All chilled water: 1
2.2 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC -40 TO 95 DEG. C.
.1 Application: insulation system for valves and fittings temperature range -40 to 95
degrees Celsius on:
.1 Chilled water strainers

.2 Chilled water valves (including balancing and triple-duty valves)
.3 Chilled water pumps
.4 Chilled water header connections to chiller
.2 Material:
.1 CAN2-51.40-M80+Amdt-Aug-83, flexible elastomeric unicellular sheet and pipe

covering.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong Armaflex.
.3 Thickness:
2.3 FASTENINGS
.1 For piping insulation systems:
.1 Tape: self adhesive tape rated under 25 for flame spread and under 50 for smoke
development.
.2 Lap Seal Adhesive: quick-setting adhesive for joints and lap sealing of vapour
barriers. Flame spread 10 smoke development 0. Standard of Acceptance: Foster
85-75 Drion.
.3 Self adhesive tape rated under 25 for flame spread and under 50 for smoke
development plus aluminum straps 12 x 0.05 mm with locking clips.
.4 Lagging Adhesive: fire retardant coating approved by CFFM and authorities having
jurisdiction prior to application.
.2 For valves/fittings/pumps/strainers insulation system:
.1 Contact Adhesive: quick-setting adhesive for seams and joints of flexible unicellular
insulation. Flame spread 5, smoke development 0.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong 520 Adhesive.
Project #2015-11
2.4 PVC JACKETING
.1 All exposed insulated piping and fittings shall be finished with a fire retardant PVC
jacket, as follows:
.2 PVC cover shall be minimum 0.02 gauge, hot rolled complete with self seal lap.All
seams to be fused by Shurweld reinforcement.
.3 Provide PVC end caps for piping 1-1/2" (40 mm) and larger
.4 Caulk end fittings with silicone sealant equal to Dow Corning 999-A on piping 1-1/4"
(32 mm ) or less.Joints for pipe fitting connections (Tees, Wyes, etc.) shall be sealed
with silicone sealant as above.
.5 PVC pre-moulded fittings that meet 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed ratings
may be applied in mechanical rooms as follows:
.1 1/12" thick minimum.

.2 Fitting covers, one piece, pre-moulded to match.
.3 Fastenings standard to manufacturer
2.5 ALUMINUM JACKET
.1 Apply in areaswhere insulated piping is exposed to the outdoors. Install to CSA HA

Series-M1980. Specifically, use on all outdoor domestic cold water piping serving
cooling tower.
.2 Aluminum jacket piping systems and circular breeching and stacks: ASTM B209,
3003 alloy, H-14 temper, 0.6 mm (0.023 inch) minimum thickness with locking
longitudinal joints.
.3 Jackets for elbows, tees and other fittings shall be factory-fabricated to match
shape of fitting and of 0.6 mm (0.024) inch minimum thickness aluminum. Fittings
shall be of same construction as straight run jackets but need not be of the same
alloy.
.4 Factory-fabricated stainless steel bands shall be installed on all circumferential

joints. Bands shall be 20 mm (0.75 inch) wide on 450 mm (18 inch) centers. System
shall be weatherproof if utilized for outside service.
2.6 PROTECTION SADDLES AND SHIELDS
.1 Provide factory engineered galvanized steel hanger shields on horizontal insulated pipe
complying with MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-59 standards for gauge and length of saddle.
2.7 SADDLES (PIPING/TUBING UP TO 2 INCHES)
.1 Use 180 degree saddle on systems utilizing teardrop type hangers.
.2 Use 360 degree saddle on systems utilizing trapeze hangers or clamps JACKETS
Project #2015-11
3- EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
.1 Apply insulation after required tests have been completed and approved by the
Consultant. Insulation and surfaces shall be clean and dry when installed and during
application of any finish.
.2 Work shall be performed by insulation journeymen.
.3 Vapour barriers and insulation to be complete over the full length of pipe or duct surface
without penetration for hangers, standing duct seams and without interruption at
sleeves.
.4 Insulated pipes having vapour barrier jacket to pass through walls, floors, etc. to
accommodate full insulation thickness. Protect insulation of exposed pipes passing
through floors with 1.2mm (18 ga.) galvanized iron 150mm (6") from finished floor.
.5 Protect insulation on chilled water lines with insulation shields consisting of high density
insulation and sheet steel support. Alternatively bury pipe hanger in insulation and
apply insulation up hanger rod not less than 4 times the insulation thickness.
.6 Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces.
.7 Apply insulation materials, accessories and finishes in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.
.8 Pack solid around all pipes where they pass through sleeves in walls, floor slabs, etc.
for full thickness of floor and/or wall with fibreglass insulation.
3.2 PIPE INSULATION
.1 Preformed insulation: sectional insulation up to 12" diam., sectional or curved

segmented above 12" diam.
.2 Multi-layered, insulation: use staggered butt joint construction.
.3 Vertical pipe over 3" diam: use insulation supports welded or bolted to pipe directly
above lowest pipe fitting. Thereafter locate on 12 ft centers and at each valve and
flange.
.4 Use factory fabricated, easily disassembled insulation, for valves, fittings and process
equipment requiring periodic maintenance of parts and sub-assemblies listed or
indicated.
.5 Terminate insulation at each end of unions and flanges on hot lines, and at other points
where indicated, with insulation cement, to CGSB 51-GP-6M, trowelled on bevel.
Project #2015-11
.6 Gouge out insulation for proper fit where there is interference between weld bead and
insulation. Bevel away from studs and nuts to permit their removal without damage to
insulation, and closely and neatly trim around extending parts of pipe saddles,
supports, hangers, and clamp guides and seal with insulating cement.
3.3 FLANGES
.1 Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
.1 Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
.2 Make width of insulation segments the same as overall width of the flange and
bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
.3 Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference
of adjacent straight pipe segments with a collar fabricated for preformed pipe
insulation.
.4 Fill all voids and seal all raw edges of insulation with vapor retarder mastic.
3.4 MECHANICAL FASTENERS
.1 Secure pipe insulation by straps. Space straps at not more than 900 mm on centres and
use at least 3 rows per length of insulation section.
3.5 VALVES AND FITTINGS INSULATION
.1 Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation to straight pipes, tubes,
and fittings.
.2 Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
3.6 JACKETS
.1 Interior:
.1 Apply either aluminum or PVC jacketing to exposed insulated pipe, valves, fittings,
and specialties, at an elevation of 8 feet or less above finished floor in
mechanical/electrical rooms, penthouses, and services aisles/pipe chases. Fittings
of aluminum jacketed piping may be either aluminum or standard PVC fitting covers.
Jacketing for piping in existing areas shall match existing jacketing.
.2 Apply PVC jacketing where indicated, with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and
at fitting covers, the maximum the cover allows. Seal longitudinal seams by joining
with PVC welding solvent. Seal circumferential ends with 1/ PVC tape.
.2 Exterior:
.1 Apply aluminum jacketing to all external piping that is insulated. Cover all fittings,
Project #2015-11
valves, and specialties with aluminum jacketing.
.2 Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints. Secure jacket with aluminum bands or sheet metal screws on 12 inches
centers and at end joints. On piping exposed to the weather, overlap longitudinal
seams arranged to shed water and seal end joints with weatherproof mastic.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING
1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1 Do the work in accordance with Plumbing Code under the Ontario Building Code and
local authority having jurisdiction.
.2 ASTM B88-83.
1.2 PRODUCT DATA
.1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 15010.
.2 Indicate following: valves, back-flow preventers
2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING
.1 Domestic cold tubing within building.
.1 copper tube, hard drawn, type L: to ASTM B88M-85.
.2 All piping shall have certification markings for compliance with ASTM B88-83.
2.2 FITTINGS
.1 Brass or bronze flanges and flanged fittings: to ANSI B16.24-1979.
.2 Brass or bronze threaded fittings: to ANSI B16.15-1978.
.3 Cast bronze to ANSI B16.18- 1984 or wrought copper and bronze to ANSI
B16.22-1980.
2.3 JOINTS
.1 Rubber gaskets, 1.6 mm thick: to ANSI A21.11-1980 or AWWA C111-80.
.2 Bolts, nuts, hex head and washers: to ASTM A307-83a, heavy series.
.3 For installation of the potable water system only lead free solder shall be used, as
required by the Ontario Act. Regulation 815/84 of the Ontario Water Resources.
.4 Solder, tin antimony, 95:5: to ASTM B32-83.
2.4 BALL VALVES
.1 2" diam. and under, screwed:
.1 Class 125, 860kPa, bronze body, bronze ball, with Teflon seal.
Project #2015-11
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Toyo, Crane, Kitz.
2.5 BACK-FLOW PREVENTERS
.1 A Double Check Valve Reduced Pressure Zone Assembly shall be installed at all make-
up water connections to cooling systems (chilled water and cooling tower).
.2 It consists of bronze body construction (1/4 to 2 in., 8 to 50mm) or FDA approved epoxy
coated cast iron (2 1/2 to 3 in., 65 to 80mm), two, in-line independent check valves,
replaceable check seats with an intermediate relief valve, and ball valve test cocks
.3 The assembly shall meet the requirements of ASSE Std. 1015 and AWWA Std. C510.
Approved by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research at
the University of Southern California.
.4 Standard of Acceptance: Watts Regulator Company Series 009.
2.6 STRAINERS
.1 Provide on high pressure side of pressure reducing valves, on suction side of pumps,
on inlet side of indicating and control instruments and equipment subject to sediment
damage, upstream of back-flow preventer assemblies and where else shown on
drawings. Strainer element shall be removable without disconnection of piping.
.2 Water: Basket or "Y" type with easily removable cover and brass strainer basket.
.3 Body: Smaller than 75 mm (3 inches), brass or bronze; 75 mm (3 inches) and larger,

cast iron or semi steel.
2.7 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE AND CONNECTIONS
.1 Single-seated, for dead end service for 200 to 850 kPa (30 to 125 pounds) range on low
pressure side. Composition diaphragm and stainless steel springs, bronze body with
threaded connections for sizes 15 to 55 mm (1/2 to 2 inch), cast iron or semi-steel body
with brass or bronze trimmings and flanged connections for sizes 15 to 50 mm (2-1/2
to 4 inch).
.2 Operation: Diaphragm and spring to act directly on valve stem. Delivered pressure shall
vary not more than one kPa for each 10 kPa (one pound for each 10 pounds) variation
on inlet pressure.
.3 Setting: Entering water pressure, discharge pressure, capacity, size, and related
measurements shall be as shown on the drawings.
.4 Connections Valves and Strainers: Install shut off valve on each side of reducing valve
and full sized bypass with globe valve. Install strainer on inlet side of, and same size as
pressure reducing valve. Install pressure gage on low pressure side of line.
2.8 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
Project #2015-11
.1 Provide dielectric couplings or unions between ferrous and non ferrous pipe.
2.9 STERILIZATION CHEMICALS
.1 As required by Authorities having Jursidiction, or:
.1 Liquid Chlorine: ASTM E1120.

.2 Hypochlorite: ASTM E1229, or Fed. Spec. AA-1427C, grade B.
3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Connect to equipment as shown on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturers

instructions.
.2 Cut square, ream and clean tubing and tube ends, clean recesses of fittings and
assemble without binding.
.3 Isolate equipment, fixtures and branches with gate valves or ball valves.
.4 Provide necessary chemicals and equipment and disinfect system to requirements of

authority having jurisdiction.
.5 All outdoor mounted piping to be insulated and covered with an aluminum jacket. Refer
to section 15260
.6 All indoor mounted piping to be insulated and covered with a PVC jacket.
.7 Compression fittings are not acceptable.
.8 All valves packing shall be asbestos free.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT COPPER DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS
1 General
.1 Do the work in accordance with Plumbing Code under Ontario Water Resources Act
and local authority having jurisdiction.
2 Products
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
.1 For above ground sanitary, vents and storm piping 3" diam. and smaller: Type DWV to:
.1 ASTM B306-81 for copper tube.

.2 hard drawn, type L: to ASTM B88M-85 for pumped applications.
.3 CSA B158.1-1976 for cast brass fittings.
.4 ANSI B16.29-1973 for wrought copper fittings.
.5 Solder: tin-lead, 50:50, to ASTM B32-76, type 50A.
.6 ASTM B88-83.
.2 Application: cooling tower drain and over-flow piping.
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install piping parallel and close to walls to conserve space, and to grade indicated, and
to suit installation of related work.
.2 Provide a minimum slope of 1% in the direction of flow for all horizontal section. Provide
insulation where specified in section 15260.
.3 Where piping passes through floor or wall below grade pack and seal in concrete in
accordance with Specification Section 15010.
3.2 TESTING
.1 If tests are required by an Authority Having Jurisdiction, perform tests in the presence
of each governing authority and obtain certification. Repeat tests as often as necessary
to obtain certification.
.2 Perform tests before piping is covered or concealed.
.3 Remove all fittings which will not withstand test pressure, and replace after test.
.4 Eliminate leaks, or remove and refit defective parts.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT COOLING PLANT CHEMICAL TREATMENT
1 - General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section specifies the cleaning and treatment of circulating HVAC water systems,
including the following:
.1 Cleaning compounds.
.2 Pumping and storing equipment
.3 Chemical treatment for closed loops (chilled water)
.4 Chemical treatment for open loop systems (cooling tower).
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1 Provide the services of an experienced water treatment chemical engineer or technical

representative to direct flushing, cleaning, pre-treatment, training, debugging, and
acceptance testing operations; direct and perform chemical limit control during construction
period.
.2 Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section must have a
minimum ten years documented experience. Company must have local representatives,
water analysis laboratories and full time service personnel. Installer: Company specializing
in performing the work of this section must have a minimum five years experience.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit in accordance with Section 15010, shop drawings, product data, and samples,
manufacturer's literature and data including:
.1 Cleaning compounds and recommended procedures for their use.

.2 Chemical treatment for closed and open loop systems, including installation and
operating instructions.
.3 Water analysis verification.
.4 Materials Safety Data Sheet for all proposed chemical compounds,
.5 Maintenance and operating instructions in accordance with Section 15010.
1.4 WARRANTY
.1 The manufacturer of chemical treatment equipment shall guarantee equipment of its

manufacture, and bearing its identification to be free from defects in workmanship and
material for a period of 24 months for electronics and 12 months for mechanical parts from
date of delivery from the factory or authorized distributor under normal use and service and
otherwise when such equipment is used in accordance with instructions furnished by the
manufacturer and for the purposes disclosed in writing at the time of purchase, if any.
.2 In the event a component fails to perform as specified and having been returned to the
manufacturer transportation charges prepaid, and is proven defective in service during the
warranty period, the manufacturer shall repair or replace the defective part. Replaceable
elastomeric parts and glass components are expendable and are not covered by any
warranty.
Project #2015-11
1.5 STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE
.1 Magnus (no exceptions)
2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLOSED-LOOP CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS
.1 Pot Feeder
.1 Supply and install one (1) chemical by-pass feeder on each closed loop system. The
feeder shall include the following items:
.1 One (1) 3 in. (89mm) fill opening with 4 in. (100mm) cast iron fill cap with Buna
N O-ring
.2 One (1) 6 in. (150mm), 2 IG (9 liters), chemical storage sump made of 11 gauge
steel
.3 Two (2) in. (19mm) FNPT inlet and outlet connections located on the top and
bottom of the cylinder
.2 The by-pass feeder shall be designed tested for a maximum working pressure of
300lb/in2 (2070 kPa) at 200F (93C)
.3 Acceptable Product: MAGNOR model VTF -2HP
.2 Bypass Filter
.1 Supply and install one (1) side stream filter assembly on each closed loop system.
The assembly shall be capable of filtering 5 to 10 times the total volume of the
system per day or up to 5% of the circulation pump capacity and shall include the
following items:
.1 One (1) stainless steel sump with nickel plated head; Maximum operating
pressure of 250 lb/in2 (1724kPa); Maximum operating temperature of 275F
(135 C);
.2 Provide thirty (30) 20 micron, cotton wound, tin core filter cartridge;
.3 Two (2) 0-60 lb/in2 pressure gauges with in. brass isolator ball valves;
.4 Two (2) in. brass isolator gate valves;
.5 Factory assembled copper piping and compression fittings;
.2 The assembly is entirely factory assembled ready to be installed by the mechanical

contractor;
.3 Acceptable product: MAGNOR FCF-H series
.3 Piping
.1 Chemical feed piping, schedule 80 black steel, crosses at all changes in direction
with unconnected ports plugged.
Project #2015-11
.4 Cleaning Compounds (new piping)
.1 Prior to system start-up, proceed to clean the new piping with the recommended
cleaning compound to remove oil, grease and debris;
.2 The new piping cleaner shall have the following characteristics:

.1 Rapid action formula;
.2 Almost neutral pH so no neutralization required;
.3 Low foaming at all temperatures;
.4 Containing a passivation agent;
.5 Designed to be used on all types of metals;
.6 Biodegradable;
.7 Phosphate free;
.8 Safe on equipment;
.9 C1 approved for use in industrial and food applications;
.3 The mechanical contractor shall supply to the chemical supplier the volume of water
in the system;
.4 The cleaning shall be performed by the mechanical contractor following the

recommendations of the water treatment representative. The water treatment
specialist shall provide a written cleaning procedure to the contractor upon shipment
of the cleaning chemicals
.5 During the cleaning procedure, samples will be taken and analysed by the water
treatment representative to validate the following parameters:
.1 Chemical cleaner concentration during the circulation of the cleaning solution;
.2 Chemical cleaner concentration in the final rinse water;
.6 The water treatment specialist shall confirm the test results to the mechanical
contractor and guide him in the next steps to take;
.7 The analysis shall be followed by official written reports confirming that the system
has been well cleaned and flushed. A copy of the reports are to be handed over to
the customer or the consulting engineer;
.8 Acceptable product: MAGNUS CHEMICALS MAGSOL 20A
.5 Cleaning Compounds (existing piping)
.1 Prior to system start-up, proceed to clean the existing piping with the recommended
cleaning compound to remove iron, scale or organic deposits;
.2 The mechanical contractor shall provide the volume of water in the system, piping
and deposit samples representative of the systems condition. In-house laboratory
tests and pipe cleaning simulations will be performed to confirm the correct
procedure and chemical concentrations to be applied;
.3 The cleaning shall be performed by the MAGNOR technical service team;
.4 During the cleaning procedure, samples will be taken daily and analysed by the
Project #2015-11
water treatment representative to validate the following parameters:
.1 Chemical cleaner concentration during the circulation of the cleaning solution;

.3 Piping sample to confirm the effectiveness of the cleaning procedure;
.6 The analysis shall be followed by official written reports confirming that the system
has been well cleaned and flushed. A copy of the reports are to be handed over to
the customer or the consulting engineer;
.7 Acceptable product: MAGNUS CHEMICALS FERSOL SERIES CLEANERS
.6 Inhibitors
.1 Supply the following corrosion inhibition chemicals for the closed loop heating and
cooling water systems:
.1 One (1) 20 litre pail of MAGCARE 104 for each 10 000 litres in total system
volume. This corrosion inhibitor/dispersant for closed loop systems is a green
product as it is exempt of heavy metals and is considered to be totally organic;
.2 Acceptable product: MAGNUS CHEMICALS MAGCARE 104
.7 Test Materials
.1 Supply the following test material for MAGCARE 104 concentration validation:
.1 One (1) model TK-158 test kit complete with carrying case;
.2 One (1) pocket pH-metre with automatic temperature compensation;
.3 Acceptable product: MAGNUS CHEMICALS
.8 Start-up Services
.1 The equipment and chemical supplier shall ensure the proper start-up of the
equipment and chemical program and provide all the necessary information and
training to the building operator concerning the equipment operation and the correct
application of water treatment chemistry;
.2 The equipment and chemical supplier must provide a written report attesting to the
equipment and chemical start-up;
.3 The water treatment specialist shall provide the following services:
.1 Information and instructions to the operating staff;
.2 Reference manuals on equipment and chemical application;
.3 Up-to-date product bulletins and MSDS sheets;
.4 Water treatment chemistry application information;
.5 Water analysis execution demonstration and training;
2.2 OPEN-LOOP COOLING TOWER SYSTEMS
Project #2015-11
.1 General
.1 Existing chemical treatment controller and pumps will remain. Provide new
chemicals and accessories as necessary for the re-connection and proper operation
of the existing chemical treatment system.
.2 Cleaning Compounds:
.1 Prior to system start-up, proceed to clean the new piping with the recommended
cleaning compound to remove oil, grease and debris
.2 The new piping cleaner shall have the following characteristics;
.1 Rapid action formula;
.2 Almost neutral pH so no neutralization required;
.3 Low foaming at all temperatures;
.4 Containing a passivation agent;
.5 Designed to be used on all types of metals;
.6 Biodegradable;
.7 Phosphate free;
.8 Safe on equipment;
.9 C1 approved for use in industrial and food applications;
.3 The mechanical contractor shall supply to the chemical supplier the volume of
water in the system;
.4 The cleaning shall be performed by the mechanical contractor following the

recommendations of the water treatment representative. The water treatment
specialist shall provide a written cleaning procedure to the contractor upon
shipment of the cleaning chemicals;
.5 During the cleaning procedure, samples will be taken and analysed by the water
treatment representative to validate the following parameters:
.1 Chemical cleaner concentration during the circulation of the cleaning

solution;
.7 The analysis shall be followed by official written reports confirming that the
system has been well cleaned and flushed. A copy of the reports are to be
handed over to the customer or the consulting engineer;
.8 Acceptable product: MAGNUS MAGCARE 320
.3 Water Treatment Chemicals:
.1 Twelve (12) pails of Magnatrol 300A (initial passivation compound);

.2 Twelve (12) pails of MAGCARE 204 (Corrosion inhibitor);
.3 Four (4) pails of Magnatrol 42A (Biocide #1);
Project #2015-11
.4 Four (4) pails of Magnatrol 46A (Biocide #2);
.4 Test Materials:
.1 Supply test material for corrosion inhibitor concentration validation

.2 One (1) model M5 test cabinet
.3 One (1) model TK-158 test kit complete with carrying case;
.4 One (1) TK-121 chloride test kit;
.5 One (1) digital pocket conductivity-metre;
.6 One (1) digital pocket pH-metre;
.5 Water Treatment Services:
.1 The equipment and chemical supplier shall ensure the proper start-up of the
equipment and chemical program and provide all the necessary information and
training to the building operator concerning the equipment operation and the
correct application of water treatment chemistry;
.2 The equipment and chemical supplier must provide a written report attesting to
the equipment and chemical start-up;
.3 The water treatment specialist shall provide the following services:
.1 Information and instructions to the operating staff;Reference manuals on

equipment and chemical application;
.2 Up-to-date product bulletins and MSDS sheets;
.3 Water treatment chemistry application information;
.4 Water analysis execution demonstration and training;
2.3 EYE WASH STATION
.1 Supply and install one emergency face/eye wash station (potable water). New eye
wash shall be located at or in close proximity (within 10) to chemical treatment station
with no obstruction or tripping hazards in between chemical containers, filter-feeders,
chemical pumps and conductivity controller are considered chemical treatment station.
Secure the station base to concrete floor.
.2 Face/eye wash station shall be pedestal type and shall include a green ABS plastic 11"
(27.9 cm) bowl, eye/face wash head shall feature inverted directional laminar flow which
achieves zero vertical velocity supplied by an integral flow control, chrome-plated brass
stay-open ball valve equipped with stainless steel ball and stem, and chrome-plated
brass in-line 50 x 50 mesh water strainer. Unit shall also include 1-1/4" Schedule 40
hot-dipped galvanized steel pipe and fittings along with powder-coated cast-iron 9" (22.9
cm) diameter floor flange, yellow plastic pop-off dust cover for eyewash head, universal
sign, 1/2" IPS inlet, and 1-1/4" IPS waste.
.3 Face/eye wash station shall becertified by CSA to meet the ANSI Z358.1 Standard for
Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment.
.4 Standard of acceptance: Haws, model 7261-7271.
3 - EXECUTION
Project #2015-11
3.1 PRE-OPERATIONAL CLEANING OF SYSTEM - CHILLED WATER LOOP
.1 Suggested cleaning procedure is listed below. Pre-operational cleaning of chilled water

system shall be done in strict accordance wit the chemical treatment supplier
recommendations.
.2 Prior to chemical cleaning, the systems shall be inspected to ensure removal of heavy
debris and excessive dirt and oil. Temporary strainers shall be installed on the suction
side of each pump.
.3 Provisions shall be made for temporary connections between the supply and return
mains in the system to permit circulation of the cleaner. A 1" pipe connection shall be
provided on the suction side of the circulating pumps for introduction of the cleaning
solution.
.4 Each system shall be flushed to remove loose dirt and shall be hydrostatically tested to
ensure that there are no leaks. Rotation of pumps shall be checked.
.5 The contractor shall introduce a neutral pH cleaner and rust remover into each system
at a dosage recommended by the water treatment supplier. The cleaner shall not attack
carbon steel, copper, stainless steel, bronze, brass, aluminum, plastics or natural and
synthetic rubbers. Flash rusting shall not occur after cleaning.
.6 The cleaner shall be circulated at a temperature of 1OC to 80OC for a period of not less
than 72 hours. PH adjustment shall be carried out by the water treatment suppliers
representative.
.7 Each system shall be drained, refilled with fresh water, recirculated for a period of 12
hours, drained a second time, and immediately refilled and treated with the
recommended corrosion inhibitor.
.8 The water treatment company shall provide the loan of a drum pump and dolly to
facilitate the introduction of the cleaner into the system.
3.2 COOLING TOWER OPEN CIRCUIT SYSTEM
.1 Cleaning sequence
.1 Flush and drain systems to remove all debris.

.2 Refill and circulate with full flow through all piping.
.3 Add chemicals as recommended by Chemical Treatment Company representative to
system water and continue to circulate without load for 48 to 72 hours.
.4 Thoroughly flush entire system; monitor flushing progress as per Chemical
Treatment Company recommendations.
.5 Verify and log in a report to confirm flushing is complete.
.6 Contact chemical treatment company to begin water treatment program immediately
after flushing confirmation.
.2 Install PVC injection nozzles with corporation stops in the water piping serving the
cooling tower downstream of the heat source.
Project #2015-11
.3 The inlet piping shall connect to the discharge side of the circulating water pump. The
outlet piping shall connect to the water piping serving the cooling tower downstream of
the heat source.
.4 All chemical pumps shall be mounted no higher than 5 foot above floor elevation, with 4
foot being the optimal height. All chemical pumps shall be located within 5 feet of
conductivity controller.
.5 Provide a by-pass line around water meters and bleed off piping assembly. Provide ball
valves to allow for bypassing, isolation, and servicing of components.
.6 Bleed off water piping with bleed off piping assembly shall be piped from pressure side
of circulating water piping to a convenient drain. Bleed off connection to main circulating
water piping shall be upstream of chemical injection nozzles.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CENTRIFUGAL CHILLER
1 GENERAL
.1 Section includes design, performance criteria, refrigerants, controls, and installation

requirements for water-cooled magnetic bearing two stage centrifugal chillers.
.2 Do work in accordance with the following standards:
.1 Unit shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 550/590, latest revision
.2 Unit construction shall comply with ASHRAE 15 Safety Code, NEC, and ASME
applicable codes.
.3 Unit shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9002/BS5750, Part 2
Manufacturing Quality Standard.
.4 Unit shall be full load run tested at the factory.
.5 CSA B52-M1992.
.6 ASME Code, Section VIII.
.7 AHRI 575
.8 NEC
.9 OSHA
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.2 Indicate:
.1 Equipment including connections, piping and fittings, valves, strainers, control

assemblies and ancillaries, identifying factory and field assembled.
.2 Wiring as assembled and schematically.
.3 Dimensions, construction details, recommended installation and support, mounting
bolt hole sizes and locations and point loads.
.4 Sound power levels.
.5 Performance curves.
1.3 MAINTENANCE AND ENGINEERING DATA
.1 Data to include:
.1 Description of equipment giving manufacturers name, type, model year, capacity

and serial numbers.
.2 Provide part load performance curves.
.3 Details on operation servicing and maintenance.
.4 Recommended spare parts list.
.5 Weight
.1 Chiller performance shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 550/590, latest
edition. Equipment and installation shall be in compliance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15
Project #2015-11
(latest edition).
.2 Evaporator and condenser refrigerant side shall include ASME U stamp and
nameplate certifying compliance with ASME Section VIII, Division 1 code for unfired
pressure vessels.
.3 Chiller shall be designed and constructed to meet UL and UL, Canada requirements
and have labels appropriately affixed.
.4 Each compressor assembly shall undergo a mechanical run-in test to verify vibration
levels and temperatures are within acceptable limits. Each compressor assembly shall
be proof tested at a minimum 204 psig (1406 kPa) and leak tested at 185 psig (1276
kPa) with a tracer gas mixture.
.5 Entire chiller assembly shall be proof tested at 204 psig (1406 kPa) and leak tested at
185 psig (1276 kPa) with a tracer gas mixture on the refrigerant side. The water side
of each heat exchanger shall be hydrostatically tested at 1.3 times rated working
pressure.
.6 Prior to shipment, the chiller automated controls test shall be executed to check for
proper wiring and ensure correct controls operation.
.7 The chiller and compressors/VFD shall be factory wired and tested together to verify
proper operation prior to shipment.
1.5 DELIVERY AND HANDLING
.1 Chillers shall be delivered to the job site completely assembled and charged with
refrigerant R134a and be shipped on skids with a weather resistant cover.
.2 Comply with the manufacturer's instructions for rigging and transporting units. Leave
protective covers in place until installation.
.3 Prior to submitting the Bid, the manufacturer is to inspect the site and ensure that the
chiller can be delivered to site in one piece. If not, allow for delivery of the units in
section as required. If the chiller is delivered in sections, the manufacturer is
responsible for the re-assembly and retesting/certification of the chiller at the site.
1.6 WARRANTY
.1 The chiller manufacturer's warranty shall cover parts and labor costs for the repair or
replacement of defects in material or workmanship for a period of five years from
equipment startup.
.2 The chiller manufacturer's warranty shall cover parts and labor costs for the repair or
replacement of defects in material or workmanship including VFD and refrigerant for a
period of five (5) years from equipment startup. Refer to Specifications for items or
OEM warranties that extend beyond the five (5) years guarantee period.
.3 Warranty support shall be provided by company direct or factory authorized service
Project #2015-11
permanently located near the job site.
1.7 CAPACITY AND PERFORMANCE
.1 As indicated in the equipment schedules.
.1 Smardt, Daikin/McQuay (Magnitude Series), Arctic Chillers
.2 The design documentation has been based on the Smardt physical footprint and
electrical data. For any other manufacturer, the contractor shall remain responsible for
all changes (labour and material) required to accommodate a different footprint and/or
electrical requirements.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 Provide and install as shown on the plans a factory assembled, charged, and tested
water-cooled packaged centrifugal chiller.
.2 Chillers shall have no less than four (4) oil-free, magnetic bearing, semi-hermetic
centrifugal compressors. Each compressor shall have an integrated variable-frequency
drive operating in concert with inlet guide vanes for optimized full and part load
efficiency.
.3 On 4-compressor units, the evaporator and condenser refrigerant sides and the
expansion valve shall be common and the chiller shall be capable of running on three
compressors with the other compressor or any of its auxiliaries inoperable or removed.
.4 Each chiller shall be factory run-tested under load conditions for a minimum of one hour
on an AHRI certified test stand with evaporator and condenser waterflow at job
conditions (excluding glycol applications). Operating controls shall be adjusted and
checked.
.5 The refrigerant charge shall be adjusted for optimum operation and recorded on the unit
nameplate. Any deviation in performance or operation shall be remedied prior to
shipment and the unit retested if necessary to confirm repairs or adjustments.
Manufacturer shall supply a certificate of completion of a successful run-test upon
request.
.6 The entire chiller system, including all pressure vessels, shall remain above
atmospheric pressure during all operating conditions and during shut down to ensure
that non-condensables and moisture do not contaminate the refrigerant and chiller
system.
2.2 NOISE LEVELS
.1 Sound Pressure:
.2
Project #2015-11
Load Weighted Overall 63Hz 125Hz 250Hz 500Hz 1000Hz 2000Hz 4000Hz 8000Hz
100% 75.5 37.5 49.5 56.0 65.0 72.0 70.0 66.5 64.0
75% 72.5 39.5 48.5 55.0 61.0 69.5 64.5 64.0 60.0
50% 68.5 35.5 48.0 54.5 58.0 66.0 61.0 58.5 53.5
25% 68.0 36.0 48.5 54.5 57.5 65.5 60.5 57.5 52.0
.2 Sound Pressure (dB) measured in accordance with ANSI/AHRI Standard 575-2008

(A-weighted)
2.3 COMPRESSOR
.1 The unit shall utilize magnetic bearing, oil-free, semi-hermetic centrifugal compressors.
The levitated shaft position shall be digitally controlled and shall be monitored by X-axis
position sensor, Y-axis position sensor, and Z-axis position sensor.
.2 The compressor drive train shall be capable of coming to a controlled, safe stop in the
event of a power failure by diverting stored power to the magnetic bearing controls
system.
.3 The motor shall be of the semi-hermetic type, of sufficient size to efficiently fulfill
compressor horsepower requirements. It shall be liquid refrigerant cooled with internal
thermal sensing devices in the stator windings. The motor shall be compatible with
variable frequency drive operation.
.4 The chiller shall be equipped with an integrated Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) to
automatically regulate compressor speed in response to cooling load and the
compressor pressure lift requirement. Movable inlet guide vanes and variable
compressor speed acting together, shall provide unloading. The chiller controls shall
coordinate compressor speed and guide vane position to optimize chiller efficiency.
.5 Each compressor circuit shall be equipped with a 5% rated line reactor to help protect
against incoming power surges and help reduce harmonic distortion.
.6 The unit shall have a minimum of a 0.90 power factor at compressor full load.
2.4 COOLER AND CONDENSER:
.1 The evaporator and condenser shall be separate vessels of the shell-and-tube type,
designed, constructed, tested and stamped according to the requirements of the ASME
Code, Section VIII.
.2 Regardless of the operating pressure, the refrigerant side of each vessel will bear the
ASME stamp indicating compliance with the code and indicating a test pressure of 1.1
times the working pressure, but not less than 100 psig. The tubes shall be individually
replaceable and secured to the intermediate supports without rolling or expanding to
facilitate replacement if required.
.3 The evaporator shall be flooded type with 0.025 in. wall copper internally and externally
enhanced tubes rolled into carbon steel tubesheets. The water side shall be designed
Project #2015-11
for a minimum of 150 psig. The refrigerant side shall be designed for a minimum of 200
psi. Provide intermediate tube supports at a maximum of 18 inch spacing. The heads
shall be carbon steel and the tubesheets shall be carbon steel.
.4 Chilled water and condenser connections shall be grooved suitable for Victaulic
couplings. No other Victaulic connections permitted in the new chiller plant.
.5 The evaporator and condenser shall have dished heads with valved drain and vent
connections. The condenser shall have 0.025 in. wall copper internally and externally
enhanced tubes rolled into carbon steel.
.6 The water side shall be designed for a minimum of 150 psig and the refrigerant side
shall be designed for a minimum of 200 psi. Provide intermediate tube supports at a
maximum of 18 inch spacing.
.7 Both evaporator and condenser inlets/outlets shall be located on the same side of the
chiller, to suit the configuration shown on the drawings.
.8 The evaporator, including water heads, suction line, and any other component or part
of a component subject to condensing moisture shall be insulated with UL recognized
3/4 inch closed cell insulation. All joints and seams shall be carefully sealed to form a
vapor barrier.
.9 Provide factory-mounted and wired, thermal-dispersion water flow switches on each

vessel to prevent unit operation with no or low water flow. Paddle and pressure
differential type switches are not acceptable due to high rates of failure and false
indications from these types of flow indicators.
2.5 REFRIGERANT FLOW CONTROL
.1 Provide sufficient isolation valves and condenser volume to hold the full unit refrigerant
charge in the condenser at 90F in accordance with ANSI ASHRAE 15.A during
servicing or provide a storage tank sufficient to hold the charge of the largest unit being
furnished.
.2 An electronic expansion valve shall control refrigerant flow to the evaporator. Fixed
orifice devices or float controls with hot gas bypass are not acceptable because of
inefficient control at low load conditions. The liquid line shall have moisture indicating
sight glass.
.3 Re-seating type spring loaded pressure relief valves according to ASHRAE-15 safety
code shall be furnished. The evaporator shall be provided with single or multiple valves.
The condenser shall be provided with dual relief valves equipped with a transfer valve
so one relief valve can be removed for testing or replacement without loss of refrigerant
or removal of refrigerant from the condenser. Rupture disks are not acceptable. If
rupture disks are required on negative pressure units to prevent air and moisture
ingress, then factory mounted spring loaded pressure relief valves shall be provided in
series with the rupture disks to contain the remaining refrigerant in the event of vessel
over-pressurization. The space between the rupture disk and the relief valve shall
include a suitable telltale indicator integrated into the chiller control system to alert the
operator that a potential safety issue exists in the pressure relief system.
Project #2015-11
2.6 VIBRATION ISOLATION
.1 Provide isolation sprins as indicated in section 15241.
2.7 CONTROLS, SAFETIES, AND DIAGNOSTICS
.1 The unit shall have a microprocessor-based control system consisting of a 15-inch VGA
touch-screen operator interface and a unit controller.
.2 The touch-screen shall display the unit operating parameters, accept setpoint changes
(multi-level password protected) and be capable of resetting faults and alarms. The
following parameters shall be displayed on the home screen and also as trend curves
on the trend screen:
.1 Entering and leaving chilled water temperatures

.2 Entering and leaving condenser water temperatures
.3 Evaporator saturated refrigerant pressure
.4 Condenser saturated refrigerant pressure
.5 Percent of 100% speed (per compressor)
.6 % of rated load amps for entire unit
.3 In addition to the trended items above, all other important real-time operating
parameters shall also be shown on the touch-screen. These items shall be displayed
on a chiller graphic showing each component. At a minimum, the following critical areas
must be monitored:
.1 Compressor actual speed, maximum speed, percent speed

.2 Liquid line temperature
.3 Chilled water setpoint
.4 Compressor and unit state and input and output digital and analog values
.4 A fault history shall be displayed using an easy to decipher, color coded set of
messages that are date and time stamped. Time interval scale shall be user selectable
as 20 mins, 2 hours, or 8 hours. The alarm history shall be downloadable from the
unit's USB port. An operating and maintenance manual specific for the unit shall be
viewable on the screen.
.5 All setpoints shall be viewable and changeable (multi-level password protected) on the
touch screen and include setpoint description and range of set values.
.6 Automatic corrective action to reduce unnecessary cycling shall be accomplished

through preemptive control of low evaporator or high discharge pressure conditions to
keep the unit operating through abnormal transient conditions.
.7 Chiller plant optimization software for multiple chillers shall be provided including
automatic control of: at least two (2) chillers, evaporator and condenser pumps (primary
and standby), up to 3 stages of cooling tower fan cycling control and a tower modulating
bypass valve or cooling tower fan variable frequency drives.
.8 The factory supplied VFD and controls should include the following:
Project #2015-11
.1 High short circuit panel rating of 35kA with a matching circuit breaker
.2 Phase loss protection
.3 Under/over voltage protection
.9 Energy saving software logic shall at a minimum offer the following
.1 User programmable compressor soft loading

.2 Chilled water reset
.3 Demand limit control
.4 Staging options lead lag between multiple compressors on a single chiller or on
multiple chillers
.5 Plotting of historic trends for optimizing efficiency
.10 BAS interface: chiller must be provided with means of interfacing with the existing
BAS system in order to achieve the sequence of operation described on drawing M-
3. Chiller controls must be compatible with the existing BAS.
2.8 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
.1 Power connection shall be single point to a factory-mounted control panel.
.2 The contractor shall supply and install main electrical power line, disconnect switches,
circuit breakers, and electrical protection devices per local code requirements and as
indicated necessary by the chiller manufacturer.
.3 The contractor shall wire the chilled water pumps, condenser water pumps, and tower
fan control circuit to the chiller control circuit.
.4 The contractor shall supply and install electrical wiring and devices required to interface
the chiller controls with the building control system as indicated on the drawings.
.5 Electrical power shall be supplied to the unit at the voltage, phase, and frequency listed
in the equipment schedule.
2.9 PIPING REQUIREMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND SAFETIES:
.1 Mechanical contractor shall supply and install pressure gages in readily accessible
locations in piping adjacent to the chiller such that they can be easily read from a
standing position on the floor. Scale range shall be such that design values shall be
indicated at approximately mid-scale.
.2 Gages shall be installed in the entering and leaving water lines of the cooler and
condenser.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Unit to be installed as indicated and to manufacturers recommendations, ensuring
Project #2015-11
adequate clearances for servicing and maintenance, including tubes removal and
cleaning.
.2 Coordinate the installation of the new chiller with the existing building services. Relocate
existing utilities as required to make room for the new equipment, if necessary.
.3 Provide a suitable concrete support pad, in accordance with section 15010. Also refer
to section 15241
.4 Ensure manufacturers field service representative approves installation and is present

to supervise start up and to instruct operators.
.5 Connect to power supply. Replace the existing chiller starter with a new fused
disconnect and locate where shown; ensure that its location conforms to NEC
clearances and it does not interfere with the clearances for the chiller maintenance and
operation. Make connections to existing power source as indicated and in full
conformance with NEC.
.6 At the conclusion of the work, make good all surfaces affected by the work, including
repair of cut re-bars where necessary.
.7 All new above-ground wiring to run in metallic conduit except for the last 3 ft which can
be liquid-tight flexible conduit, for vibration isolation purposes. Wiring size to match the
equipment electrical rating. Provide grounding as required by code. Maintain the color
coding of conductors currently in use in the building. Label disconnects.
.8 Arrange and pay for inspection by Electrical Safety Authority. Include certificate of
inspection in Maintenance Manual (see section 15010).
.9 Connect and interlock the controls of the new chiller to the controls of the existing
cooling tower such as to make the system completely functional.
.10 Re-connect the new chiller to the existing school BAS and refrigerant monitoring
equipment. Update graphics and sequencing of operation as required to reflect the
new equipment.
.11 Re-connect the new chiller to the existing chilled water piping and condenser water
piping.
.12 Provide all necessary piping so the chiller , piping and accessories are serviceable,
without having to dismantle excessive lengths of pipe.
.13 Provide wells and taps for thermometers, sensors and pressure gauges in water
piping adjacent to inlet and outlet connections of evaporator.
.14 Provide certified wiring schematics to the electrical division for chiller, associated
equipment and controls.
.15 Provide necessary wiring for control items, such as flow switches, temperature
sensors, etc., as recommended by the manufacturer.
Project #2015-11
.16 Connect the refrigerant sensors, manual shut off stations, and visual alarms to the
alarm panels.
3.2 START - UP SERVICE
.1 Provide a factory-trained service technician without additional charge to start and adjust
the units. Representatives shall provide leak testing, evacuation, dehydration, and
charging of the unit. Units that are factory charged or shipped with a refrigerant holding
charge shall not require field evacuation and dehydration.
.2 Provide a start up log by the manufacturer to document the chiller's start-up date.
.3 The manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Board's personnel on the operation
and maintenance of the unit. The warranty period shall commence at the date of initial
startup and shall continue for a period of one year. Manufacturers warranty shall
include all parts and labour to install parts. Refrigerant shall also be included and the
labour to add refrigerant to the system.
3.3 REFRIGERANT VENTING
.1 As per ASHRAE 15-2004, Section 9.7.8
.2 The relief piping should vent R-134a refrigerant at least 15 feet above ground level and
at least 201 feet from any window, ventilation opening, or building exit. The discharge
piping should prevent a discharged refrigerant from being sprayed directly on personnel
and prevent foreign material or debris from entering the piping.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CENTRIFUGAL COOLING TOWER
1 - GENERAL
1.1 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA:
.1 Manufacturer shall certify that performance of cooling towers will meet contract
requirements, stating entering air wet bulb temperature, entering and leaving condenser
water temperatures, water flow rates, fan kW (horsepower), and pump head at base of
tower. Certification shall be made at the time of shop drawings submittal.
.2 Free water drift loss shall not be greater than five hundredths of one percent of the
water circulated to tower.
1.2 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA:
.1 Manufacturer shall certify that performance of cooling towers will meet the performace
requirements indicated in the equipment schedule stating entering air wet bulb
temperature, entering and leaving condenser water temperatures, water flow rates, fan
kW (horsepower), and pump head at base of tower. Certification shall be made at the
time of submittal.
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with

drawings and specifications.
.2 Include rated capacities, pressure drop, fan performance and rating curves,
dimensions, weights, mounting details, front view, side view, equipment and device
arrangement.
.3 Include electrical rating, detail wiring for power, signals and controls.
.4 Sound curves and characteristics of sound attenuators if required to meet the noise
criteria.
1.4 CERTIFICATION
.1 Submit four copies of performance curves, for CTI certified cooling towers, showing
compliance with actual conditions specified, to the Consultant two weeks prior to
delivery of the equipment.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
.1 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
.1 American National Standard Institute (ANSI):
< A10.18-83 Construction and Demolition Operations - Temporary Floor and Wall
Openings, Flat Roofs, Stairs, Railings, and Toeboards - Safety E
Project #2015-11
.2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
< PTC 23-R97 Atmospheric Water Cooling Equipment Requirements

(Performance Test Codes)
.3 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):
< A385-00 Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip)
< B117-97 Standard Practice for Salt Spray (Fog) Testing
< B209-00 Standard practice for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
< E84-Rev A00 Standard Test methods for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
.4 Cooling Tower Institute (CTI):
< ATC-105-00 Acceptance Test Code for Water-Cooling Towers (CTI Code
Tower Standard Specifications)
< ATC-105S-96 Acceptance Test Code for Closed Circuit Cooling Towers (CTI
Code Tower Standard Specifications)
< 201-96 Standard for Certification of Water Cooling Tower Performance (CTI
Code Tower Standard Specifications)
.5 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
< MG1-98 Motors and Generators (Revision 1-2000)

< 250-97 Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
.6 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
< 70-02 National Electrical Code
.1 The manufacturer shall have a Management System certified by an accredited registrar

as complying with the requirements of ISO-9001 to ensure consistent quality of
products and services. Manufacturers that are not ISO-9001 certified shall not be
acceptable.
1.7 WARRANTY
.1 The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall be for a period of not less than
one year from date of startup or eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever
occurs first. In addition, the manufacturer shall warrant the rotating mechanical
equipment, including fans, fan motors, fan shafts, bearings, sheaves and associated
supports for not less than five (5) years from date of shipment.
.1 BAC VT1 series (refer to product schedule on M-1 for model and parameters)
Project #2015-11
2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 Furnish and install a factory-assembled, forced-draft, centrifugal fan, counter-flow

cooling tower with vertical air discharge conforming in all aspects to the specifications,
schedules and as shown on the plans.
2.2 THERMAL CAPACITY:
.1 Additionally, the thermal performance shall be certified by the Cooling Technology

Institute in accordance with CTI Certification Standard STD-201. Lacking such
certification, a field acceptance test shall be conducted within the warranty period in
accordance with CTI Acceptance Test Code ATC-105, by the Cooling Technology
Institute or other qualified independent third party testing agency.
2.3 CORROSION RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION:
.1 The system shall consist of G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in
a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed,
thermosetting hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated
curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program.
.2 Basin: Type 304 stainless steel.
2.4 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
.1 Structure:
.1 The cooling tower shall be constructed of heavy-gauge steel utilizing double-brake

flanges for maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of watertight joints.
The fill shall be removable from the basin section to facilitate shipping and handling.
The fan and fan drive system, including the fan motor, shall be factory mounted and
aligned and located in the dry entering airstream to ensure reliable operation and
ease of maintenance.
.2 Fill:
.1 The heat transfer sections shall consist of a fill, spray water distribution system and
drift eliminators arranged for optimal thermal performance with minimal drift. The
fill shall be formed from self-extinguishing (per UL94 HB and UL94 V-0 testing)
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) having a flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84 and shall
be impervious to rot, decay, and fungus or biological attack. The fill shall be
manufactured and performance tested by the cooling tower manufacturer to assure
single source responsibility and control of the final product.
.3 Water Distribution System:
.1 Water shall be distributed evenly over the fill by a water distribution system
consisting of a header and spray branches of Schedule 40 PVC pipe with large
Project #2015-11
orifice, non-clog plastic distribution nozzles. The branches and spray nozzles shall
be held in place by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of individual
nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or flushing.
.4 Cold Water Basin:
.1 The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavy-gauge 304 stainless steel
panels and structural members up to the heat transfer section/basin joint. The basin
shall be provided with large area lift out strainers with perforated openings sized
smaller than the water distribution system nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to
prevent air entrainment. The strainer and anti-vortexing device shall be constructed
of the same material as the basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion. Standard
basin accessories shall include a brass make-up valve with large diameter
polystyrene filled plastic float for easy adjustment of the operating water level.
.5 Drift Eliminators
.1 Eliminators shall be constructed of specially formulated PVC and be removable in

easily handled sections. They shall have a minimum of three changes in air
direction. Same material as fill. Performance: 0.001% drift rate.
2.5 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
.1 Fans:
.1 Forward curved, centrifugal of hot dipped galvanized construction. The fans shall
be factory installed, and statically and dynamically balanced for vibration free
operation. Fans shall be selected to provide optimum thermal performance with
minimal sound levels.
.2 Fan housings shall have curved inlet rings for efficient air entry and four-sided
rectangular discharge cowls shall extend into the basin to increase fan efficiency
and prevent water from splashing into the fans.
.2 Bearings:
.1 Fans and shafts shall be supported by heavy-duty, self-aligning, relubricatable

bearings with cast iron housings, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours
(280,000 Hr. Avg. Life).
.3 Fan Drive:
.1 The fans shall be driven by matched V-belts with taper lock sheaves designed for
not less than 150% of the motor nameplate horsepower. Motor shall be located on
a heavy-duty motor base, adjustable by a single threaded bolt-and-nut arrangement.
Removable steel screens or panels shall protect the fan drive and all moving parts.
.4 Fan Motors:
.1 Fan motors shall fully compatible with variable speed drive operation (inverter-
Project #2015-11
ready) be totally enclosed air over (TEFL), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing
type designed specifically for cooling tower service. The motor shall be furnished
with special moisture protection on windings, shafts and bearings and labeled
appropriately for cooling tower duty.
.5 Mechanical Equipment Warranty:
.1 The fans, fan shafts, bearings, mechanical equipment support and fan motor shall
be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of five (5)
years from date of shipment.
2.6 ACCESS
.1 The unit shall be provided with the following:
.1 an access ladder with a safety cage

.2 top level cat walk c/w handrails
.3 circular access doors shall be provided for easy access to the make-up water
assembly and suction strainer for routine maintenance.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
.1 Vibration Isolation Rails:
.1 Spring-type vibration isolation rails, constructed of steel channels and base plates,
coated with a 0.003 (.076 mm) layer of zinc after fabrication shall be provided to
minimize vibration transmission from the tower to the building structure. The
isolators shall be designed for a static deflection of 1 (25.4 mm) and a maximum
wind speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
.2 Basin Water Level Control:
.1 The cooling tower manufacturer shall provide an electric water level control (EWLC)
system. The system shall consist of water level sensing and control units in
quantities and locations as determined by the manufacturer. Each water level
sensing and control unit shall consist of the following:
< NEMA 4 enclosure with gasketed access cover; solid state controls including all
necessary relays and contacts to achieve the specified sequence of operation;
stainless steel water level sensing electrodes with brass holder; Schedule 40
PVC standpipe assembly with vent holes, and all necessary stainless steel
mounting hardware. Provide PVC union directly below the control enclosure to
facilitate the removal and access of electrodes and control enclosure.
< The number and position of water level sensing electrodes shall be provided to
sense the following: high water level, low water level, high water alarm level, low
water alarm, and heater safety cutout.
< The weather protected slow closing solenoid valve(s) for the makeup water
connection is factory supplied and is ready for piping to a water supply with a
Project #2015-11
pressure between 5 and 125 psig (35 kPa and 860 kPa).
.3 Electric Heaters
.1 Not required.
2.8 EQUIPMENT CONTROLS
.1 General
.1 The equipment controls shall be fully compatible with the existing BAS installed in
the school and with the chiller controls package.
.2 The system shall operate in accordance with the sequence of operations indicated
on the drawings, such as to maintain the chiller unit at the optimal efficiency and
performance levels.
.2 Variable Frequency Drives:
.1 Refer to section 15850.
3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION

adequate clearances for servicing and maintenance.
.2 Install cooling towers plumb, level and anchored on structure provided. Coordinate steel
structure with cooling tower mounting requirements.
.3 Contractor to review the existing steel support structure under platform and to modify
or add additional structural support members as required to ensure that the footprint
of the new cooling tower is adapted to the footprint of the existing supports.
.4 Install vibration controls according to manufacturers recommendations
.5 Install piping, including flanges or union adjacent to cooling towers to allow for service
and maintenance.
.6 Install flexible pipe connectors at connections to cooling tower inlets/outlets. Install the
cooling tower spring isolation. Cooling tower supports supplied by the manufacturer or
as per section 15241.
.7 Install shutoff valves at cooling tower inlet connections.
.8 Connect overflow drain and blow down lines to sanitary sewage system. Use existing
pipe routing and existing floor drain located adjacent to the pumps.
.9 Ensure manufacturers field service representative approves installation and is
Project #2015-11
present to supervise start up and to instruct operators.
.10 Provide all power supply wiring, control wiring and all devices required to make the
cooling tower fully operational. Install electrical devices, components and
accessories furnished loose by manufacturer, including remote flow switches and
variable frequency drives.
.11 Coordinate with the Consultant the final location of the cooling tower disconnect
switch and fans VFD in the chiller room. All wiring between the indoor VFD and the
outdoor motor: by the contractor, in metallic conduit except where specified
otherwise in section 15241.
.12 Paint all cooling tower components that are not galvanized, all outdoor uninsulated
piping and all structural support elements which are not galvanized as indicated in
section 15010.
3.2 START- UP SERVICE
.1 Provide a factory-trained service technician without additional charge to start and adjust
the units. Provide a start up log by the manufacturer to document the cooling tower
start-up date.
.2 Perform startup checks, according to manufacturer's written instructions, and as noted

below:
.1 Check clearances for airflow and tower servicing.

.2 Check for vibration isolation and structural support.
.3 Verify fan rotation for correct direction. Correct rotation if needed.
.4 Adjust belts to proper alignment and tension.
.5 Lubricate rotating parts.
.6 Operate equipment controls and safeties.
.7 Verify that tower discharge is high enough and it does not recirculate into air intake.
Recommend corrective action.
.8 Adjust water level for proper operating level and balance condenser water flow to
each tower inlet.
.9 Check water treatment water system, including blow down for proper operation of
the tower.
.10 Start cooling tower, including condenser water pumps and verify the tower
operation.
.11 Prepare and submit a written report of startup and inspection service to the
Consultant
3.3 TRAINING
.1 Furnish the services of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician for a 2-hour

period for instructing the Owners personnel in operation and maintenance of the
equipment, including review of the operation and maintenance manual, on a date
requested by the Consultant.
.2 Coordinate this training with that of the chiller, if furnished together.
Project #2015-11
- END -
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT HVAC PIPING
1 - GENERAL
.1 Do piping system work in accordance with ANSI B31.1-1983.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.2 Indicated on manufacturers catalogue literature the following: - valves.
1.3 MAINTENANCE DATA
.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 15010.
2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE
.1 2" diam and smaller:
.1 Schedule 40. Continuous weld or electric resistance welded black carbon steel
conforming to ASTM A53-84a Grade B, with threaded ends.
.2 Type L hard drawn copper tubing conforming to ASTM B88. Type L soft
annealed copper tubing may be used within convector enclosures.
.2 2 diam and larger
conforming to ASTM A53-84a Grade B, with bevelled ends.
conforming to ASTM A53-84a Grade B, with grooved ends conforming to CSA
B242-M.
2.2 PIPE JOINTS
.1 2" diam and smaller
.1 Wrought copper solder joint pressure type, with PS to copper adapters at screwed
connections. Solder to be tin antimony 95:5: To ASTM 832
Project #2015-11
.2 Class 2000 forged steel socket welding type, conforming to ASTM A1O5 Grade 2
and ANSI/ASME B16.1 1.
.1 Schedule 40, seamless carbon steel butt welding fittings conforming to ASTM A234
WPB and ANSI/ASME B16.9
2.3 UNIONS
.1 All brass construction with ground joint and either solder joint or screwed ends as
required.
.2 Class 150 black malleable iron construction with brass to iron ground joint and
screwed ends, conforming to ASTM A197 and ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.
.3 Provide dielectric unions or couplings at all connections between copper tubing and
ferrous piping or equipment.
2.4 FLANGES
.1 Class 150 forged steel slip-on or weldneck raised face type conforming to ASTM A181
Grade 1 and ANSI/ASME B16.5. Remove raised face where flanges connect to Class
125 cast iron valves.
.2 Hinged, two piece, shouldered or keyed cast malleable iron
.3 Conforming to ASTM A47 Grade 32510 with elastomeric gasket suitable for service and
lock bolt.
2.5 GASKETS AND BOLTS
.1 Gaskets
.1 1.6 mm (1/16") Garlock 3200 with SBR binder or equivalent asbestos free material.
.2 Bolts
.1 Semi finished hex head machine bolts and semi finished hex nuts, both of carbon
steel conforming. to ASTM A307 Class A.
2.6 PLUGS
.1 Class 3000 screwed, square head, machined from solid steel or forging to ASTM
A105 Grade 2.
Project #2015-11
2.7 GLOBE VALVES
.1 2" diam and under, screwed:
.1 To MSS SP-80-1974, class 150, 1 MPa, bronze body, screwed over bonnet,
renewable composition disc.
.2 Lockshield handles: as indicated.
.3 Standard of Acceptance: Crane Fig. 7, Jenkins Fig IO6BJ, Toyo 221, Kitz Fig 09
and Grinnell 3240.
.2 2 and over, flanged:
.1 To MSS SP-85, Class 125, 860 kPa, F.F. flange, cast iron body, bronze trim, OS&Y,
bolted bonnet, bronze disc and renewable and regrindable seat ring.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Crane Fig 351, Toyo 400A, Kitz Fig. 76 and Grinnell
6200A.
2.8 BUTTERFLY VALVES
.1 2 diam and over, full lug body:
.1 To MSS SP-67-1976, Class 150, 1 MPa WOG water, cast iron body with cast iron
or bronze disc, stainless steel stem, replaceable EPDM liner, with notched top plate
and leverl lock handle for valve sizes NPS 6 and smaller, and worm gear operator
with hand wheel for valves NPS 8 and larger. For glycol service utilize stainless
steel trim. Lugs to be tapped. Shutoff up to 200 psi (1720 kPa) rating if downstream
equipment is removed.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Centerline Fig L200L-E/G200L-E, Bray, Apollo 141-143.
2.9 SWING CHECK VALVES
.1 To MSS SP-80, class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap,
regrindable seat.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Crane Fig. 37, Jenkins Fig 4092.1,. Toyo 236, Kitz Fig. 22
and Grinnell 3300..
.2 2 diam and up, flanged:
.1 To MSS SP-70, class 125, 860 kPa, cast iron body, FF flange, regrind renewable
seat, bronze disc, bolted cap.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Crane Fig. 373, Jenkins Fig 587.1, Toyo 435A, Kitz Fig.
78 and Grinnell 6300A.
Project #2015-11
.3 2" to 4" diam. for grooved end pipe:
.1 To MSS SP-71, Class 125, 860 kPa, ductile iron body, bronze or stainless steel
discs, stainless steel spring, stainless steel shaft, EPDM seat.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic, Gruvlock.
2.10 BALL VALVES
.1 2" diam and under, branch isolators, screwed:
.1 Rated for 600 WOG, bronze body, bronze ball, with Teflon seal.
.2 Ball valves shall have 111 port opening.
.3 All ball valves shallot provided with lockable handles where specified.
.4 Standard of Acceptance: Toyo 5049, Jenkins 902BJ, Crane 9322, Kitz 69 and
Grinnell 3700, Apollo 70-200.
.2 Soldered ends are only acceptable for valves that are NPS 3/4" installed in copper
piping.
3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING
.1 The drawings show the general arrangement of pipe and equipment but do not show
all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect pipes to equipment,
fan-coils, coils, radiators, etc., and to coordinate with other trades. Provide all necessary
fittings, offsets and pipe runs based on field measurements and at no additional cost
to the government. Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location
of HVAC equipment and accessories to be connected on ceiling grid. Pipe location on
the drawings shall be altered by contractor where necessary to avoid interferences and
clearance difficulties.
.2 Store materials to avoid excessive exposure to weather or foreign materials. Keep

inside of piping relatively clean during installation and protect open ends when work is
not in progress.
.3 Support piping securely.
.4 Install piping generally parallel to walls and column center lines, unless shown otherwise
on the drawings. Space piping, including insulation, to provide 25 mm (one inch)
minimum clearance between adjacent piping or other surface. Unless shown otherwise,
slope drain piping down in the direction of flow not less than 25 mm (one inch) in 12 m
(40 feet). Provide eccentric reducers to keep bottom of sloped piping flat.
.5 Locate and orient valves to permit proper operation and access for maintenance of
packing, seat and disc. Generally locate valve stems in overhead piping in horizontal
position. Provide a union adjacent to one end of all threaded end valves. Control valves
usually require reducers to connect to pipe sizes shown on the drawing. Install butterfly
Project #2015-11
valves with the valve open as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent binding of
the disc in the seat.
.6 Offset equipment connections to allow valving off for maintenance and repair with
minimal removal of piping. Provide flexibility in equipment connections and branch line
take offs with 3 elbow swing joints where noted on the drawings.
.7 Tee water piping runouts or branches into the side of mains or other branches. Avoid
bull-head tees, which are two return lines entering opposite ends of a tee and exiting
out the common side.
.8 Connect to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instruction unless otherwise

indicated.
.9 Connect to the cooling tower, chiller and pumps using vibration isolators as indicated
in section 15241.
.10 No cooling tower piping shall be supported by the roof; use the cooling tower steel
structure or the enclosure structural elements.
.11 Slope piping up in direction of flow. Use eccentric reducers at pipe size change
installed to provide positive drainage or positive venting.
.12 Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access for maintenance of
equipment, valves and fittings.
.13 Ream pipes, clean scale and dirt, inside and outside, before and after assembly.
3.2 PIPE PAINTING - COOLING TOWER/CONDENSER
.1 Refer to section 15010
3.3 VALVES
.1 Install valves as shown on drawings with stems upright or horizontal unless approved
otherwise.
.2 Provide ball valves at all branch take-offs 2" diam and under to isolate each piece of
equipment and as indicated. Provide butterfly valves on all branch take-offs to isolate
each piece of equipment for 2 and over and as indicated.
.3 Install globe valves where indicated and in bypass around control valves.
.4 Provide a drain valve at the base of all risers.
3.4 TESTING
.1 Test system in accordance with Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions.
Project #2015-11
3.5 SPARE PARTS
.1 Furnish following spare parts:
.1 Valve seats: one for every ten valves, each size. Minimum one.
.2 Discs: one for every ten valves, each size. Minimum one.
.3 Stem packing: one for every ten valves, each size. Minimum one.
.4 Valve handles: two of each size.
.5 Gaskets for flanges: one for every ten flanges.
3.6 VALVE PACKING
.1 All valve packing shall be asbestos free.
3.7 VALVE STEMS
.1 All valves for this project shall be rising stem unless stated otherwise.
3.8 BRAZING
.1 Flux shall not be allowed to penetrate to the inside of the pipe. The outside of the tube
and fittings shall be cleaned by washing with hot water in order to remove any residual
flux.
.2 During the brazing of the pipe connections, except when performing final connections
and emergency repairs, the interior of the pipe shall be maintained with a nitrogen
atmosphere. This shall be done by purging the pipe a sufficient number of times to
remove all air and oxygen and by maintaining a small purge flow to prevent reentry of
air or oxygen.
.3 Erection: Cut all pipe and tubing accurately to measurements obtained at the site of the
system and install without springing or forcing. Protect all pipe and tubing against
mechanical injury.
.4 2 diam and over: welded fittings and flanges to CSA W47.1-1973.
.5 Flanges: plain or raised face.
.6 Flange gaskets: to ANSI 816.21-1978, ANSI B16.20-1973 or ANSI A21.11-1980.
.7 Pipe thread taper: to ANSI 82.1-1968.
.8 Bolts and nuts: to ANSI 818.2.1-1972 and ANSI 818.2.2-1972.
.9 Rolled grooved coupling gaskets: type EPDM for temperature range minus 35 C. to plus
100 C.
3.9 FITTINGS
.1 Pipe fittings, screwed, flanged or welded:
Project #2015-11
.1 Cast iron pipe flanges: Class 125 to ANSI 816.1-1975.
.2 Malleable iron screwed fittings: Class 150 to ANSI 816.3-1977.
.3 Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings: to ANS1B16.5-1981.
.4 Steel butt-welding fittings: to ANSI B16.9a-1981.
.5 Unions, malleable iron: to ANSI 816.3- 1977.
.2 Fittings for roll grooved piping: malleable iron to ASTM A47-77 ductile iron to ASTM
A536-80.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
1 - GENERAL
1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
.2 Indicate on manufacturers catalogue literature: strainers and pump valving and

accessories.
.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in

Section 15010.
2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR SEPARATORS
.1 Furnish and install as shown on the drawings an air separator with tangential inlet
nozzles. The air separator shall be designed and constructed in accordance with
Section VIII, Div 1 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
.2 The unit shall be fitted with an NPT vent connection for connection to a compression
tank or an air vent. An additional NPT tapping shall be provided on the bottom of the
air separator to facilitate blow-down.
.3 The air separator shall be equipped with a system strainer with a free area of not less
than four (4) times the cross sectional area of the connecting piping. The strainer
should be able to be removed for routine cleaning.
.4 Models up to 3" (75 mm) diam. are to be equipped with stainless steel strainers. Larger
Models are to be equipped with carbon steel strainers
.5 Models up to 3" (75 mm) diam. shall be supplied with a cast iron body and NPT system
connections, while larger models shall be supplied with a cast iron body and ANSI
flanges. 8 to 24 models are to be supplied with a fabricated steel body and carbon
steel ANSI flanges.
.6 Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong model Vortex VAS.
2.2 STRAINERS
.1 Basket or Y Type. Tee type is acceptable for water service.
.2 Screens: Bronze, monel metal or 18 8 stainless steel, free area not less than 2 1/2
times pipe area, with perforations as follows: 1.1 mm (0.045 inch) diameter perforations.
.3 100 mm (4 inches) and larger: 3.2 mm (0.125 inch) diameter perforations.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
2.3 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PROVISIONS
.1 Pete's Plug: 6 mm (1/4 inch) MPT by 75 mm (3 inches) long, brass body and cap, with
retained safety cap, nordel self closing valve cores, permanently installed in piping
where shown, or in lieu of pressure gage test connections shown on the drawings.
.2 Provide one each of the following test items to the Owner:
.1 6 mm (1/4 inch) FPT by 3 mm (1/8 inch) diameter stainless steel pressure gage
adapter probe for extra long test plug. PETE'S 500 XL is an example.
.2 90 mm (3 1/2 inch) diameter, one percent accuracy, compound gage, , 100 kPa
(30 inches) Hg to 700 kPa (100 psig) range.
.3 0 - 104 degrees C (220 degrees F) pocket thermometer one half degree accuracy,
25 mm (one inch) dial, 125 mm (5 inch) long stainless steel stem, plastic case.
3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
.1 Install according to piping layout. Pipe drains and blow off connections to nearest
drain.
.2 Maintain proper clearance around equipment to permit performance of service

maintenance. Check final location with Consultant if different from that indicated prior
to installation.
.3 Refer to manufacturer's installation drawings.
.4 Check that all openings for appurtenances and equipment operating weight conform
to shop drawings.
3.2 STRAINERS
.1 Install in horizontal or down flow lines.
.2 Ensure clearance for removal of basket.
.3 Install ahead of each pump, at each automatic control valve and as indicated.
.4 In cooling tower water systems an in-line strainer shall be installed in addition to the
suction diffuser.
3.3 AIR SEPARATORS
.1 Install where indicated and to manufacturers instructions.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT HVAC PUMPS
1 General
1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
.2 Submit shop drawings of pump curves for review.
.3 Indicate piping, valves and fittings shipped loose by packaged equipment supplier,
showing their final location in field assembly.

Section 15010.
2 Products
2.1 VERTICAL IN-LINE SPLIT-COUPLED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
.1 Furnish and install, as indicated on the plans and specifications, in-line split couple
vertical centrifugal pumps. Capacity and power supply: as indicated on the equipment
schedule.
.2 Pump Casing - Cast Iron with 125 psig ANSI/PN16 flanges for working pressure below
175 psig (12 bar) at 150/F (65/C) and Ductile Iron with 250 psig ANSI/PN25 flanges for
working pressures to 375 psig (25 bar) at 150/F (65/C). Suction and discharge
connections shall be flanged and the same size and shall be drilled and tapped for seal
flush and gauge connections.
.3 Impeller - Bronze, fully enclosed type. Dynamically balanced. Two-plane balancing is

required where installed impeller diameter is less than 6 times the impeller width.
.4 Shaft - Provide Stainless Steel pump shaft.
.5 Coupling - Rigid spacer type of high tensile aluminum alloy. Coupling to be designed
to be easily removed on site to reveal a space between the pump and motor shafts
sufficient to remove all mechanical seal components for servicing and to be replaced
without disturbing the pump or motor.
.6 Mechanical Seals - Shall be Stainless Steel multi-spring outside balanced type with
Viton secondary seal, carbon rotating face and silicon carbide stationary seat. Provide
316 stainless steel gland plate. Provide factory installed flush line with manual vent.
.7 All split coupled pumps shall be provided with a lower seal chamber throttle bushing to
ensure seals maintain positively cooling and lubrication.
.8 Seal flush line accessories, if required to improve seal chamber cleanliness: Supply in
the flush line to the mechanical seal a 50 micron cartridge filter and sight flow indicator,
to suit the working pressure encountered.
Project #2015-11
.9 Filters shall be changed, by the installing contractor, after system is flushed and on a
regular basis until turned over to the Board.
.10 Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong 4300 series, Taco, Bell & Gosset.
2.2 BASE-MOUNTED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
.1 Furnish and install, as indicated on the plans and specifications base mounted
centrifugal pumps.
.2 The pump shall be single, end suction type with radially split, top center-line discharge,
self-venting casing. The casing-to-cover gasket shall be confined on the atmospheric
side to prevent blow-out possibility.
.3 Pump construction shall be cast iron, bronze fitted and shall be fitted with a long-life,
product lubricated, drip-tight mechanical seal, with O-ring seat retainer, designed for the
specified maximum temperature and pressure.
.4 The shaft shall be fitted with a Stainless Steel shaft sleeve and be supported by two
heavy duty ball bearings. The design shall allow Back Pull Out servicing, enabling the
complete rotating assembly to be removed without disturbing the casing piping
connections.
.5 The pump shall be mounted on a rigid, single piece baseplate, with grouting hole, and
connected by flexible coupling, with guard, to a squirrel cage, induction type motor of
premium efficiency and suitable for across-the-line (wye-delta, part wind) starting.
.6 The housing shall be hydrostatically tested to 150% maximum working pressure. The
unit shall be suitable for the conditions shown on the pump schedule.
2.3 SUCTION GUIDES
.1 Furnish and install on the suction of each pump a suction guide, with outlet flow
stabilizing guide vanes, removable stainless steel strainer and fine mesh start-up
strainer.
.2 For 150 psig flanged pipe: Supply valve with Cast Iron body with 125 psig flanged ports.
.3 For 300 psig flanged pipe: Supply valves with Ductile Iron body and 250 psig flanged
ports.
.4 Insulation
.1 Each suction guide in the chilled water loop shall be furnished by the manufacturer
with a pre-formed removable PVC insulation jacket to meet ASTM D1784 Class
14253-C, MEA #7-87, ASTM-E-84 and ASTM136 with a flame spread rating of 25
or less and a smoke development rating of 50 or less. There will be provided
sufficient mineral fiberglass insulation to meet ASHRAE 90.1-1989 specifications
in operating conditions with maximum Fluid Design Operating Temperature Range
Project #2015-11
of 141/F-200/F (60/C-93/C) and Mean Rating Temperature of 125/F (52/C).
.5 Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong SG series, Taco, Bell & Gossett
2.4 TRIPLE DUTY VALVES
.1 The valve stem shall be stainless steel with flat surfaces provided for adjustment with
open-end wrench.
.2 Configuration: straight in-line.
.3 Flange adapters, where necessary, are to be PN16 or PN25 ductile iron flanges with
anti-rotation lugs and EPT gaskets.
.4 For Welded Flange Piping: For 10 bar flanges: Valve body shall be Cast Iron with PN16
flanged ports. For 20 bar flanges: Valve body shall be Ductile Iron with PN25 flanged
ports.
.5 The valve shall be selected and installed in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions and be suitable for the pressure and temperature specified.
.6 Insulation
.1 Each triple-duty valve in the chilled water loop shall be furnished by the
manufacturer with a pre-formed removable PVC insulation jacket to meet ASTM
D1784 Class 14253- C, MEA #7-87, ASTM-E-84 and ASTM136 with a flame spread
rating of 25 or less and a smoke development rating of 50 or less. There will be
provided sufficient mineral fiberglass insulation to meet ASHRAE 90.1-1989
specifications in operating conditions with maximum Fluid Design Operating
Temperature Range of 141/F-200/F (60/C-93/C) and Mean Rating Temperature of
125/F (52/C).
.7 Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong Flo-Trex series, Taco, Bell & Gossett.
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install each pump in accordance with the Instructions from Manufacturer.
.2 Install with bearing lubrication points accessible. Check rotation.
.3 Ensure that pump body does not support piping or equipment. Provide stanchions or
hangers for this purpose. Refer to drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions
for details.
.4 Provide vibration isolation between the pumps and pipes, and between the pumps and
the concrete curbs. Refer to section 15241.
.5 Insulate pump body and accessories; refer to section 15260.
Project #2015-11
.6 Pipe drain tapping from each pump to floor drain.
.7 Install volute venting pet cock in accessible location.
.8 Change cartridge filter on regular basis prior to, and at turn over to owner.
.9 Install a suction guide upstream of each pump. The mechanical contractor shall inspect
the strainer prior to activating the pump and, further, shall remove the fine mesh
start-up strainer after a short running period. (24 hours maximum). Space shall provided
for removal of the strainer and connection of a blow-down valve.
.10 Install a triple duty valve on the discharge of each pump.
.11 Contractor to provide and install one pressure gauge, piped to pump suction, pump
discharge and strainer inlet. Pressure gauge tappings with necessary isolating
valves to enable differential pressure reading across pump and strainer to be taken.
.12 Contractor shall cover motor during construction and have area clean of
construction debris before starting the motor.
.13 Contractor to follow the manufacturer's instructions for start-up and venting of
mechanical seal.
.14 If pump is used during temporary flushing of system, contractor shall be responsible
for changing mechanical seal or replacing motor bearings if so instructed by the
board representative.
.15 The pump manufacturer shall coordinate with the hydronic balancer to balance the
system to the required flows.
.16 Provide drip pan and piped to nearest drain for each pump. Drip pan shall be sized
to suit pump dimensions.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 This specification covers variable frequency drives (VFDs) designated on the drawing
schedules to be variable speed. All standard and optional features shall be included within
the VFD panel.
.2 The VFD shall be UL Type 1 or UL Type 12 as required on the schedule. The VFD shall
have been evaluated by UL and found acceptable for mounting in a plenum or other air
handling compartment. Manufacturer shall supply a copy of the UL plenum evaluation upon
request.
.3 The VFD shall be tested to UL 508C. The appropriate UL label shall be applied. When the
VFDs are to be located in Canada, C-UL certifications shall apply. VFD shall be
manufactured in ISO 9001, 2000 certified facilities.
.4 The VFD shall be CE marked and conform to the European Union ElectroMagnetic
Compatibility directive. The VFD shall be UL Clisted for a short circuit current rating of 100
kAIC and labeled with this rating.
.5 The VFD manufacturer shall supply the VFD and all necessary controls as herein specified.
The manufacturer shall have been engaged in the production of this type of equipment for
a minimum of twenty years.
.1 To ensure quality, the complete VFD shall be tested by the manufacturer. The VFD shall
drive a motor connected to a dynamometer at full load and speed and shall be cycled
during the automated test procedure.
.2 All optional features shall be functionally tested at the factory for proper operation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 This specification lists the minimum VFD performance requirements for this project.
.2 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010. Indicate the
following: dimensional drawings, connection drawings, power circuit diagrams, warranty
description, certification agency file numbers.
.3 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section
15010.
.1 ABB ACH series, Danfoss VLT series c/w electro-mechanical by-pass

2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 The VFD shall convert incoming fixed frequency three-phase AC power into an adjustable
frequency and voltage for controlling the speed of three-phase AC motors. The motor
current shall closely approximate a sine wave. Motor voltage shall be varied with frequency
to maintain desired motor magnetization current suitable for the driven load and to eliminate
the need for motor derating.
.2 When properly sized, the VFD shall allow the motor to produce full rated power at rated
motor voltage, current, and speed without using the motor's service factor. VFDs utilizing
sine weighted/coded modulation (with or without 3rd harmonic injection) must provide data
verifying that the motors will not draw more than full load current during full load and full
speed operation.
.3 The VFD shall include an input full-wave bridge rectifier and maintain a fundamental
(displacement) power factor near unity regardless of speed or load.
.4 The VFD shall have a dual 5% impedance DC link reactor on the positive and negative rails
of the DC bus to minimize power line harmonics and protect the VFD from power line
transients. The chokes shall be non-saturating. Swinging chokes that do not provide full
harmonic filtering throughout the entire load range are not acceptable.
.5 VFDs with saturating (non-linear) DC link reactors shall require an additional 3% AC line
reactor to provide acceptable harmonic performance at full load, where harmonic
performance is most critical.
.6 The VFDs full load output current rating shall meet or exceed NEC Table 430-150. The
VFD shall be able to provide full rated output current continuously, 110% of rated current
for 60 seconds and 135% of rated torque for up to 0.5 second while starting.
.7 The VFD shall provide full motor torque at any selected frequency from 20 Hz to base
speed while providing a variable torque V/Hz output at reduced speed. This is to allow
driving direct drive fans without high speed derating or low speed excessive magnetization,
as would occur if a constant torque V/Hz curve was used at reduced speeds.
.8 A programmable automatic energy optimization selection feature shall be provided standard

in the VFD. This feature shall automatically and continuously monitor the motors speed and
load to adjust the applied voltage to maximize energy savings.
.9 The VFD must be able to produce full torque at low speed to operate direct drive fans.
.10 The VFD must be capable of connection and disconnection to motor while the VFD is
under load. This switching shall be accomplished without interlocks or damage to the
VFD.
.11 An automatic motor adaptation algorithm shall measure motor stator resistance and
reactance to optimize performance and efficiency. It shall not be necessary to run the
motor or de-couple the motor from the load to perform the test.
.12 Galvanic isolation shall be provided between the VFDs power circuitry and control
circuitry to ensure operator safety and to protect connected electronic control equipment
from damage caused by voltage spikes, current surges, and ground loop currents.
VFDs not including either galvanic or optical isolation on both analog I/O and discrete
digital I/O shall include additional isolation modules.
.13 VFD shall minimize audible motor noise through the use of an adjustable carrier
frequency. The carrier frequency shall be automatically adjusted to optimize motor and
VFD operation while reducing motor noise. VFDs with fixed carrier frequency are not
acceptable.
.14 All VFDs shall contain integral EMI filters to attenuate radio frequency interference
conducted to the AC power line.
2.2 PROTECTIVE FEATURES
.1 A minimum of Class 20 I2t electronic motor overload protection for single motor
applications shall be provided. Overload protection shall automatically compensate for
changes in motor speed.
.2 Protection against input transients, loss of AC line or load phase, output short circuit, output
ground fault, over voltage, under voltage, VFD over temperature and motor over
temperature. The VFD shall display all faults in plain language. Codes are not acceptable.
.3 Protect VFD from input phase loss. The VFD should be able to protect itself from damage
and indicate the phase loss condition. During an input phase loss condition, the VFD shall
be able to be programmed to either trip off while displaying an alarm, issue a warning while
running at reduced output capacity, or issue a warning while running at full commanded
speed. This function is independent of which input power phase is lost.
.4 Protect from under voltage. The VFD shall provide full rated output with an input voltage as
low as 90% of the nominal. The VFD will continue to operate with reduced output, without
faulting, with an input voltage as low as 70% of the nominal voltage.
.5 Protect from over voltage. The VFD shall continue to operate without faulting with a
momentary input voltage as high as 130% of the nominal voltage.
.6 The VFD shall incorporate a programmable motor preheat feature to keep the motor warm
and prevent condensation build up in the motor when it is stopped in a damp environment
by providing the motor stator with a controlled level of current.
.7 VFD shall include a signal loss detection algorithm with adjustable time delay to sense the
loss of an analog input signal. It shall also include a programmable time delay to eliminate
nuisance signal loss indications. The functions after detection shall be programmable.
.8 VFD shall function normally when the keypad is removed while the VFD is running. No
warnings or alarms shall be issued as a result of removing the keypad.
.9 VFD shall catch a rotating motor operating forward or reverse up to full speed without VFD
fault or component damage.
.10 Selectable over-voltage control shall be provided to protect the drive from power
regenerated by the motor while maintaining control of the driven load.
.11 VFD shall include current sensors on all three output phases to accurately measure
motor current, protect the VFD from output short circuits, output ground faults, and act
as a motor overload. If an output phase loss is detected, the VFD will trip off and
identify which of the output phases is low or lost.
.12 If the temperature of the VFDs heat sink rises to a critical level, the VFD shall
automatically reduce its carrier frequency to reduce the heat sink temperature. It shall
also be possible to program the VFD so that it reduces its output current limit value if
the VFDs temperature becomes too high.
.13 In order to ensure operation during periods of overload, it must be possible to program
the VFD to automatically reduce its output current to a programmed value during
periods of excessive load. This allows the VFD to continue to run the load without
tripping.
.14 The VFD shall have temperature controlled cooling fan(s) for quiet operation, minimized
losses, and increased fan life. The drive fan speed can be preprogrammed at preset
speeds or run in Auto mode. At low loads or low ambient temperatures, the VFD may
even turn the fan(s) off even when the VFD is running.
.15 The VFD shall store in memory the last 10 alarms. A description of the alarm, and the
date and time of the alarm shall be recorded. The VFD shall include graphing capability
for the last 2 alarms to provide additional diagnostic analysis.
.16 When used with a pumping system, the VFD shall be able to detect no-flow situations,
dry pump conditions, and operation off the end of the pump curve. It shall be
programmable to take appropriate protective action when one of the above situations
is detected.
2.3 INTERFACE FEATURES
.1 Hand, Off and Auto keys shall be provided to start and stop the VFD and determine the
source of the speed reference. It shall be possible to either disable these keys or password
protect them from undesired operation.
.2 There shall be an Info key on the keypad. The Info key shall include on-line context
sensitive assistance for programming and troubleshooting.
.3 The VFD shall be programmable to provide a digital output signal to indicate whether the
VFD is in Hand or Auto mode. This is to alert the Building Automation System whether the
VFD is being controlled locally or by the Building Automation System.
.4 Password protected keypad with alphanumeric, graphical, backlit display can be remotely
mounted. Two levels of password protection shall be provided to guard against
unauthorized parameter changes.
.5 All VFDs shall have the same customer interface. The keypad and display shall be identical
and interchangeable for all sizes of VFDs.
.6 To set up multiple VFDs, it shall be possible to upload all setup parameters to the VFDs
keypad, place that keypad on all other VFDs in turn and download the setup parameters
to each VFD. To facilitate setting up VFDs of various sizes, it shall be possible to download
from the keypad only size independent parameters. Keypad shall provide visual indication
of copy status.
.7 Display shall be programmable to communicate in multiple languages including English,

Spanish, German, French, Chinese, Portuguese, and Danish.
.8 A red FAULT light, a yellow WARNING light and a green POWER-ON light shall be
provided. These indications shall be visible both on the keypad and on the VFD when the
keypad is removed.
.9 A quick setup menu with factory preset typical HVAC parameters shall be provided on the
VFD. The VFD shall also have individual Fan, Pump, and Compressor menus specifically
designed to facilitate start-up of these applications.
.10 A three-feedback PID controller to control the speed of the VFD shall be standard.
.11 This controller shall accept up to three feedback signals. It shall be programmable to
compare the feedback signals to a common setpoint or to individual setpoints and to
automatically select either the maximum or the feedback signal as the controlling signal.
It shall also be possible to calculate the controlling feedback signal as the average of
all feedback signals or the difference between a pair of feedback signals.
.12 The VFD shall be able to apply individual scaling to each feedback signal.
.13 For fan flow tracking applications, the VFD shall be able to calculate the square root of
any or all individual feedback signals so that a pressure sensor can be used to measure
air flow.
.14 The VFDs PID controller shall be able to actively adjust its setpoint based on flow. This
allows the VFD to compensate for a pressure feedback sensor which is located near
the output of the pump rather than out in the controlled system.
.15 The VFD shall have three additional PID controllers which can be used to control
damper and valve positioners in the system and to provide setpoint reset.
.16 Floating point control interface shall be provided to increase/decrease speed in

response to contact closures.
.17 Five simultaneous meter displays shall be available. They shall include at a minimum,
frequency, motor current, motor voltage, VFD output power, VFD output energy, VFD
temperature in degrees, among others.
.18 Programmable Sleep Mode shall be able to stop the VFD. When its output frequency
drops below set sleep level for a specified time, when an external contact commands
that the VFD go into Sleep Mode, or when the VFD detects a no-flow situation, the VFD
may be programmed to stop. When the VFDs speed is being controlled by its PID
controller, it shall be possible to program a wake-up feedback value that will cause the
VFD to start. To avoid excessive starting and stopping of the driven equipment, it shall
be possible to program a minimum run time before sleep mode can be initiated and a
minimum sleep time for the VFD.
.19 A run permissive circuit shall be provided to accept a system ready signal to ensure
that the VFD does not start until dampers or other auxiliary equipment are in the proper
state for VFD operation. The run permissive circuit shall also be capable of initiating an
output run request signal to indicate to the external equipment that the VFD has
received a request to run.
.20 VFD shall be programmable to display feedback signals in appropriate units, such as
inches of water column (in-wg), pressure per square inch (psi) or temperature (/F).
.21 VFD shall be programmable to sense the loss of load. The VFD shall be programmable
to signal this condition via a keypad warning, relay output and/or over the serial
communications bus. To ensure against nuisance indications, this feature must be
based on motor torque, not current, and must include a proof timer to keep brief periods
of no load from falsely triggering this indication.
2.4 STANDARD CONTROL AND MONITORING INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
.1 Four dedicated, programmable digital inputs shall be provided for interfacing with the
systems control and safety interlock circuitry.
.2 Two terminals shall be programmable to act as either as digital outputs or additional digital
inputs.
.3 Two programmable relay outputs, Form C 240 V AC, 2 A, shall be provided for remote
indication of VFD status. Each relay shall have an adjustable on delay / off delay time.
.4 Two programmable analog inputs shall be provided that can be either direct-or-reverse
acting. Each shall be independently selectable to be used with either an analog voltage or
current signal. The maximum and minimum range of each shall be able to be independently
scalable from 0 to 10 V dc and 0 to 20 Ma.
.5 A programmable low-pass filter for either or both of the analog inputs must be included to
compensate for noise.
.6 The VFD shall provide front panel meter displays programmable to show the value of each
analog input signal for system set-up and troubleshooting,
.7 one programmable analog current output (0/4 to 20 mA) shall be provided for indication of
VFD status. This output shall be programmable to show the reference or feedback signal
supplied to the VFD and for VFD output frequency, current and power. It shall be possible
to scale the minimum and maximum values of this output.
.8 It shall be possible through serial bus communications to read the status of all analog and
digital inputs of the VFD.
.9 It shall be possible to command all digital and analog output through the serial
communication bus.
2.5 ADDITIONAL CONTROL AND MONITORING INPUTS AND OUTPUTS TO BE

PROVIDED
.1 It shall be possible to add optional modules to the VFD in the field to expand its analog and
digital inputs and outputs. These modules shall use rigid connectors to plug into the VFDs
control card.
.2 The VFD shall automatically recognize the option module after it is powered up. There shall
be no need to manually configure the module.
.3 Modules may include such items as:
.1 Additional digital outputs, including relay outputs

.2 Additional digital inputs
.3 Additional analog outputs
.4 Additional analog inputs, including Ni or Pt temperature sensor inputs
.4 It shall be possible through serial bus communications to control the status of all analog and
digital outputs of the VFD.
.5 A real-time clock shall be an integral part of the VFD. It shall be possible to use this to
display the current date and time on the VFDs display.
.6 Ten programmable time periods, with individually selectable ON and OFF functions shall
be available. The clock shall also be programmable to control start/stop functions, constant
speeds, PID parameter setpoints and output relays. Is shall be possible to program unique
events that occur only during normal work days, others that occur only on non-work days,
and others that occur on specific days or dates. The manufacturer shall provide free
PC-based software to set up the calendar for this schedule.
.7 All VFD faults shall be time stamped to aid troubleshooting.
.8 It shall be possible to program maintenance reminders based on date and time, VFD
running hours, or VFD operating hours.
.9 The real-time clock shall be able to time and date stamp all faults recorded in the VFD fault
log.
.10 The VFD shall be able to store load profile data to assist in analyzing the system
demand and energy consumption over time.
.11 The VFD shall include a sequential logic controller to provide advanced control interface
capabilities. This shall include:
.1 Comparators for comparing VFD analog values to programmed trigger values

.2 Logic operators to combine up to three logic expressions using Boolean algebra
.3 Delay timers
.4 A 20-step programmable structure
.5 The VFD shall include a Cascade Controller which allows the VFD to operate in closed
loop set point (PID) control mode one motor at a controlled speed and control the
operation of additional constant speed motor starters.
2.6 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
.1 The VFD shall include a standard EIA-485 communications port and capabilities to be
connected to the following serial communication protocols at no additional cost and without
a need to install any additional hardware or software in the VFD:
.1 Johnson Controls Metasys N2

.2 Modbus RTU
.3 Siemens FLN
.4 BACnet MS/TP
.2 Additional boards for the following protocols shall be provided if necessary:
.1 BACnet
.2 Ethernet
.3 DeviceNet
.4 Profibus DP V1
.5 Profinet SRT
.6 Modbus TCP
.7 LonWorks Free Topology (FTP) certified to LonMark standard 3.3
.3 VFD shall have standard USB port for direct connection of Personal Computer (PC) to the
VFD. The manufacturer shall provide no-charge PC software to allow complete setup and
access of the VFD and logs of VFD operation through the USB port. It shall be possible to
communicate to the VFD through this USB port without interrupting VFD communications
to the building management system.
.4 The VFD shall have provisions for an optional 24 V DC back-up power interface to power
the VFDs control card. This is to allow the VFD to continue to communicate to the building
automation system even if power to the VFD is lost.
2.7 ADJUSTMENTS
.1 The VFD shall have a manually adjustable carrier frequency to allow the user to select the
desired operating characteristics. The VFD shall also be programmable to automatically
reduce its carrier frequency to avoid tripping due to thermal loading.
.2 Four independent setups shall be provided. Four preset speeds per setup shall be provided
for a total of 16. Each setup shall have two programmable ramp up and ramp down times.
Acceleration and deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable over the range from 1 to
3,600 seconds.
.3 Each setup shall be programmable for a unique current limit value. If the output current
from the VFD reaches this value, any further attempt to increase the current produced by
the VFD will cause the VFD to reduce its output frequency to reduce the load on the VFD.
If desired, it shall be possible to program a timer which will cause the VFD to trip off after
a programmed time period.
.4 If the VFD trips on one of the following conditions, the VFD shall be programmable for
automatic or manual reset: external interlock, under-voltage, over-voltage, current limit,
over temperature, and VFD overload.
.5 The number of restart attempts shall be selectable from 0 through 20 or infinitely and the
time between attempts shall be adjustable from 0 through 600 seconds.
.6 An automatic start delay may be selected from 0 to 120 seconds. During this delay time,
the VFD shall be programmable to either apply no voltage to the motor or apply a DC
braking current if desired.
.7 Four programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from operating the
load at a speed that causes vibration in the driven equipment shall be provided.
Semi-automatic setting of lockout ranges shall simplify the set-up.
2.8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES TO BE PROVIDED
.1 All optional features shall be built, mounted and tested by the VFD manufacturer. The VFD
manufactures warranty shall apply to the entire assembly as shipped. Packages built by
third parties and do not carry the VFD manufactures warranty shall not be allowed. All
options shall carry a UL / C-UL Enclosed Industrial Control Panel label.
.2 All panels shall be marked for 100,000 amp short circuit current rating.
.3 The enclosure rating of the VFD w/ options shall be consistent with the VFD rating of either
NEMA/UL type 1 or NEMA/UL type 12, as required for the installation location and/or as
called for on the schedule. The package shall include ALL optional devices and shipped
as a complete factory tested assembly.
.4 Three-Contactor bypass shall be provided that allows operation of the motor via line power
in the event of a failure of the VFD. Motor control selection shall be though either a VFD
output contactor or a bypass contactor that are electrically interlocked to ensure that both
contactors are not energized simultaneously. A third contactor, the drive input contactor,
shall be supplied as standard. This allows the powering of the VFD with the motor off or
operating in bypass mode for testing, programming and troubleshooting purposes.
.5 The Three-Contactor bypass shall include the following interface and control features:
.1 Mode selection via a four position DRIVE/OFF/BYPASS/TEST switch.

.2 DRIVE Mode: Both the drive input and output contactors are closed and the motor is
operated via VFD power
.3 OFF mode: DRIVE input, drive output and bypass contactors are all open.
.4 Bypass mode: Bypass contactor is closed and motor is operating from line power.
Both the drive input and drive output contactors are open for servicing of the VFD
without power.
.5 Test mode: Bypass contactor is closed and the motor is operated from line power. The
drive input contactor is closed but the drive output contactor is open. This allows for the
testing and programming of the VFD while the motor is operated via line power.
.6 Contactors shall operate from a 24vdc power supply that shall function off of any two
legs of the AC line and shall maintain power on the loss of any one of the AC lines.
.6 A Bypass pilot light is supplied to indicate that the motor is operating from line power.
.7 Common start/stop command when operating in either Bypass or VFD mode.

.8 Selectable Run Permissive logic shall operate in either VFD or bypass operation. When
activated, any command to start the motor, in either Hand Bypass, Remote Bypass, Hand
VFD or Remote VFD shall not start the motor, but instead close a relay contact that is used
to initiate operation of another device, such as an outside air damper. A contact closure
from this device shall confirm that it is appropriately actuated and the motor shall then start.
.9 Bypass package shall include an External Safety interlock that will disable motor operation
in either bypass or VFD when open.
.10 Fire-mode bypass operation shall be standard. When activated via a contact closure,
the motor shall transfer to bypass (line power) regardless of the mode selected. All
calls to stop the motor shall be ignored. These include the opening of the start
command, an external safety trip or the tripping of the motor overload. Fire-mode
operation will take precedence over all other commands.
.11 The bypass must include a selectable time delay of 0 to 60 seconds before the initiation
of bypass operation. When transferring from VFD to bypass modes, the time delay
starts after the motor has decelerated to zero speed. This delay allows the BAS to
prepare for bypass operation. Bypass packages that do not include a time delay, or do
not include a selectable delay period, will not be acceptable.
.12 Automatic bypass shall be selectable. When active, the motor shall be transferred to
line power on a VFD fault condition. The bypass time delay shall be activate prior to
this transfer to line power to allow the VFD time to attempt to recover from the fault
condition prior to running in bypass.
.1 Main input disconnect shall be provided that removes power from both the bypass and VFD.
Main input motor rated fuses that protect the entire package.
.2 VFD only fast acting input fuses shall be provided. Packages that include only main input
motor rated fusing or circuit breaker are not acceptable.
.3 Overload protection shall be supplied in bypass mode.
.1 This overload shall supply minimum class 20 protection as well as wide adjustable
current setting for complete motor protection when operating on line power. Those
overloads that are not class 20 or current selectable will not be acceptable.
.2 Overload protection shall include phase loss and phase imbalance protection.
.3 For 460V/600V units 75 Hp and below and 208V/230V units 40 Hp and below, low
voltage contactor operation shall be maintained down to 70% of the units nominally
rated voltage, to ensure VFD operation.
.4 For 460V/600V units 75 Hp and below and 208V/230V units 40 Hp and below, the VFD
shall be able to operate the motor at a reduced load with the loss of any one of the
three phases of power. Contactors shall remain closed regardless of which phase is
lost to ensure VFD operation.
.4 Line/load conditioners
.1 VFDs that do not include 5% DC link impedance shall include 5% AC line reactors in
the options enclosure. Lower levels of impedance will not be acceptable.
2.10 SERVICE CONDITIONS
.1 Ambient temperature, continuous, full speed, full load operation:
.1 0 to 40/C (14 to 104/F) on Bypass units

.2 5 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing.
.3 Elevation to 3,300 feet without derating.
.2 AC line voltage variation, -10 to +10% of nominal with full output.
.3 All power and control wiring shall be from the bottom.
.4 All VFDs shall be plenum rated.
3 PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1 The manufacturer shall provide start-up commissioning of the VFD and its optional circuits
by a factory certified service technician who is experienced in start-up and repair services.
Sales personnel and other agents who are not factory certified shall not be acceptable as
commissioning agents. Start-up services shall include checking for verification of proper
operation and installation for the VFD, its options and its interface wiring to the building
automation system.
.2 Harmonic filtering. The VFD supplier shall, with the aid of the buyers detailed electrical
power single line diagram showing all impedances in the power path to the VFDs, perform
an analysis to initially demonstrate the supplied equipment will met the IEEE
recommendations after installation. If, as a result of the analysis, it is determined that
additional filter equipment is required to meet the IEEE recommendations, then the cost of
such equipment shall be included in the drive supplier quotation.
.3 Program the VFD to operate in a manner compatible with the sequence of operation
indicated on the drawings; coordinate the VFD programming with the pump manufacturer
to ensure that the operation of the pumps maintains the flow in the heating loops running
at optimal performance.
.4 At 100% RPM, the pumps shall operate at rated hot water flow. Drives shall be set to
prevent the minimum RPM to drop below 30% of the nominal rating.
.5 Disconnect switches wired between the VFD and the motor shall be provide with auxiliary
contacts which shall be wired into the VFDs safety trip circuitry such that the VFD shall de-
energize when the switch is opened. When the switch is closed the VFD shall energize and
go through normal start-up routines.
3.2 WARRANTY
.1 The complete VFD shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of 36 months from
date of shipment. The warranty shall include parts, labor, travel costs and living expenses
incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory authorized on-site service. The warranty
shall be provided by the VFD manufacturer and not a third party. A written warranty
statement shall be provided with the submittals.
.2 The manufacturer shall offer an extended warranty allowing the VFD warranty to be
extended to up to 6 years.
.3 The manufacturer shall maintain a fully stocked depot within 100 km of the site.
.4 The motors which are connected to the VFD shall be warranted by the VFD manufacturer
against insulation breakdown which is directly attributed to the VFD for a period of 36
months from the date of substantial completion.
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT REFRIGERANT MONITORING SYSTEM
1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification is applicable only for reference purposes associated
with the separate price as identified in section 15010. Its requirements will become
applicable only if the current refrigerant monitoring system is not compatible with R-
134a and can not accurately detect its presence.
.2 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed
by the requirements of Section 15010.
.3 Coordinate the installation of the refrigeration monitoring system with the current school
BAS.
.4 The operation of the refrigerant monitoring equipment to be interlocked with the

emergency purge fan. Also refer to section 15900.
.1 CSA B52-M1992.
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
.2 Indicate:
.1 Equipment including sensors and controllers

.3 Dimensions, construction details, recommended installation and support
.5 Performance and accuracy.
.1 Data to include:
.1 Description of equipment giving manufacturers name, type and model year.

.1 MSA Chillguard L series, Vulcain.
Project #2015-11
2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 The gas monitoring system shall continuously measure and display the specified gas
concentration. The system shall provide visual indicators when preset limits are
exceeded. Relay output for alarms and control shall be provided.
.2 The system shall include all the required components to make a complete installation
in accordance with the CSA-B52 code, including sensors, visual and audible alarms,
interlocks and wiring.
.3 Number and Types of Monitoring Points
.1 The number and type of monitors shall be as follows:
! R-134a (DuPont SUVA) 0-1000 ppm: 1 (one) monitoring point
2.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.1 Stand-alone type with integrated control and sensing modules in a single enclosure.
.2 The unit shall be wall mount type. It shall conform to the following:
.1 Photoacoustic IR sensor
.2 Diffusion operation or pumped with up to 4 sampling points.
.3 20 PPM detection limit
.4 Digital signal processing
.5 Digital display with optional remote display
.6 4-20 mA, 0-10VDC and RS-232 Outputs standard.
.7 Three levels of Alarm and Fault status indicators.
.8 System configured via the front panel keypad.
.9 Enclosure Type - The enclosure shall be a NEMA 4X version.
2.3 OPERATING PRINCIPLE
.1 The principle of operation shall be of the infrared photoacoustic absorption type.
.2 Analyzer Sample
.1 Any version of the analyzer may be configured as a diffusion type monitor or be

equipped with an internal pump and filter that can draw a sample from a distance
of 300 feet. All sample connections shall be on the bottom of the enclosure.
.3 Analyzer Sensitivity
.1 The analyzer limit of detection for all refrigerants shall be 20 PPM.
Project #2015-11
.4 Analyzer Linearity
.1 The analyzer shall be within +/-5 PPM of a linear response in the range of 0-100
ppm and + 5% of full scale in the range of 100-1000 ppm.
.5 Temperature
.1 The system shall operate over the range of 0OC to 45OC.
.6 Stability
.1 The 24 hour zero or span drift must be less than 5 PPM. The long term (1year) zero
drift shall be less than 5 PPM. The long term span drift shall be less 10 PPM.
.7 Calibration of all versions shall be performed using standard RP cylinders and existing
calibration equipment.
2.4 MONITOR UNIT REQUIREMENTS
.1 Readout Displays
.1 A 2 line x 20 character alpha numeric display shall be provided for the purpose of
displaying the gas concentration, diagnostics, set-up and calibration menu.
.2 Visual Alarm Indicators
.1 All alarm indications shall be displayed on the front panel display.
.2 Three separate alarm set point levels shall be provided. The set points shall be
independently adjustable for any value for a given range. The set points shall
provide drive signals to user interface relays. The alarm set points shall have the
capability of providing the user a selection of latching or nonlatching.
.3 Audible Alarm
.1 An audible buzzer is included, it sounds when one of the three preselected alarm
conditions or a trouble condition occurs.
2.5 RELAY OUTPUTS
.1 The alarm set point drive signals shall activate user relays as specified below:
.1 Number of Relays: As a minimum, one relay for each alarm set point level shall be
provided on the control unit.
.2 Contact Rating: All relays shall be Form C, single pole, double throw. Dry contacts
shall be rated for 5 amps resistive at 240 VAC.
.3 Contact Selection: The contacts shall be capable of being selected normally

energized or non-energized, latching or non-latching.
Project #2015-11
.4 The Trouble (Fault) relay is normally energized and closed for normal conditions.
If a system fault is detected the Trouble relay will de-energize.
.5 Malfunction Indication: The readout display described above shall display full
diagnostics when a fault exists without the use of codes.
2.6 FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
.1 The function listed in this paragraph shall be accomplished using a keypad readily
accessible on the front panel. No tool or special adapters shall be used for:
.1 Display of alarm set point level on the readout display

.2 Resetting any alarm set point
.3 Zero and Span calibration adjustments.
.2 System must be capable of allowing the user, through the front panel keypad, to
determine which of the four (4) points are to be active in the sequencer.
.3 A method of detecting a flow blockage shall be provided.
2.7 SAMPLE GAS FILTER
.1 There shall be an internal sample gas filter on pumped units. This filter shall be easily
serviced or replaced.
2.8 OUTPUT SIGNALS
.1 The output signal shall be compatible with the existing building BAS.
.2 The output signal shall have the following features:
.1 Scalable to 1-10% of the full scale. The default shall be 100% full scale.
.2 The output shall be sourcing current to module ground.
.3 For refrigerants, software will have a dead-banding feature not allowing a value less
than 10 PPM to be displayed on the front panel.
.4 RS-485 using ModBus communication protocol will be included in all sensor
modules.
.5 The control modules will have an ATO output option of RS-232, 4-20mA, or 0-
10VDC.
2.9 SYSTEM POWER REQUIREMENTS:
.1 Standard at 24 VDC or VAC.
2.10 SEQUENCER PROGRAMMING LIMITS
.1 The sequencer system parameters shall be within the following limits.
.1 Sample Tubing Connection - Fittings suitable for the connection of 1/4" O.D. tubing
Project #2015-11
shall be provided on the bottom of the enclosure for the purposes of connection,
sample lines, calibration gases and exhaust.
.2 Alarm - Three alarm set point levels shall be provided for each sample location. Any
alarm set point shall be capable of activating one relay (SPDT, 8 amp at120 VAC,
resistive).
.3 Indicating Lights - All indications related to the Multi Point Sequencer shall appear
on the front panel display.
.4 Software shall be installed in the pumped versions to allow the user to enter the
station dwell time to allow for the line length and sample transport time for each
sensor.
2.11 SAMPLE HANDLING
.1 The sample handling system shall conform to the paragraphs below:
.1 Sample Line Compatibility - The system shall be capable of drawing a sample

through 1/8" I.D. tubing for a distance of 300 feet.
.2 Sequencer Operation - A sample shall be drawn from the next line in sequence
regardless of which location is being analyzed.
.3 Sample Conditioning - The system shall provide adequate filtration of the sample
suitable to protect the analyzer.
.4 Exhaust - Exhaust fitting shall be provided on the bottom of the enclosure for the
purpose of attaching lines to the exhaust and bypass flows.
2.12 MAXIMUM SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1 The system shall require no periodic maintenance other than periodic checking.
Periodic checking or adjustments of the unit shall be capable of being accomplished by
one person at the unit location.
2.13 MANUFACTURER CAPABILITY REQUIREMENTS
.1 As a minimum, the Gas Monitoring Equipment manufacturer must meet the following
requirements:
.1 Be capable of supplying all equipment used to check or calibrate the unit
.2 Be capable of providing on site service with factory trained personnel
.3 Be capable of providing start-up assistance and training for the owner / operator
.4 The Gas Monitoring System shall be tested, approved, and certified for electrical
safety.
Project #2015-11
.1 Provide a factory-trained service technician without additional charge to set up, adjust
and certify the monitoring system.
.2 The manufacturer shall provide instruction to the owner's personnel on the operation
startup and shall continue for a period of one year. Manufacturers warranty shall include
all parts and labour to install parts.
3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL


.3 Connect the refrigerant monitoring system unit to the existing power source and ensure
that it is interlocked with the purge exhaust fan and motorized dampers and boilers
burners.
.4 Connect the system to the audio-visual alarms located outside of all entrances to the
chiller room and inside the chiller room.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT DIGITAL CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed
by the requirements outlined in Section 15010 of the specification.
.1 JBS
1.3 GENERAL INTENT
.1 The general outline of the scope of work includes but is not limited to the following:
.1 Remove all pneumatic (where applicable) and redundant electric control devices,
sensors, operators and controllers serving the existing cooling plant. Work includes
removal of all redundant pneumatic tubing and wiring.
.2 Remove all existing obsolete controllers and wiring.
.3 Expand the existing BAS system and supply new as required to cover the operation
of the new cooling plant, in accordance with the sequences of operation indicated
on the drawings and the materials specified herein.
.4 The work shall include all new sensors, operators, controllers and other devices, all
hardware and software required to make a complete operational system connected
to the Board main server, including upgrade of the graphical display to include:
! the operation of the new chiller and its VFD

! The operation of the new cooling tower and its VFD
! The operation of the chilled water and condenser water pumps.
! The status of the refrigerant monitoring equipment.
.5 Provide all necessary power wiring and hardware to complete the entire project,
including but not limited to, wiring, fittings, connectors, conduits, hangers/supports,
box covers and all other accessories required to ensure complete, safe and fully
operational systems. This shall include the power wiring for all the equipment.
.6 Make good all surfaces affected by the work.
.2 Arrange for Electrical Authority inspection of all electrical work. Submit the Certificate
of Inspection and Product Approval Certificate with the as-built documentation.
.1 Installer and Manufacturer Qualifications
.1 Installer shall have an established working relationship with Control System

Manufacturer.
Project #2015-11
.2 Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer's control

system training. Upon request, Installer shall present record of completed training
including course outlines.
.3 The Building Automation System supplier shall be a subcontractor to General

Contractor who shall be responsible for the complete installation of the controls
devices and wiring and guarantee its proper function.
.4 The new controls sensors and devices shall be supplied and installed by one of the
two suppliers listed in these specifications. No other suppliers are acceptable,
General Contractors shall name the Control supplier at the time of tender.
1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS
.1 Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the most restrictive of local,
provincial, and federal authorities' codes and ordinances or these plans and
specifications. As a minimum, the installation shall comply with current editions in effect
30 days prior to receipt of bids of the following codes:
.1 National Electric Code (NEC)

.2 ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004: Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation
and Control Systems (BACNET)
1.6 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.1 Performance Standards. System shall conform to the following minimum standards over
network connections. Systems shall be tested using manufacturer's recommended
hardware and software for operator workstation (server and browser for web-based
systems).
.2 Graphic Display. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall display with current data within
10 sec.
.3 Graphic Refresh. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall update with current data within
8 sec. and shall automatically refresh every 15 sec.
.4 Configuration and Tuning Screens. Screens used for configuring, calibrating, or tuning
points, PID loops, and similar control logic shall automatically refresh within 6 sec.
.5 Object Command. Devices shall react to command of a Digital object within 2 sec.
Devices shall begin reacting to command of an analog object within 2 sec.
.6 Alarm Response Time. An object that goes into alarm shall be annunciated at the
workstation within 15 sec.
.7 Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of

running as often as once every 5 sec. Select execution times consistent with the
mechanical process under control.
Project #2015-11
.8 Performance. Programmable controllers shall be able to completely execute DDC PID

control loops at a frequency adjustable down to once per sec. Select execution times
consistent with the mechanical process under control.
.9 Multiple Alarm Annunciation. Each workstation on the network shall receive alarms
within 5 sec of other workstations.
.10 Reporting Accuracy. System shall report values with minimum end-to-end accuracy
listed in Table 1.
.11 Control Stability and Accuracy. Control loops shall maintain measured variable at
setpoint within tolerances listed in Table 2.
Table 1 - Reporting Accuracy
Measured Variable Reported Accuracy

Water Temperature 0.5C (1F)
Delta-T 0.15C (0.25F)
Water Flow 2% of full scale
1.7 SUBMITTALS
.1 Provide three copies of shop drawings and other submittals on hardware, software, and
equipment to be installed or furnished. Begin no work until submittals have been
reviewed for conformity with design intent. Provide drawings as AutoCAD 2004 (or
newer) compatible files on magnetic or optical disk (file format: .DWG, .DXF, .VSD, or
comparable) and 3 prints of each drawing on 11" x 17" paper. When manufacturer's cut
sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, clearly indicate
applicable data by highlighting or by other means. Clearly reference covered
specification and drawing on each submittal. General catalogs shall not be accepted as
cut sheets to fulfill submittal requirements. Select and show submittal quantities
appropriate to scope of work.
.2 Submittal approval does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to supply sufficient

quantities to complete work. Provide submittals within 2 weeks of contract award on the
following:
.3 Direct Digital Control System Hardware - Distributed
.1 Complete bill of materials indicating quantity, manufacturer, model number, and

relevant technical data of equipment to be used.
.2 Manufacturer's description and technical data such as performance curves, product

specifications, and installation and maintenance instructions for items listed below
and for relevant items not listed below:
! Direct digital controllers (controller panels)

! Transducers and transmitters
Project #2015-11
! Sensors (include accuracy data)

! Actuators
! Valves
! Relays
! Electrical and electro-pneumatic switches
! Control panels
! Power supplies
! Batteries
! Operator interface equipment
! Wiring
! Wiring diagrams and layouts for each control panel. Show termination numbers.
! Riser diagrams showing control network layout, communication protocol, and
wire types.
.4 Central System Hardware and Software
.1 Web server, software, local workstation: existing to remain. Expand hardware and
modify software as required to accommodate the new sensors and controlled
devices.
.2 Controlled Systems

wire types.
! Schematic diagram of each controlled system. Label control points with point
names. Graphically show locations of control elements.
! Schematic wiring diagram of each controlled system. Label control elements
and terminals. Where a control element is also shown on control system
schematic, use the same name.
! Instrumentation list (Bill of Materials) for each controlled system. List each
control system element in a table. Show element name, type of device,
manufacturer, model number, and product data sheet number.
! Complete description of control system operation including sequences of
operation. Include and reference schematic diagram of controlled system. List
I/O points and software points specified. Indicate alarmed and trended points.
! Description of process, report formats, and checklists to be used in Control
System Demonstration and Acceptance.
! BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for each
submitted type of controller and operator interface.
.5 Schedules
.1 Schedule of work provided within one month of contract award, indicating:
! Intended sequence of work items

! Start date of each work item
! Duration of each work item
! Planned delivery dates for ordered material and equipment and expected lead
times
! Milestones indicating possible restraints on work by other trades or situations
! Monthly written status reports indicating work completed and revisions to
Project #2015-11
expected delivery dates. Include updated schedule of work.
1.8 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION
.1 Project Record Documents. Submit three copies of record (as-built) documents upon
completion of installation for approval prior to final completion. Submittal shall consist
of:
.1 Project Record Drawings. As-built versions of submittal shop drawings provided as

AutoCAD 2004 (or newer) compatible files on magnetic or optical disk (file format:
.DWG, .DXF, .VSD, or comparable) and 6 prints of each drawing on 11" x 17"
paper.
.2 Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. Completed versions of reports,

checklists, and trend logs used to meet requirements of Control System
Demonstration and Acceptance.
.3 Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. Printed, electronic, or online help

documentation of the following:
! As-built versions of submittal product data.

! Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of installing contractors and service
representatives for equipment and control systems.
! Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems: logging on
and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding
computer control, and changing setpoints and variables.
! Programming manual or set of manuals with description of programming
language and syntax, of statements for algorithms and calculations used, of
point database creation and modification, of program creation and modification,
and of editor use.
! Engineering installation, and maintenance manual or set of manuals that
explains how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; how
to perform preventive maintenance and calibration; how to debug hardware
problems; and how to repair or replace hardware.
! Documentation of programs created using custom programming language
including setpoints, tuning parameters, and object database. Electronic copies
of programs shall meet this requirement if control logic, setpoints, tuning
parameters, and objects can be viewed using furnished programming tools.
! Graphic files, programs, and database on magnetic or optical media.
! List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers.
! Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance
information for furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment
and sensors.
! Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating
systems, custom programming language, operator workstation or web server
software, and graphics software.
! Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents for equipment and systems.
! Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components,
including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time
between tasks; and task descriptions.
Project #2015-11
.4 Training Materials: Provide course outline and materials for each class at least two
weeks before first class. Training shall be furnished via instructor-led sessions,
computer-based training, or web-based training. Consultant will modify course
outlines and materials if necessary to meet Board's needs. Consultant will review
and approve course outlines and materials at least three weeks before first class.
1.9 WARRANTY
.1 Warrant work as follows:
.1 Warrant labor and materials for specified control system free from defects for a
period of 24 months after final acceptance. Control system failures during warranty
period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in
service to the Board. Respond during normal business hours within 24 hours of
Board's warranty service request.
.2 Work shall have a single warranty date, even if Board receives beneficial use due
to early system start-up. If specified work is split into multiple contracts or a
multi-phase contract, each contract or phase shall have a separate warranty start
date and period.
.3 If Consultant determines that equipment and systems operate satisfactorily at the

end of final start-up, testing, and commissioning phase, Consultant will certify in
writing that control system operation has been tested and accepted in accordance
with the terms of this specification. Date of acceptance shall begin warranty period.
.4 Provide updates to operator workstation or web server software, project-specific

software, graphic software, database software, and firmware that resolve
Contractor-identified software deficiencies at no charge during warranty period. If
available, The Board can purchase in-warranty service agreement to receive
upgrades for functional enhancements associated with above-mentioned items. Do
not install updates or upgrades without Board's written authorization.
1.10 PROPRIETARY OF MATERIAL
.1 Project-specific software and documentation shall become Board's property. This

includes, but is not limited to:
.1 Graphics
.2 Record drawings
.3 Database
.4 Application programming code
.5 Documentation
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Use new products the manufacturer is currently manufacturing and selling for use in
Project #2015-11
new installations. Do not use this installation as a product test site unless explicitly
approved in writing by the Board. Spare parts shall be available for at least five years
after completion of this contract.
2.2 COMMUNICATION
.1 Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers shall
comprise a BACnet internetwork. Controller and operator interface communication shall
conform to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004, BACnet.
.2 Install new wiring and network devices as required to provide a complete and workable
control network. Use existing Ethernet backbone for network segments marked
"existing" on project drawings.
.3 Each controller shall have a communication port for temporary connection to a laptop
computer or other operator interface. Connection shall support memory downloads and
other commissioning and troubleshooting operations.
.4 Internetwork operator interface and value passing shall be transparent to internetwork

architecture.
.5 An operator interface connected to a controller shall allow the operator to interface with
each internetwork controller as if directly connected. Controller information such as
data, status, and control algorithms shall be viewable and editable from each
internetwork controller.
.6 Inputs, outputs, and control variables used to integrate control strategies across multiple
controllers shall be readable by each controller on the internetwork. Program and test
all cross-controller links required to execute control strategies specified herein and
shown on the drawings. An authorized operator shall be able to edit cross-controller
links by typing a standard object address or by using a point-and-click interface.
.7 Controllers with real-time clocks shall use the BACnet Time Synchronization service.
System shall automatically synchronize system clocks daily from an
operator-designated controller via the internetwork. If applicable, system shall
automatically adjust for daylight saving and standard time.
.8 System shall be expandable to at least twice the required input and output objects with
additional controllers, associated devices, and wiring.
2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE
.1 PDSB Central Server
.1 New site databases and graphics files shall be installed on the designated central
PDSB central server located in Mississauga, Ontario.
.2 Provide written notification to the PDSB representative prior to installing new site
databases to the PDSB server. Do not install software or make any changes to the
server without the written consent of the PDSB representative.
Project #2015-11
.3 Set up and configure the server software and area routers (where required) to allow
for seamless access to the site BAS via the PDSB WAN.
.4 Coordinate all activities related to the central server with the PDSB representatives.
Provide the PDSB with detailed documentation related to any changes made to the
server software, settings or protocols.
.2 Local Service Ports
.1 Every DDC panel shall be provided with a local network access port to connect to
laptop computer. A user connected to the local access port shall have the same
level of system access and functionality as being connected to the site workstation
PC.
.2 Where BAS points (4 or more) are located in a mechanical room that does not have
a local BAS panel installed, a remote network access port shall be provided. The
access port shall be installed in a hinged metal enclosure with key-lock set and
lamicoid ID label.
.3 Communication.
.1 Web server or workstation and controllers shall communicate using BACnet

protocol. Web server or workstation and control network backbone shall
communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and
BACnet/IP addressing as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex J.
2.4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE.
.1 Operating System. Web server shall have an industry-standard professional-grade

operating system. Acceptable systems include Microsoft Vista, Microsoft Windows XP
Pro, Red Hat Linux, or Sun Solaris.
.2 System Graphics. Operator interface shall be graphically based and shall include at
least one graphic per piece of equipment or occupied zone, graphics for each chilled
water and hot water system, and graphics that summarize conditions on each floor of
each building included in this contract. Indicate thermal comfort on floor plan summary
graphics using dynamic colors to represent zone temperature relative to zone setpoint.
.3 Functionality. Graphics shall allow operator to monitor system status, to view a

summary of the most important data for each controlled zone or piece of equipment, to
use point-and-click navigation between zones or equipment, and to edit setpoints and
other specified parameters.
.4 Animation. Graphics shall be able to animate by displaying different image files for
changed object status.
.5 Alarm Indication. Indicate areas or equipment in an alarm condition using color or other
visual indicator.
Project #2015-11
.6 Format. Graphics shall be saved in an industry-standard format such as BMP, JPEG,

PNG, or GIF. Web-based system graphics shall be viewable on browsers compatible
with World Wide Web Consortium browser standards. Web graphic format shall require
no plug-in (such as HTML and JavaScript) or shall only require widely available no-cost
plug-ins (such as Active-X and Macromedia Flash).
.7 System Tools. System shall provide the following functionality to authorized operators
as an integral part of the operator interface or as stand-alone software programs. If
furnished as part of the interface, the tool shall be available from each workstation or
web browser interface. If furnished as a stand-alone program, software shall be
installable on standard IBM-compatible PCs with no limit on the number of copies that
can be installed under the system license.
.8 Automatic System Database Configuration. Each workstation or web server shall store
on its hard disk a copy of the current system database, including controller firmware and
software. Stored database shall be automatically updated with each system
configuration or controller firmware or software change.
.9 Controller Memory Download. Operators shall be able to download memory from the
system database to each controller.
.10 System Configuration. Operators shall be able to configure the system.
.11 Online Help. Context-sensitive online help for each tool shall assist operators in
operating and editing the system.
.12 Security. System shall require a user name and password to view, edit, add, or
delete data.
.13 Operator Access. Each user name and password combination shall define
accessible viewing, editing, adding, and deleting functions in each system
application, editor, and object.
.14 Automatic Log Out. Automatically log out each operator if no keyboard or mouse
activity is detected. Operators shall be able to adjust automatic log out delay.
.15 Encrypted Security Data. Store system security data including operator passwords
in an encrypted format. System shall not display operator passwords.
.16 System Diagnostics. System shall automatically monitor controller and I/O point
operation. System shall annunciate controller failure and I/O point locking (manual
overriding to a fixed value).
.17 Alarm Processing. System input and status objects shall be configurable to alarm
on departing from and on returning to normal state. Operator shall be able to enable
or disable each alarm and to configure alarm limits, alarm limit differentials, alarm
states, and alarm reactions for each system object. Configure and enable alarm
points as specified herein and indicated in the sequences of operation shown on the
drawings. Alarms shall be BACnet alarm objects and shall use BACnet alarm
services.
Project #2015-11
.18 Alarm Messages. Alarm messages shall use an English language descriptor without
acronyms or mnemonics to describe alarm source, location, and nature.
.19 Alarm Reactions. Operator shall be able to configure (by object) actions workstation
or web server shall initiate on receipt of each alarm. As a minimum, workstation or
web server shall be able to log, print, start programs, display messages, send
e-mail, send page, and audibly annunciate.
.20 Alarm Maintenance. Operators shall be able to view system alarms and changes
of state chronologically, to acknowledge and delete alarms, and to archive closed
alarms to the workstation or web server hard disk from each workstation or web
browser interface.
.21 Trend Configuration. Operator shall be able to configure trend sample or change
of value (COV) interval, start time, and stop time for each system data object and
shall be able to retrieve data for use in spreadsheets and standard database
programs. Controller shall sample and store trend data and shall be able to archive
data to the hard disk.. Trends shall be BACnet trend objects.
.22 Object and Property Status and Control. Operator shall be able to view, and to edit
if applicable, the status of each system object and property by menu, on graphics,
or through custom programs.
.23 Reports and Logs. Operator shall be able to select, to modify, to create, and to print
reports and logs. Operator shall be able to store report data in a format accessible
by standard spreadsheet and word processing programs.
.24 Standard Reports. Furnish the following standard system reports:
.1 Objects. System objects and current values filtered by object type, by status (in
alarm, locked, normal), by equipment, by geographic location, or by combination of
filter criteria.
.2 Alarm Summary. Current alarms and closed alarms. System shall retain closed
alarms for an adjustable period.
.3 Logs. System shall log the following to a database or text file and shall retain data
for an adjustable period:
.4 Alarm History.
.5 Trend Data. Operator shall be able to select trends to be logged.
.25 Operator Activity. At a minimum, system shall log operator log in and log out, control
parameter changes, schedule changes, and alarm acknowledgment and deletion.
System shall date and time stamp logged activity.
.26 Graphics Generation. Graphically based tools and documentation shall allow
Operator to edit system graphics, to create graphics, and to integrate graphics into
Project #2015-11
the system. Operator shall be able to add analog and Digital values, dynamic text,
static text, and animation files to a background graphic using a mouse.
.27 Graphics Library. Complete library of standard HVAC equipment graphics shall
include equipment such as chillers, boilers, air handlers, terminals, fan coils, and
unit ventilators. Library shall include standard symbols for other equipment including
fans, pumps, coils, valves, piping, dampers, and ductwork. Library graphic file
format shall be compatible with graphics generation tools.
.28 Custom Application Programming. Operator shall be able to create, edit, debug, and
download custom programs. System shall be fully operable while custom programs
are edited, compiled, and downloaded. Programming language shall have the
following features:
.1 Language. Language shall be graphically based or English language oriented. If

graphically based, language shall use function blocks arranged in a logic diagram
that clearly shows control logic flow. Function blocks shall directly provide functions
listed below, and operators shall be able to create custom or compound function
blocks. If English language oriented, language shall be based on the syntax of
BASIC, FORTRAN, C, or PASCAL, and shall allow for free-form programming that
is not column-oriented or "fill-in-the-blanks."
.2 Programming Environment. Tool shall provide a full-screen,

cursor-and-mouse-driven programming environment that incorporates word
processing features such as cut and paste. Operators shall be able to insert, add,
modify, and delete custom programming code, and to copy blocks of code to a file
library for reuse in other control programs.
.3 Independent Program Modules. Operator shall be able to develop independently

executing program modules that can disable, enable and exchange data with other
program modules.
.4 Debugging and Simulation. Operator shall be able to step through the program
observing intermediate values and results. Operator shall be able to adjust input
variables to simulate actual operating conditions. Operator shall be able to adjust
each step's time increment to observe operation of delays, integrators, and other
time-sensitive control logic. Debugger shall provide error messages for syntax and
for execution errors.
.5 Conditional Statements. Operator shall be able to program conditional logic using

compound Boolean (AND, OR, and NOT) and relational (EQUAL, LESS THAN,
GREATER THAN, NOT EQUAL) comparisons.
.6 Mathematical Functions. Language shall support floating-point addition, subtraction,

multiplication, division, and square root operations, as well as absolute value
calculation and programmatic selection of minimum and maximum values from a
list of values.
.7 Variables: Operator shall be able to use variable values in program conditional

statements and mathematical functions.
Project #2015-11
.8 Time Variables. Operator shall be able to use predefined variables to represent time
of day, day of the week, month of the year, and date. Other predefined variables or
simple control logic shall provide elapsed time in seconds, minutes, hours, and
days. Operator shall be able to start, stop, and reset elapsed time variables using
the program language.
.9 System Variables. Operator shall be able to use predefined variables to represent

status and results of Controller Software and shall be able to enable, disable, and
change setpoints of Controller Software as described in Controller Software section.
.29 Portable Operator's Terminal. Provide all necessary software to configure an

IBM-compatible laptop computer for use as a Portable Operator's Terminal.
Operator shall be able to connect configured Terminal to the system network or
directly to each controller for programming, setting up, and troubleshooting.
.30 BACnet. Web server or workstation shall have demonstrated interoperability during
at least one BMA Interoperability Workshop and shall substantially conform to
BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS) device profile as specified in
ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2001, BACnet Annex L.
2.5 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE
.1 Building and energy management application software shall reside and operate in
system controllers. Applications shall be editable through operator workstation or web
browser interface.
.2 Scheduling. System shall provide the following schedule options as a minimum:
.1 Weekly. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. Each schedule shall
be able to include up to 5 occupied periods (5 start-stop pairs or 10 events).
.2 Exception. Operator shall be able to designate an exception schedule for each of

the next 365 days. After an exception schedule has executed, system shall discard
and replace exception schedule with standard schedule for that day of the week.
.3 Holiday. Operator shall be able to define 24 special or holiday schedules of varying

length on a scheduling calendar that repeats each year.
.3 System Coordination. Operator shall be able to group related equipment based on

function and location and to use these groups for scheduling and other applications.
.4 Remote Communication. System shall automatically contact operator workstation or

server on receipt of critical alarms. If no network connection is available, system shall
use a modem connection.
.5 PID Control. System shall provide direct- and reverse-acting PID (proportional, integral,
derivative) algorithms. Each algorithm shall have anti-windup and selectable controlled
variable, setpoint, and PID gains. Each algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog
Project #2015-11
value that can be used to position an output or to stage a series of outputs.
.6 Staggered Start. System shall stagger controlled equipment restart after power outage.
Operator shall be able to adjust equipment restart order and time delay between
equipment restarts.
2.6 CONTROLLERS
.1 General. Provide Building Controllers (BC), Advanced Application Controllers (AAC),

Application Specific Controllers (ASC), Smart Actuators (SA), and Smart Sensors (SS)
as required to achieve performance specified herein and indicated on the drawings.
Every device in the system which executes control logic and directly controls HVAC
equipment must conform to a standard BACnet Device profile as specified in
ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L. Unless otherwise specified, hardwired
actuators and sensors may be used in lieu of BACnet Smart Actuators and Smart
Sensors.
2.7 BACNET.
.1 Building Controllers (BCs). Each BC shall conform to BACnet Building Controller (B-BC)
device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L and shall be
listed as a certified B-BC in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.
.2 Advanced Application Controllers (AACs). Each AAC shall conform to BACnet

Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC) device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE
135-2004, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-AAC in the BACnet
Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.
.3 Application Specific Controllers (ASCs). Each ASC shall conform to BACnet Application
Specific Controller (B-ASC) device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004,
BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-ASC in the BACnet Testing
Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.
.4 Smart Actuators (SAs). Each SA shall conform to BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA) device
profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as
a certified B-SA in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.
.5 Smart Sensors (SSs). Each SS shall conform to BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS) device
a certified B-SS in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.
2.8 BACNET COMMUNICATION.
.1 Each BC shall reside on or be connected to a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3

(Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and BACnet/IP addressing.
.2 BACnet routing shall be performed by BCs or other BACnet device routers as

necessary to connect BCs to networks of AACs and ASCs.
.3 Each AAC shall reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data
Project #2015-11
Link/Physical layer protocol with BACnet/IP addressing, or it shall reside on a BACnet
network using the ARCNET or MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.
.4 Each ASC shall reside on a BACnet network using the ARCNET or MS/TP Data
Link/Physical layer protocol.
.5 Each SA shall reside on a BACnet network using the ARCNET or MS/TP Data
.6 Each SS shall reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data
network using ARCNET or MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.
2.9 COMMUNICATION.
.1 Service Port. Each controller shall provide a service communication port for connection
to a Portable Operator's Terminal. Connection shall be extended to space temperature
sensor ports where shown on drawings.
.1 Signal Management. BC and ASC operating systems shall manage input and output
communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object
information and to allow for central monitoring and alarms.
.2 Data Sharing. Each BC and AAC shall share data as required with each networked
BC and AAC.
.3 Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for anticipated ambient

conditions.
.4 Controllers used outdoors or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted in

waterproof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at -29/C to 60/C (-20/F to
140/F).
.5 Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust-protective

enclosures and shall be rated for operation at 0/C to 50/C (32/F to 120/F).
.6 Real-Time Clock. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.
2.10 SERVICEABILITY.
.1 Controllers shall have diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor.
.2 Wires shall be connected to a field-removable modular terminal strip or to a termination

card connected by a ribbon cable.
.3 Each BC and AAC shall continually check its processor and memory circuit status and
shall generate an alarm on abnormal operation. System shall continuously check
controller network and generate alarm for each controller that fails to respond.
2.11 MEMORY.
Project #2015-11
.1 Controller memory shall support operating system, database, and programming

requirements.
.2 Each BC and AAC shall retain BIOS and application programming for at least 72 hours
in the event of power loss.
.3 Each ASC and SA shall use nonvolatile memory and shall retain BIOS and application
programming in the event of power loss. System shall automatically download dynamic
control parameters following power loss.
.4 Each controller shall have a min. 25% spare memory to allow for future expansion.
Each controller to have 25% spare inlet and outlet digital and anlogue points capanility.
.5 Immunity to Power and Noise. Controllers shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of
nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal
voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from
keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).
.6 Transformer. ASC power supply shall be fused or current limiting and shall be rated at
a minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption.
2.12 INPUT AND OUTPUT INTERFACE
.1 General. Hard-wire input and output points to BCs, AACs, ASCs, or SAS.
.2 Protection. Shorting an input or output point to itself, to another point, or to ground shall
cause no controller damage. Input or output point contact with up to 24 V for any
duration shall cause no controller damage.
.3 Digital Inputs. Digital inputs shall monitor the on and off signal from a remote device.
Digital inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 mA and shall be protected
against contact bounce and noise. Digital inputs shall sense dry contact closure without
application of power external to the controller.
.4 Pulse Accumulation Inputs. Pulse accumulation inputs shall conform to Digital input
requirements and shall accumulate up to 10 pulses per second.
.5 Analog Inputs. Analog inputs shall monitor low-voltage (0-10 Vdc), current (4-20 mA),
or resistance (thermistor or RTD) signals. Analog inputs shall be compatible with and
field configurable to commonly available sensing devices.
.6 Digital Outputs. Digital outputs shall send an on-or-off signal for on and off control.
Building Controller Digital outputs shall have three-position (on-off-auto) override
switches and status lights. Outputs shall be selectable for normally open or normally
closed operation.
.7 Analog Outputs. Analog outputs shall send a modulating 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA signal
as required to properly control output devices. Each Building Controller analog output
shall have a two-position (auto-manual) switch, a manually adjustable potentiometer,
Project #2015-11
and status lights. Analog outputs shall not drift more than 0.4% of range annually.
.8 Tri-State Outputs. Control three-point floating electronic actuators without feedback with
tri-state outputs (two coordinated Digital outputs). Tri-State outputs may be used to
provide analog output control in zone control and terminal unit control applications such
as VAV terminal units, duct-mounted heating coils, and zone dampers.
.9 Universal Inputs and Outputs. Inputs and outputs that can be designated as either
Digital or analog in software shall conform to the provisions of this section that are
appropriate for their designated use.
2.13 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING
.1 Power Supplies. Control transformers shall be UL listed. Furnish Class 2 current-limiting

type or furnish over-current protection in primary and secondary circuits for Class 2
service in accordance with NEC requirements. Limit connected loads to 80% of rated
capacity.
.2 DC power supply output shall match output current and voltage requirements. Unit shall
be full-wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak-to-peak.
Regulation shall be 1.0% line and load combined, with 100-microsecond response time
for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage and over-current protection
and shall be able to withstand 150% current overload for at least three seconds without
trip-out or failure.
.3 Unit shall operate between 0/C and 50/C (32/F and 120/F). EM/RF shall meet FCC
Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B and MILSTD 810C for shock and vibration.
.4 Line voltage units shall be UL recognized and CSA listed.
2.14 POWER LINE FILTERING.
.1 Provide internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations
and controllers. Surge protection shall have:
.1 Dielectric strength of 1000 V minimum

.2 Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less
.3 Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greater
.4 Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or greater at 40-100 Hz
2.15 CONTROL DEVICES AND SENSORS
.1 Space Temperature Sensors.
.1 Mount sensors at a height of 5'-6" above the finished floor. Unless indicated
otherwise, mount new sensors where the old pneumatic sensors were located.
.2 End-to-end accuracy +/- 0.3OC over the entire operating range.
.3 Equipment supplied by the unit ventilator manufacturer and installed by the controls
Project #2015-11
sub-contractor.
.4 Do not mount sensors on outside walls or other locations influenced by external

thermal sources (e.g. computers, boiler rooms ).
.5 Standard of Acceptance: Enercorp
.2 Immersion Temperature Sensors
.1 Use immersion temperature sensors with thermwells for all applications where a
temperature of a fluid in a pipe is being sensed.
.2 Provide well-mounted water temperature sensors with the following minimum

characteristics:
! The sensors shall be 10k ohm thermistor encapsulated in a 6mm OD, 50m long
probe, with screw fitting for insertion into a standard thermowell.
! Operating range -10 to +100 degrees C.
! End-to-end accuracy +/- 0.3 deg. C over the entire operating range.
! The sensors shall be complete with brass thermowell. Provide a stainless steel
thermowell where exposed to corrosive liquids.
.3 Use conductive gel when mounting the sensor in the thermowell
.4 The sensors to be mounted on insulated piping shall be installed clear of the

insulation.
.3 Flow Switches.
.1 Flow-proving switches shall be paddle (water service only) or differential pressure

type (air or water service). Switches shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting, and pilot
duty rated (125 VA minimum).
.2 Paddle switches shall have adjustable sensitivity and NEMA 1 enclosure unless
otherwise specified.
.3 Differential pressure switches shall have scale range and differential suitable for
intended application and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.
.4 Current Transmitters.
.1 AC current transmitters shall be self-powered, combination split-core current

transformer type with built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifier with 4-20 mA
two-wire output. Full-scale unit ranges shall be 10 A, 20 A, 50 A, 100 A, 150 A, and
200 A, with internal zero and span adjustment. Unit accuracy shall be 1% full-scale
at 500 ohm maximum burden.
Project #2015-11
.2 Transmitter shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be

UL/CSA recognized.
.3 Unit shall be split-core type for clamp-on installation on existing wiring.
.5 Current Transformers.
.1 AC current transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized and shall be completely

encased (except for terminals) in approved plastic material.
.2 Transformers shall be available in various current ratios and shall be selected for
1% accuracy at 5 A full-scale output.
.3 Use fixed-core transformers for new wiring installation and split-core transformers
for existing wiring installation.
.6 Voltage Transmitters.
.1 AC voltage transmitters shall be self-powered single-loop (two-wire) type, 4-20 mA

output with zero and span adjustment.
.2 Adjustable full-scale unit ranges shall be 100-130 Vac, 200-250 Vac, 250-330 Vac,
and 400-600 Vac. Unit accuracy shall be 1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum
burden.
.3 Transmitters shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be

UL/CSA recognized at 600 Vac rating.
.7 Voltage Transformers.
.1 AC voltage transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized, 600 Vac rated, and shall
have built-in fuse protection.
.2 Transformers shall be suitable for ambient temperatures of 4/C-55/C (40/F-130/F)

and shall provide 0.5% accuracy at 24 Vac and 5 VA load.
.3 Windings (except for terminals) shall be completely enclosed with metal or plastic.
.8 Current Switches.
.1 Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip

current. Select switches to match application current and DDC system output
requirements.
.9 Current Sensors (Analog)
.1 Current sensors (CT) shall be used for status monitoring of all motor-driven
equipment, where specified.
Project #2015-11
.2 Technical Performance Output should be only 4-20mA only. Voltage output will
not be accepted. End-to-end accuracy +/- 1% of full scale at each range.
.3 The current sensors shall be mounted inside the starter cabinets whenever
possible. If this is not possible due to space limitation, provide an enclosure to
house the sensor.
.10 Status Relays (Solid State)
.1 The status relays shall be mounted inside newly provided enclosures mounted near
the respective equipment starter cabinets.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Omron
.11 Firestopping and Smoke Seal Materials
.1 Asbestos-free elastomeric materials tested, listed and labelled by ULC in

accordance with CAN4-S115-M85, for installation in U.L.C. designated firestopping
and smoke seal Systems. These Systems shall provide a positive fire, water and
smoke seal and a fire- resistance rating (flame, smoke hose stream and
temperature) not less than the fire resistance rating of surrounding construction.
.2 Materials shall form ULC listed or UL classified assemblies and be compatible with
abutting dissimilar materials and finishes.
! 3M Canada Limited
! A/D Fire Protection System Ltd.
! Fire Stop System
.12 Wall Opening Covering Plates
.1 All hole covering plates used on this project shall be stainless steel 18-8 chrome
metal alloy, type 302, non-magnetic type for finished areas and pressed steel for
unfinished areas. Finish brush marks shall be run in a vertical direction.
.13 Access Doors
.1 Access doors installed in unfinished areas shall be constructed of 12 ga prime

coated steel and of stainless steel for all areas finished with tile or marble surfaces.
.2 Access doors shall be complete with 180? opening door, round safety corners,
concealed hinges, screwdriver latches, plaster lock and anchor straps.
.3 Access doors shall be 24x 24 or 12x 18 as per site condition.
.4 Access doors in fire rated construction shall be ULC listed and labeled and of a
Project #2015-11
rating to maintain the fire separation integrity.
! Zurn Industries Canada Limited

! LeHage Industries Limited
! Acudor Acorn Limited.
2.16 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS.
.1 Indoor control panels shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 construction with hinged door
key-lock latch and removable sub-panels. A common key shall open each control panel
and sub-panel.
.2 Prewire internal and face-mounted device connections with color-coded stranded

conductors tie-wrapped or neatly installed in plastic troughs. Field connection terminals
shall be UL listed for 600 V service, individually identified per control and interlock
drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring.
.3 Each local panel shall have a control power source power switch (on-off) with
overcurrent protection.
2.17 FAIL STATE POSITION OF OUTPUTS
.1 Unless specified otherwise, configure BAS output points for the following fail state (e.g.
device position upon panel failure):
.1 Purge Fan ON at 100%

.2 Chilled water pumps ON
.3 Condenser water pumps ON
.4 Cooling Tower VFD ON at 100%
.5 Chiller ON
2.18 LAN CABLING
.1 All LAN cabling shall be Category V as defined by EIA/TIA 568A. The contractor shall
test all cabling to verify that 100Mb bandwidth is supported. See commissioning
requirements.
.2 Cabling shall be 4 pair, 100 ohm UTP, #24 AWG solid copper conductor PVC insulated,
with blue or grey colour coded jacket. FT6 rated cable shall be used unless otherwise
required to meet building codes or by-laws.
.3 Data outlets shall be RJ45, 8 pin connectors, with 50 microns of hard gold over nickel,
minimum durability of 750 mating cycles and contact pressure of 100 grams per
contact. Transmission characteristics shall meet TSB-40 Category V.
.4 Provide one RJ45 data outlet adjacent to each device to be terminated (e.g. workstation
PC, DDC panel, hub, etc.) Use a flexible patch cable to connect from the data outlet
to the end device. For Delta Controls installations, provide a duplex data outlet at the
Project #2015-11
workstation PC to accommodate the remote security key wiring. LAN cabling shall not
be directly terminated to any device.
.5 Provide protection from EMI sources in accordance with CSA-T530 article 4
.6 The contractor shall test all cabling to verify conformance with TIA /EIA TSB-67 - Basic
Link Test using a Level 2, bi-directional tester. See commissioning requirements.
.7 Where there are more than 2-90 degree in a conduit run, provide a pull box between
sections so that there are two bends or less in any one section.
.8 Where a conduit run requires a reverse bend, between 100 degrees and 180 degrees,
insert a pull box at each bend having an angle from 100 degrees to 180 degrees.
.9 Ream all conduit ends and install insulated bushings on each end.
.10 Terminate all conduits that protrude through the structural floor 2 above the
concrete base.
.11 Do not use a pull box in lieu of a conduit bend. Align conduits that enter a pull box
from opposite ends with each other.
2.19 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM
.1 Optical Cable. Optical cables shall be duplex 900 mm tight-buffer construction designed
for intra-building environments. Sheath shall be UL listed OFNP in accordance with
NEC Article 770. Optical fiber shall meet the requirements of FDDI, ANSI X3T9.5 PMD
for 62.5/125mm.
.2 Connectors. Field terminate optical fibers with ST type connectors. Connectors shall
have ceramic ferrules and metal bayonet latching bodies.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 Thoroughly examine project plans for control device and equipment locations. Report
discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions to Consultant for resolution before starting
rough-in work.
.2 Inspect site to verify that equipment can be installed as shown. Report discrepancies,
conflicts, or omissions to Consultant for resolution before starting rough-in work.
.3 Remove all existing field and panel mounted control devices (e.g. transducers,
controllers, thermostats, etc.) that have been made redundant or inoperative by the new
BAS equipment and control strategies. Remove any other controls as specified or
directed by the Consultant
.4 The control sequences indicate only the principal items of equipment controlling the
Project #2015-11
systems. Supplement each control system with relays and auxiliaries to enable each
system to perform as specified and to permit proper operation and supervision of it.
.5 Provide complete identification and labeling for new and existing devices and
equipment.
.6 Provide new cabling, conduits, control cabinets, power supplies and other auxiliary
equipment, as required for a complete operational system.
.7 The layout drawings do not show all controlled devices and operators and are intended
to indicate the general location of equipment to be controlled; for full extent of
instrumentation refer to the controls diagrams and sequences of operation.
3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
.1 All cutting, patching, painting and making good for the installation of the BAS work shall
be done by the BAS Contractor. All cutting shall be performed in a neat and true
fashion, with proper tools and equipment to the Consultants and/or Boards approval.
The surfaces shall be made good to reasonably match existing finishes
.2 Location of the existing services concealed in the construction, if any, shall be

determined prior to drilling or cutting an opening. If required, the Contractor is to x-ray
the walls or slabs and in any case he shall not drill or cut any surface without the
Boards representatives approval.
.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any damage to existing services,
exposed or concealed, caused as a result of this Work.
3.3 PROTECTION
.1 Controls Contractor shall protect against and be liable for damage to work and to
material caused by Contractor's work or employees.
.2 Controls Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until inspected, tested,
and accepted. Protect material not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with
temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign
objects.
3.4 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP
.1 Install equipment, piping, and wiring or raceway horizontally, vertically, and parallel to
walls wherever possible.
.2 Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for piping and equipment
vibration isolation.
.3 Install equipment in readily accessible locations as defined by National Electrical Code

(NEC) Chapter 1 Article 100 Part A.
.4 Verify wiring integrity to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and ground faults.
Project #2015-11
.5 Equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with industry specifications and
standards and local codes for performance, reliability, and compatibility.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1 Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with rules and regulations of applicable
local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in this section.
.2 Continually monitor field installation for code compliance and workmanship quality.
.3 Contractor shall arrange for work inspection by local or provincial authorities having
jurisdiction over the work.
3.6 EXISTING EQUIPMENT
.1 Wiring. Interconnecting control wiring shall be removed and shall become Contractor's
property unless specifically noted or shown to be reused.
.2 Local Control Panels. Remove and deliver existing control panels to Board.
.3 Repair. Unless otherwise directed, Contractor is not responsible for repair or

replacement of existing energy equipment and systems, valves, dampers, or actuators.
Notify Consultant in writing immediately of existing equipment that requires
maintenance.
.4 Indicator Gauges. Ensure operation of and recalibrate for reasonable accuracy or

replace existing gauges.
.5 Room Thermostats. Remove and deliver existing room thermostats to Board unless
otherwise noted. Patch and finish holes and marks left by removal to match existing
walls.
.6 Electronic Sensors and Transmitters. Remove and deliver existing sensors and
transmitters to Board.
.7 Controllers and Auxiliary Electronic Devices. Remove and deliver existing controllers
and auxiliary electronic devices to Board.
.8 Existing System Operating Schedule. Existing mechanical system may be disabled

during this work.
.9 Patch holes and finish to match existing walls.
.10 At Board's request, items to be delivered to Board shall instead be properly

disposed of. Hazardous materials shall be disposed in accordance with current
regulations and applicable by-laws.
3.7 WIRING
Project #2015-11
.1 Control and interlock wiring and installation shall comply with national and local
electrical codes, and manufacturer's recommendations.
.2 NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring shall be UL listed in approved raceway as specified
by NEC.
.3 All wiring shall be installed in EMT conduit unless specified otherwise. Exposed wiring
in finished areas (e.g. corridors, classrooms, gymnasiums, etc.) shall be installed in
wiremold (colour to match surrounding area).
.4 Wiring from DDC controllers to sensors and actuators and control system network and
low voltage wiring running in accessible ceilings may be installed using LVT cable.
Where the ceiling is used as a return air plenum, plenum rated cable shall be used in
lieu of LVT cable.
.5 Install EMT and cable at right angles to building lines, securely fastened, and in
accordance with current electrical codes and standards.
.6 Power and control wiring shall be copper conductor (RW90). For power wiring, provide
#12 AWG (minimum) with a 3% maximum voltage drop in accordance with CEC
requirements. Control wiring shall be a minimum of #14 AWG, unless otherwise
specified.
.7 The wires smaller than 18 gauge shall not be used and will not be accepted on the
project except for: wiring between terminal computer devices, wire in standard
communication cables, such as printers and short haul modems, wire used in
communication networks, i.e. any cable transferring digital data, using twisted shielded
pairs.
.8 The wiring from panels to devices shall be installed without splices. The use of crimp
connectors is not allowed when connecting field wiring to sensor or device leads. The
use of wire nuts is acceptable in this application.
.9 Power for control system shall not be obtained by tapping into miscellaneous circuits
that could be inadvertently switched off. Only dedicated circuit(s) shall power the control
system. Provide additional breakers or electrical panels as required.
.10 Mount transformers and other peripheral equipment in panels located in serviceable
areas. Provide line-side breakers/fuses for each transformer.
.11 All 120 VAC power for any controls equipment shall be from dedicated circuits.
Provide a breaker lock for each breaker used to supply the control system. Update
the panel circuit directory.
.12 A dedicated power circuit may be used to power DDC panels and equipment within
the same or adjoining mechanical rooms. The use of one power circuit to power
DDC panels distributed throughout the building is not acceptable.
.13 The controller may be powered from the equipment that it is directly controlling (i.e.
heat pump, rooftop unit) only if the controller controls no other equipment and the
Project #2015-11
power supply to the controller remains energized independently of unit operation or
status.
.14 Provide all required code gauge boxes, connectors and other wiring accessories.
.15 For all DC wiring, positive conductors shall be WHITE or RED in colour while
negative conductors shall be BLACK in colour.
3.8 COMMUNICATION WIRING
.1 Communication wiring shall be low-voltage Class 2 wiring.
.2 Install communication wiring in separate raceways and enclosures from other Class 2
wiring.
.3 During installation do not exceed maximum cable pulling, tension, or bend radius
specified by the cable manufacturer.
.4 Verify entire network's integrity following cable installation using appropriate tests for
each cable.
.5 Install lightning arrestor according to manufacturer's recommendations between cable

and ground where a cable enters or exits a building.
.6 Each run of communication wiring shall be a continuous length without splices when
that length is commercially available. Runs longer than commercially available lengths
shall have as few splices as possible using commercially available lengths.
.7 Label communication wiring to indicate origination and destination.
.8 Ground coaxial cable according to NEC regulations article on "Communications

Circuits, Cable, and Protector Grounding."
3.9 FIBER OPTIC CABLE
.1 During installation do not exceed maximum pulling tensions specified by cable

manufacturer. Post-installation residual cable tension shall be within cable
manufacturer's specifications.
.2 Install cabling and associated components according to manufacturers' instructions. Do

not exceed minimum cable and unjacketed fiber bend radii specified by cable
manufacturer.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS
.1 Install sensors according to manufacturer's recommendations.
.2 Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for operating environment.
.3 Install room temperature sensors on concealed junction boxes properly supported by
Project #2015-11
wall framing.
.4 Air seal wires attached to sensors in their raceways or in the wall to prevent sensor
readings from being affected by air transmitted from other areas.
3.11 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING
.1 Label wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, with control
system address or termination number at each end within 5 cm (2 in.) of termination.
.2 Label pneumatic tubing at each end within 5 cm (2 in.) of termination with a descriptive
identifier.
.3 Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show instrument or item
served.
.4 Label control panels with minimum 1 cm ( in.) letters on laminated plastic nameplates.
.5 Label each control component with a permanent label. Label plug-in components such
that label remains stationary during component replacement.
.6 Label room sensors related to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.
.7 Manufacturers' nameplates and UL or CSA labels shall be visible and legible after
equipment is installed.
.8 Label identifiers shall match record documents.
3.12 PROGRAMMING
.1 Point Naming. Name points as shown on the equipment points list provided with each
sequence of operation. See sequences of operation on the drawings. If character
limitations or space restrictions make it advisable to shorten the name, the
abbreviations given in Appendix B may be used. Where multiple points with the same
name reside in the same controller, each point name may be customized with its
associated Program Object number. For example, "Zone Temp 1" for Zone 1, "Zone
Temp 2" for Zone 2.
.2 Software Programming. Programming shall provide actions for each possible situation.
Graphic- or parameter-based programs shall be documented. Text-based programs
shall be modular, structured, and commented to clearly describe each section of the
program.
.3 Application Programming. Provide application programming that adheres to sequences

of operation specified and shown on the drawings. Program documentation or comment
statements shall reflect language used in sequences of operation.
.4 System Programming. Provide system programming necessary for system operation.
3.13 OPERATOR INTERFACE.
Project #2015-11
.1 Standard Graphics. Provide graphics as specified herein. Show on each equipment

graphic input and output points and relevant calculated points such as indicated on the
applicable Points List as indicated on the drawings. Point information on graphics shall
dynamically update.
.2 Install, initialize, start up, and troubleshoot operator interface software and functions
(including operating system software, operator interface database, and third-party
software installation and integration required for successful operator interface
operation).
3.14 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES AND LOCATIONS
.1 Provide new enclosures for all field equipment (e.g. DDC panels, transducers, relays,
etc.). Enclosures shall be equipped with a hinged door and latch. Provide a
Board-standard key/lock set for each enclosure.
.2 Obtain written approval of the Consultant prior to re-using existing enclosures or

cabinets. Provide a Board-standard lockset for all re-used enclosures or cabinets.
.3 Mount all enclosures in serviceable areas of mechanical rooms, storage rooms or

janitor closets. Obtain written approval of the Consultant prior to mounting any
enclosure in ceiling spaces or more than 5-6 above the finished floor.
.4 All transformers and power supplies for control equipment shall be installed in new
dedicated metal cabinets with hinged, lockable covers located in the proximity of their
dedicated controller cabinets.
.5 Include within a DDC panel enclosure one 120 VAC duplex receptacle for portable PC
power, if the controller cabinet is located further than 5-0 from the nearest wall
receptacle.
.6 Ensure that enclosures are sized to allow for ease of servicing of all equipment
contained within. Enclosures containing DDC panels shall be sized to allow for the
installation of the maximum allowable number of expansion panels/boards. Do not
mount other equipment in a manner that may interfere with the future installation of
expansion panels/boards.
.7 For enclosures containing pneumatic transducers or devices, provide one pressure

gauge (1-1/2 dial, 0-30psi) for the main air line supply.
3.15 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING OF CONTROL EQUIPMENT
.1 All panels must have a lamicoid tag (min. 3x1) affixed to the front face indicating panel
designation and function (i.e. BAS Panel 1 or Relay Panel 3).
.2 All field sensors or devices must have a lamicoid tag (min. 3x1) attached with tie-wrap
Project #2015-11
or adhesive indicating the point software name and hardware address (i.e. AHU1_MAT,
2.IP4). Tags must be secured by screws where mounted outside of the building, in
un-heated spaces, in high humidity areas or where subject to vibration.
.3 Room sensors or other sensors in finished areas must have a lamicoid tag affixed to
the front cover. This tag shall be minimum 1x and indicate the point software name
and hardware address.
.4 All devices within a field enclosure shall be identified via a label or tag.
.5 All BAS panel power sources must be identified by a label (min. 3x1) indicating the
source power panel designation and circuit number (i.e. 120vac fed from LP-2A cct
#1).
.6 All field control equipment panels fed from more than one power source must have a
warning label on the front cover.
.7 All wires shall be identified with the hardware address with a band-type self-adhesive
strips or clip-on plastic wire markers at both ends.
.8 All rotating equipment controlled by the BAS shall have a tag or label affixed indicating
that the equipment may start without warning.
.9 The location of the phone line manager shall be indicated via a label affixed to the
inside cover of the modem enclosure or BAS panel.
.10 All BAS panels will be supplied with a points list sheet (within a plastic sleeve)
attached to the inside door.
.11 The points list shall identify the following for each point:
.1 Panel number.
.2 Panel location.
.3 Hardware address.
.4 Software name.
.5 Point description.
.6 Field device type.
.7 Point type (i.e. AI or DO).
.8 Device fail position.
.9 Device manufacturer.
.10 Model number or reference.
.11 Wire tag reference.
.12 Provide laminated wiring diagrams for all field mounted relay enclosures. Securely
attach to the inside door. Identify power panels and circuit numbers of the
equipment being controlled.
.13 Provide laminated wiring diagrams or modify existing equipment wiring diagrams
wherever the BAS interfaces to other equipment. (e.g. boilers, chillers, etc.).
Securely attach to the inside of the respective control cabinet.
Project #2015-11
.14 Provide lamacoid labels indicating the required operating sequences, on the boilers
and valves, where the boiler plants have manual or automatic isolating valves.
Submit actual wording to the Consultant for approval prior to fabrication and
installation.
.15 Provide lamicoid or machine labels (as outlined above) for all interposing relays or
contactors used in control circuits. The labels shall include the related point
software name and hardware address
.16 Provide a lamicoid label to identify the location of concealed devices above the
ceiling space. Mount the label on the ceiling grid t-bar or a permanent surface
adjacent to the devices. The label shall contain the wording BAS Devices Above.
.17 Provide lamicoid labels for all auxiliary HVAC equipment (e.g. force flow cabinets,
unit ventilators, unit heater, window AC units, etc.) controlled by the BAS. Mount
the labels in the vicinity of the existing thermostat or power switch for the unit. The
label shall contain the wording Under BAS Control.
.18 Where directed by the Consultant, provide any and all additional labelling, diagrams.
schematics or instructions as may be required to facilitate the correct operation and
maintenance of controlled building systems.
3.16 SYSTEMS HARDWARE COMMISSIONING
.1 This contractor shall be responsible for the end to end commissioning, testing,
verification and start-up of the complete control system hardware including panels,
sensors, transducers, end devices, relays and wiring. Where applicable, this shall
include any points from an existing and/or re-used automation system in the building.
.2 The contractor shall conduct the hardware commissioning at the facility.
.3 When the site hardware installation is 100% completed (including all labeling and
documentation), the contractor shall provide written notification to the Board to schedule
the hardware commissioning dates for each facility.
.4 Board reserves the right, at its sole discretion, to discontinue site commissioning at any
time if any part of the site hardware installation is found to be incomplete on the date
of commissioning. If this occurs, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for any
additional costs related to rescheduling of the site commissioning.
.5 The Contractor shall prepare a hardware commissioning report containing the following
information and test results:
.1 Analogue inputs (i.e. temperatures, pressure, etc.) shall be verified with an

approved calibration device. All actual temperature readings should be with +/- 1C
of the readings observed at the workstation. Record calibration adjustments and
settings.
.2 Analogue outputs shall be verified by manually commanding the output channel
Project #2015-11
from the operator workstation to two or more positions within the 0-100% range and
verifying the actual position of the actuator or device. All devices shall operate over
their entire 0-100% range from a minimum control range of 10-90%. Record the
actual output scale range (channel output voltage versus controller command) for
each analogue end device
.3 Digital outputs shall be verified by witnessing the actual start/stop operation of the
equipment under control.
.4 Digital inputs shall be verified by witnessing the status of the input point as the
equipment is manually cycled on and off.
.5 Record all out-of-season or unverified points in the commissioning report as

non-commissioned.
.6 Identify any existing equipment (valves, dampers, fan starters, etc..) that are
inoperative or require maintenance or repair.
.6 The BAS field panel power source shall be toggled on and off to ensure reboot
functionality and power down memory retention of all parameters. During the power
down test, all controlled system outputs shall go to their fail-safe position.
.7 Verify PID loop tuning parameters by applying a step change to the current setpoint and
observing the response of the controlled device. Setpoint should be reached in an
acceptable period of time without excessive cycling or hunting of the controlled device.
Provide a graph of the trend response to setpoint change for important controlled
devices (e.g. valves 1-inch or larger, dampers on major air handlers, etc.)
.8 Provide confirmation that a series of test alarms has been successfully received at a
designated remote monitoring workstations.
.9 Include with the hardware commissioning report a site floor plan indicating the location
of all equipment installed in concealed or recessed locations (e.g. interposing relays in
ceiling spaces).
.10 Provide testing of all LAN cabling to ensure that 100Mb bandwidth is supported.
.11 Verify conformance with TIA /EIA TSB-67 - Basic Link Test using a Level 2,
bi-directional tester. Provide all equipment necessary to carry out the required
tests.
.12 The hardware commissioning report must be signed and dated by the Contractors
technician performing the tests and participating Board representative.
.13 At the completion of site commissioning, submit four (4) copies of hardware
commissioning report to the Board.
3.17 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION
.1 At the completion of the site hardware inspection, the Contractor shall test and verify
that the system programming, graphics and alarm software is operating correctly and
Project #2015-11
is in compliance all requirements of the specifications.
.2 The Contractor shall provide written notification to the PDSB that the site is ready for
the Substantial Completion Inspection by the Consultant.
.3 At the conclusion of the Substantial Completion Inspection, the Consultant shall issue
a comprehensive site deficiency report to the Contractor for his immediate action.
.4 The Contractor shall correct all items noted in the site deficiency report within ten (10)
business days of receipt.
.5 The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Board that all items on the
Consultants site deficiency report have been corrected.
3.18 CONTROL SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE
.1 Demonstration. Prior to acceptance, perform the following performance tests to

demonstrate system operation and compliance with specification after and in addition
to tests specified above. Provide Consultant with log documenting completion of
Substantial Completion Inspection.
.2 Consultant will be present to observe and review system demonstration. Notify

Consultant at least 10 days before system demonstration begins.
.3 Demonstration shall follow process submitted and approved. Complete approved

checklists and forms for each system as part of system demonstration.
.4 Demonstrate actual field operation of each sequence of operation as specified herein.

Provide at least two persons equipped with two-way communication. Demonstrate
calibration and response of any input and output points requested by Consultant.
Provide and operate test equipment required to prove proper system operation.
.5 Demonstrate compliance with sequences of operation through each operational mode.
.6 Demonstrate complete operation of operator interface.
.7 Demonstrate each of the following.
.1 DDC loop response. Supply graphical trend data output showing each DDC loop's
response to a setpoint change representing an actuator position change of at least
25% of full range. Trend sampling rate shall be from 10 seconds to 3 minutes,
depending on loop speed. Each sample's trend data shall show setpoint, actuator
position, and controlled variable values. Consultant will require further tuning of
each loop that displays unreasonably under- or over-damped control.
.2 Building fire alarm system interface.
.3 Trend logs for each system. Trend data shall indicate setpoints, operating points,
valve positions, and other data as specified in the points list provided with each
sequence of operation. Each log shall cover three 48-hour periods and shall have
Project #2015-11
a sample frequency not less than 10 minutes or as specified on its points list. Logs
shall be accessible through system's operator interface and shall be retrievable for
use in other software programs.
.4 Tests that fail to demonstrate proper system operation shall be repeated after
Contractor makes necessary repairs or revisions to hardware or software to
successfully complete each test.
3.19 ACCEPTANCE.
.1 After tests described in this specification are performed to the satisfaction of both
Consultant and PDSB, Consultant will accept control system as meeting completion
requirements. Consultant may exempt tests from completion requirements that cannot
be performed due to circumstances beyond Contractor's control. Consultant will provide
written statement of each exempted test. Exempted tests shall be performed as part of
warranty.
.2 System shall not be accepted until completed demonstration forms and checklists are
submitted and approved as required.
3.20 CLEANING
.1 Each day clean up debris resulting from work. Remove packaging material as soon as
its contents have been removed. Collect waste and place in designated location.
.2 On completion of work in each area, clean work debris and equipment. Keep areas free
from dust, dirt, and debris.
.3 On completion of work, check equipment furnished under this section for paint damage.
Repair damaged factory-finished paint to match adjacent areas. Replace deformed
cabinets and enclosures with new material and repaint to match adjacent areas.
3.21 TRAINING
.1 Provide training for a designated staff of Board's representatives. Training shall be

provided via self-paced training, web-based or computer-based training, classroom
training, or a combination of training methods.
.2 Training shall enable students to accomplish the following objectives:
.1 Proficiently operate system

.2 Understand control system architecture and configuration
.3 Understand DDC system components
.4 Understand system operation, including DDC system control and optimizing
routines (algorithms)
.5 Operate workstation and peripherals
.6 Log on and off system
.7 Access graphics, point reports, and logs
.8 Adjust and change system setpoints, time schedules, and holiday schedules
.9 Recognize common HVAC system malfunctions by observing system graphics,
Project #2015-11
trend graphs, and other system tools
.10 Understand system drawings and Operation and Maintenance manual
.11 Understand job layout and location of control components
.12 Access data from DDC controllers
.13 Operate portable operator's terminals
.14 Create and change system graphics
.15 Create, delete, and modify alarms, including configuring alarm reactions
.16 Create, delete, and modify point trend logs (graphs) and multi-point trend
graphs
.17 Configure and run reports
.18 Add, remove, and modify system's physical points
.19 Create, modify, and delete application programming
.20 Add operator interface stations
.21 Add a new controller to system
.22 Download firmware and advanced applications programming to a controller
.23 Configure and calibrate I/O points
.24 Maintain software and prepare backups
.25 Interface with job-specific, third-party operator software
.26 Add new users and understand password security procedures
.3 Divide presentation of objectives into three sessions (1-13, 14-23, and 24-26).
Participants will attend one or more of sessions, depending on knowledge level
required.
.1 Day-to-day Operators (objectives 1-13)
.2 Advanced Operators (objectives 1-13 and 14-23)
.3 System Managers and Administrators (objectives 1-13 and 24-26)
.4 Provide course outline and materials. Provide one copy of training material per student.
.5 Instructors shall be factory-trained and experienced in presenting this material.
.6 Perform classroom training using a network of working controllers representative of

installed hardware.
Project #2015-11
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM REPLACEMENT ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 Furnish all labor, materials, services and equipment required to make the mechanical
equipment fully functional. The Work covered by this section of the specifications consists
of performing all operations, including cutting, channeling, and chasing, necessary for
providing power supply to the mechanical equipment forming part of this project.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
.1 Shop drawings shall be submitted for all equipment furnished by Contractor with internal
wiring and controls, in accordance with the requirements of Section 15010.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 All electrical materials shall be new and as listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories Canada,
Inc. for the application, except as otherwise specified herein.
.2 All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer or listed
by an independent testing laboratory as an assembly thereof.
.3 Materials and equipment shall be the standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged
in the production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current and standard
design.
2.2 CONDUIT AND TUBING
.1 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
.1 Mild steel, zinc-coated on the outside and either zinc-coated or coated with an approved
corrosion-resistant coating on the inside.
.2 Exterior conduits: rigid aluminum
.3 Expansion Fittings
.1 Malleable iron, hot-dipped galvanized with factory installed packing and a grounding
ring.
2.3 CONDUCTORS
.1 Unless otherwise noted, all conductors shall be annealed copper with minimum 98%
conductivity and shall conform with the applicable standards of UL, ANSI, and ICEA.
.2 Branch circuit conductors shall not be smaller than No. 12 AWG copper wire.
.3 All conductors No. 8 and larger shall be stranded.
Project #2015-11
.4 Unless otherwise specified, the minimum size for Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits
shall be No. 16 AWG and for Class 2 low-energy control and signal circuits shall be No. 20
AWG.
.5 The use of solid or stranded wire shall meet the equipment manufacturer installation
requirements.
.6 Unless otherwise specified, all conductor insulation shall be type THHN-THWN for 600V
and below.
2.4 OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULL BOXES
.1 Outlet Boxes
.1 Only zinc-coated or cadmium-plated sheet-steel boxes, of a class to satisfy the

conditions for each outlet, shall be used in concealed work.
.2 Boxes mounted on the outside of the building walls shall be cast construction, with
threaded hubs and gasketed covers.
.3 Outlet boxes for exposed work shall not be less than 4 inches square with appropriate
covers for surface work. "Handy" boxes may be utilized in accordance with the NEC
requirements. Cut-in boxes are allowed to be installed for non-exposed work.
.4 Each box containing an equipment grounding conductor serving motors, lighting,

fixtures, or receptacles shall be provided with a grounding terminal.
.5 A device plate shall be provided for each outlet to suit the device installed.
.6 All outlet cover plates on unfinished walls or on any surface mounted devices shall be
of zinc-coated sheet metal, having rounded or beveled edges.
.7 Unless otherwise indicated, all plates on finished walls shall be of ivory- colored metal
or heavy-duty (unbreakable) nylon.
.8 Screws shall be of metal with counter sunk heads with a finish to match the finish of the
plate.
.9 The use of sectional device plates is not permitted.
.2 Junction/Pull Boxes
.1 Pull boxes shall be constructed of code-gage galvanized sheet metal not less than the
minimum size recommended by the National Electrical Code.
.2 Boxes shall be furnished with screw fastened covers unless otherwise specified.
2.5 CABINETS
.1 Cabinet boxes shall be constructed of zinc-coated sheet steel and shall conform to the
requirements of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Standard for Cabinets and boxes (UL #50).
Project #2015-11
.1 Trims and doors shall have a suitable primer coat and a finish coat of a color specifically
designated.
.2 Cabinet trim shall be fitted with hinged door and flush latch.
.3 Boxes shall be provided with a 3/4 inch exterior grade, one-faced "B" grade, or equal
plywood backboard inside painted white unless otherwise specified on Drawings.
.4 Cabinets shall have their identification letters shown on engraved plastic plates as
shown on Standard Drawing E-0006STD.
2.6 GROUNDING AND BONDING
.1 Grounding and bonding products, whether or not indicated on the Contract documents,
shall be of sizes and ratings to comply with the NEC. Where types, sizes, ratings, and
quantities indicated are in excess of NEC requirements, the more stringent requirements
and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern.
.2 Grounding and bonding conductors shall be copper. Equipment ground conductors run
with circuit conductors and grounding electrode conductor shall be insulated with green
outer finish, unless noted otherwise on the Contract documents.
.3 Unless noted otherwise, all conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded, Class B
in accordance with ASTM B8.
.4 Uninsulated conductors shall be bare copper in accordance with ASTM B3, tinned in
accordance with ASTM B33, or alloy-coated in accordance with ASTM B189.
.5 Use tinned or alloy-coated in corrosive environments.
.6 Grounding connectors shall be listed and labeled for grounding application. Connectors
shall be high-conductivity, heavy-duty units.
.7 Compression Connectors: Shall comply with IEEE STD 837, ANSI/UL-467.
.8 Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit-form, and selected per manufacturers

written instructions.
.9 Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel with high-strength steel core and electrolytic-grade
copper outer sheath, molten welded to core. The minimum rod size shall be 3/4 inch by 10
feet long.
2.7 MOTOR CONTROLLERS (STARTERS)
.1 All controllers shall conform to the adopted standards and recommended practices of the
Industrial Control Standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association and the
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
.2 Each motor or group of motors requiring a single control shall be provided with a suitable
controller and devices which will perform the functions as specified for the respective
Project #2015-11
motors in other sections of these specifications.
.3 Each motor, except those whose impedance is sufficiently high to prevent over heating due
to failure to start, such as clock motors, shall be provided with overload protection, either
integral with the motor or controller, or mounted in a separate enclosure.
.4 Unless otherwise specified, protective devices shall be of the manual reset type. Manual
controllers for motors, larger than 1/4 horsepower, shall be specifically designed for the
purpose and shall have a horsepower rating adequate for the motor.
.5 Where overloads are supplied with controllers, these shall be sized after receipt of the
equipment to be protected in accordance with nameplate data.
.6 Overload protection for substituted multispeed motors shall be arranged to protect all
windings and shall be so designed that if an overload occurs in one winding, all windings
will be disconnected simultaneously.
.7 Starters shall be full voltage, non-reversing magnetic starters. Full protection is to be

provided in the starters by means of one thermal overload relay per phase per starter with
manual reset button to suit the service factor and acceleration time of the motor served.
.8 Starters shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts to satisfy interlocking and automatic
control requirements, Hand-Off-Automatic switches, pilot lights (green-On; red-Off),
thermal overloads, necessary fuses and control transformer (if required) for operation of all
controls on 120V single phase.
.9 Where required by applicable codes, starters shall be equipped with quick-make and
quick-break fused disconnects.
.1 Square D Co. Ltd.

.2 Allen-Bradley Canada Ltd.
.3 Westinghouse Canada Inc.
.11 Fuses in starters to be CSA certified Form 1, current and energy limiting type 200,000
ampere interrupting capacity with NEMA Class J rejection type mountings.
.12 Size fuses installed in starters or in disconnect switches used in conjunction with
magnetic starters, for motor and branch circuit protection in accordance with fuse
manufacturers recommendations. Provide one spare set of three fuses for each rating
and type of fuse used.
.13 Enclosures for loose starters are to be EEMAC 1A, unless otherwise specified.
2.8 PANEL BOARDS
.1 Panel boards shall be provided from the following approved manufacturers:
.1 Cutler-Hammer.
.2 GE.
Project #2015-11
.3 Siemens.
.4 Square D.
.2 Ampere interrupting capacity (AIC) as indicated on panel schedules. Series AIC ratings will
not be accepted.
.3 Main circuit breaker (MCB) or main lug only (MLO) as indicated on panel schedules; double
or dual main lugs or subfeed lugs are not acceptable.
.4 Panel boards shall be in a single enclosure; two section panels are not acceptable.
.5 Provide panelboards with size and number of single, double, or three-pole circuit breakers
as indicated on panel schedules.
.6 Arrange and number circuit breakers exactly as shown on drawings and panel schedules.
Single-branch mounted or subfeed breakers are not acceptable.
.7 Where the word space occurs on panel schedules, provide all necessary hardware in the
space, including connection straps, mounting brackets, and filler plates so that only the
addition of a future circuit breaker is required. Connection straps shall be rated a minimum
of 100A in panelboards of 400A rating or less and a minimum of 225A in panel boards
above 400A rating, unless otherwise noted on panel schedules.
.8 Provide Micarta buttons, small window-frame, or permanent strip type identification labels
on interior trim to identify circuit number. Do not use adhesive-backed fabric or paper
labels alone.
2.9 ENCLOSURES
.1 Shall be NEMA type enclosure as indicated on panel schedules.
.2 Provide flush or surface cover, as indicated on panel schedules.
.3 Front cover shall be factory manufactured, UL/NRTL listed, one-piece, hinged

door-in-door type with:
.1 Interior hinged door with hand-operated latch or latches as required to provide access
to circuit breaker operating handles only; not to energized parts.
.2 Outer hinged door to provide access to the entire enclosure including deadfront and all
wiring gutters.
.4 Outer door shall be securely mounted to the panelboard box with factory bolts, screws, clips
or other fasteners requiring a tool for entry; hand operated latches are not acceptable.
.5 Both inner and outer doors shall open left to right.
.6 Include one-piece, removable, inner deadfront cover, independent of the panelboard cover.
.7 Provide enclosure with the following side gutter dimensions:
Project #2015-11
.1 Left side minimum 4-1/2 measured from inside lip of the box to the installed deadfront.
.2 Right side; minimum 4-1/2 measured from inside lip of the box to the installed
deadfront. With the door-in-door cover in place; minimum 3-1/4 from installed outer
door hinge to the installed deadfront.
.8 Prepare, prime, and paint front trim cover with light gray enamel electro-deposited over
phosphatized steel, or baked-on polyester coating.
2.10 BUS
.1 Phase buses shall be hard-drawn 98 percent conductivity copper.
.2 Neutral Bus:
.1 Shall be hard-drawn 98 percent conductivity copper.

.2 Shall be 100% rated (current rating same as phase buses).
.3 Shall provide a screw terminal for each breaker position, in addition to the feeder
neutral lug.
.3 Grounding Bus:

.2 Shall be factory-installed, bonded to enclosure.
grounding conductor lug.
2.11 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
.1 Provide circuit breakers as integral components of panel board with indicated features,
ratings, characteristics, and settings.
.2 Each circuit breaker shall be bolted into position in the panel board, whether by direct bolted
connection to the bus or by being bolted to the panel board frame. Each circuit breaker
shall be replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. Plug-on circuit breakers held in place
only by spring force of the bus lug and the pressure of the deadfront are not acceptable.
.3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:
.1 Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, voltage, frequency, number of poles, and
short-circuit interrupting capacity rating as indicated on panel schedules.
.2 Tripping Device: Quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism with inverse-time delay
and instantaneous overcurrent trip protection for each pole.
.3 Multi-pole molded-case circuit breakers shall include common internal tripping of all
poles.
.4 Circuit breakers with handle-ties are not acceptable.
.5 Half-size circuit breakers with two circuits occupying a single position on the same
phase bus are not acceptable.
.6 Terminal Lugs: Provide load side of circuit breaker with front-connected UL-listed lugs
for copper cable at full frame rating. Provide terminals rated for minimum 75OC.
.7 All single-pole circuit breakers shall be switching duty rated.
Project #2015-11
.8 All multi-pole circuit breakers shall be HACR duty rated.

.9 Provide factory-installed circuit breaker handle padlocking devices on all multi-pole
circuit breakers.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
.1 No employer shall permit an employee to work in such proximity to any part of an electric
power circuit that the employee could contact the electric power circuit in the course of
work, unless the employee is protected against electric shock by de-energizing the circuit
and grounding it or by guarding it effectively by insulation or other means.
.2 Fabrication, erection and installation per National Electrical Installation Standards and the
complete electrical system shall be done in a first-class workmanlike manner by qualified
personnel experienced in such work.
.3 Conduit and equipment shall be level, plumb and true with the structure and other
equipment, and in a horizontal or vertical position as intended.
.4 The installation shall comply with all provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC) (NFPA
70). Immediately prior to acceptance, Contractor shall clean all electrical equipment, both
on the exterior and interior.
3.2 CONDUIT AND TUBING INSTALLATION
.1 Conduit systems that are 2 or larger, installed out doors and terminate on an exterior
enclosure that houses an over-current device (circuit breakers or fuses) shall enter through
the side or bottom.
.2 EMT shall utilize ULC-listed water-tight compression-type threadless fittings in outdoor

applications.
.3 EMT box connectors shall be securely fastened to all boxes and cabinets with one locknut.
.4 Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit in exterior, wet or damp locations, for connections to
wet-pipe mechanical systems or where specified on Drawings.
.5 All EMT, IMC, and rigid conduit couplings will be installed wrench tight; threads shall be
brushed clean to ensure good electrical contact.
.6 Exposed conduits shall be run parallel and perpendicular to the building surface of exposed
structural members and follow the surface contours as much as practical to present a neat
appearance. Exposed parallel or banked conduits shall be run together to provide neat
appearance.
.7 Bends and Offsets shall be avoided where possible, but when necessary, shall be made
with an approved hickey or conduit-bending machine. The use of pipe tee or vise for
bending conduit or tubing will not be permitted.
Project #2015-11
.8 Conduit or tubing which has been crushed, wrinkled, or deformed in any way shall not be
installed.
.9 Each conduit that is buried in or rigidly secured to the building construction on opposite
sides of a building expansion joint and each long run of exposed conduit that may be
subjected to excessive stresses shall be provided with an expansion fitting.
.10 Contractor shall exercise the necessary precautions to prevent the lodgment of dirt,
plaster, or trash in conduit, tubing, fittings, and boxes during the course of installation.
.11 Care shall be taken to ensure that raceways do not contain any type of debris. A run of
conduit or tubing, which has become clogged, shall be entirely freed of these
accumulations, or shall be replaced.
.12 All empty conduits shall have a conduit measuring tape cord (Greenlee #435) provided
with 2 feet of slack at each end, unless otherwise shown on plans.
3.3 SUPPORTS/ANCHORS
.1 Runs of conduit or tubing shall have supports spaced not more than 5 feet apart, unless
shown otherwise.
.2 Conduit and tubing shall be supported on approved types of galvanized wall brackets,
ceiling trapeze, strap hangers, or pipe straps, secured by means of toggle bolts on hollow
masonry units, expansion bolts in concrete or brick, machine screws on metal surface, and
wood screws on wood construction. Conduit and tubing shall not be hung from or attached
to hanger support wires used for suspended ceilings.
.3 Conduit and tubing risers, exposed in wire shafts, shall be supported at each floor level by
means of approved U-clamp hangers.
.4 All metal angles, channels, straps, and other similar pieces to be used to support electrical
apparatus shall have all corners ground smooth and all edges filed or ground smooth
before installation.
3.4 CONDUCTORS
.1 Power conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, and no splices shall be made
except within outlet or junction boxes. (Junction boxes shall be utilized where required).
.2 Requirements of the NEC (2002) Articles 374.6 and 390.6, for splicing in underfloor
raceways, shall be strictly followed. However, under no circumstances shall conductors be
"Looped" or "fed-through." Conductors shall be removed back to the nearest used tap.
NEC (2002) Articles 374.7 and 390.7 for abandoned outlets shall also be strictly followed.
.3 Conductor color coding as per Standard Drawing E-0006STD shall be limited to all new
installations unless otherwise specified on Drawings.
.4 Splices and Terminations
.1 For wiring below 600 volts, splices shall be made with insulated pressure type
Project #2015-11
connectors (wire nuts) except for conductors sized No. 8 and larger. No splices will be
allowed on any alarm, communication or facility control systems.
.2 All splicing connectors shall be furnished with an insulated cover that is equivalent to
the conductor insulation. (Taping alone will not be acceptable.) Split bolt connectors
will only be allowed where specific approval for each use is obtained prior to use from
the Owner.
.3 A connector aid compound shall be used at all splices to existing aluminum wire.
.4 Terminal lugs shall be used on all stranded conductors.
.5 Conductor Identification
.1 All conductors in panels shall be tagged, including neutral and ground conductors.
Install a Bradey slip on label on conductors sized less than # 6 AWG and install a
Panduit #MP-350C tag and tie wrap on conductors sized # 6 AWG or larger. Use a
Panduit marking pen PX-O or a Sharpie permanent marker for labels. These tags shall
list the circuit number.
.2 All conductors shall be additionally tagged in every box and cabinet, including device
or fixture (lighting) outlet, and light fixture compartment, with Brady slip on labels. Wrap
around stick on labels are allowed only where slip-on labels cannot be used. These
labels shall identify each conductor as to panel and circuit number or terminal numbers.
.3 Neutral and grounding conductors shall be similarly tagged as to all the circuits they
serve in each box and at the panelboard.
3.5 CABINETS
.1 Mount cabinets plumb and rigid without distortion of box.
.2 Arrange flush mounted cabinets so that the enclosure front surface is uniformly flush with
wall, and exterior door covers wall to enclosure mating surfaces.
.3 If not shown on drawings, stub a minimum of four one-inch (25mm) empty conduits from
cabinet into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in future.
.4 If not shown on Drawings, stub a minimum of four one-inch (25mm) empty conduits into
raised floor space, or below slab other than slabs-ongrade.
.5 All surface mounted cabinets located on finished walls within office and light laboratory
areas shall be furred from the floor to the ceiling to provide a chase for conduits. The
panels used for furring shall be removable by sheet metal screws or wood screw
attachment or a similar method.
.1 As a minimum, grounding and bonding shall comply with NFPA 70 (NEC), and as shown
on Drawings.
Project #2015-11
.1 Work shall be carefully laid out, in advance, and where cutting, channeling, chasing, or
drilling of floors, wall partitions, ceiling, or other surfaces is necessary for the proper
installation, support, or anchorage of the conduit, raceways, or other electrical work, the
affected areas shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved, at no additional
Contract cost.
3.8 INTERRUPTION OF ELECTRICAL UTILITIES
.1 Work to be performed during an interruption of electrical utilities will be preceded by all

possible preparation and will be carefully coordinated to minimize the duration of the
interruption and Work will proceed continuously until the system is restored to normal.
.2 Contractor shall not interrupt any main interior or exterior electrical utility without written
request for an outage and subsequent approval by the Board nor shall the Contractor
interrupt any branch circuit to an outlet or item of equipment without approval from the
Board
.3 Written request for outages shall be submitted prior to perform the work.
.4 Unless otherwise noted on Drawings, or directed, any tie-ins or connections to existing

utilities or equipment that necessitate interruptions of service shall be performed on a
Saturday or Sunday, without additional Contract costs.
3.9 TESTS/INSPECTIONS
.1 After the system installation is complete and at such time as directed by the Board.
Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval.
.2 Also, when requested, Contractor shall test any designated wire, cable devices, and
equipment after their installation, to assure that all of the material continues to possess all
the original characteristics, as required by all governing codes and standards listed in these
specifications.
.3 Provide an ESA inspection certificate for all new electrical work.
Project #2015-11
CHILLER REPLACEMENT INDEX
Morning Star Middle School Page 1
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15000 Table of Contents

15005 Demolition
15010 Mechanical General Conditions
15015 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB)
15190 Identification
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15241 Vibration Isolation

15260 Piping Insulation
HEAT TRANSFER
15602 Chemical Water Treatment

15676 Indoor Chiller
15702 HVAC Piping
15715 Hydronic Specialities
15720 HVAC Pumps
15850 Variable Frequency Drives
15885 Refrigerant Monitoring System
15900 Digital Controls
ELECTRICAL
16010 Electrical Basic Materials and Methods
END OF SECTION
Project #2015-09
CHILLER REPLACEMENT DEMOLITION
PART1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION
.1 Demolition work will include the complete removal of existing chiller and accessories,
respectively:
.1 Complete removal of the existing centrifugal chiller including disconnecting it from

power and controls, removal of all redundant wiring and switchgear, removal of
sections of chilled water and condenser piping as indicated on the drawings and as
required to allow for the installation of the new equipment, removal of redundant
controls and connections to utilities. Work includes disposal of the existing
refrigerant in accordance with current environmental by-laws.
.2 Complete removal of the main chilled water and condenser water pumps, including
wiring, disconnects and sections of piping as indicated on the drawings and as
required for the installation of the new equipment. Work includes the removal of the
existing inertia pads and supports.
.3 Complete removal of the chilled water chemical treatment (pot feeder, filtration
cartridge, associated piping).
.4 Removal of the cooling tower chemical treatment system (pumps, drums, plastic
piping, valves). Refer to the drawings for more details.
.5 Replacement of existing refrigerant sensor and wiring.
.6 All other work required for the removal of the old equipment and the installation of
the new one, such as coordination with the existing ductwork, conduits, piping,
structural elements and other building elements and services existing in the
mechanical room.
.2 Temporarily remove or relocate any section of piping, ductwork, stairs, handrails, light
fixtures, building structure, or other building services in order to remove the existing
chiller and install the new one. At the conclusion of the work, all temporarily
removed/relocated utilities shall be made good to their original condition or better.
.3 Do not re-use any BAS sensors. All sensors including wiring and conduits shall be new.
.4 All existing BAS components that are not designated to be reused, shall be removed.
Where applicable, remove all redundant pneumatic tubing and cap as close as possible
to the take-off fitting. Avoid contamination of the remainder of the pneumatic system
and maintain the rest of the pneumatic controls operational during the work.
.5 Drain the chilled water and condenser water piping system as necessary to perform the
work. At the conclusion of the project, re-fill the systems and provide chemical
treatment. Also refer to section 15602.
.6 All existing building services not affected by this work shall be maintained in operation
during and after the demolition work is complete. Any accidental interruption of existing
Project #2015-09
building services not required by this project will be promptly repaired at no additional
cost to the Board.
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS
.1 Work of this section shall be executed by trades personnel with experience in the
demolition field and capable to deploy adequate equipment as required to complete the
work in an efficient and orderly manner.
1.3 EXAMINATION
.1 Examine existing property. Determine the nature of materials to be removed.
1.4 SALVAGE
.1 The Board Representative will review the site prior to commencement of demolition and
instruct the Contractor, in writing, as to the items to be retained for re-use or be turned
over to the Board. In the absence of such specific instructions, materials from
demolition shall become property of Mechanical Contractor who shall promptly remove
all salvageable material and debris from site.
.2 Remove and store indicated items for future use by the Board. Remove, handle and
transport such items to storage area designated by the Board Representative. Perform
such work carefully and with diligence to prevent any damage to the items during
removal and in storage. Store material to be salvaged, neatly on wooden pallets, where
directed by the Board.
1.5 MAINTAINING TRAFFIC
.1 Maintain and preserve Board's access requirements within, to and from existing building
in areas where demolition and removal work is being carried out.
.2 Do not close, obstruct, place or store material in Board's driveways and passageways.
Conduct operations with minimum interference with roads, streets, driveways, user
traffic and passageways.
1.6 HAULING OPERATIONS
.1 Maintain roadways and paving in the hauling areas clean on a daily basis and as
required by Municipal Authorities.
1.7 INTERRUPTIONS TO BOARD'S OPERATIONS
.1 There will be absolutely no interruptions to the building schedule during demolition work.
Therefore, it is imperative that operations and machine and equipment movements,
deliveries and removals are executed at time or times that will permit uninterrupted
Board's operations in and around the building, including parking, receiving areas,
deliveries and site and access and egress.
.2 Where interruptions of domestic cold and hot water are necessary, coordinate with the
Project #2015-09
Board Representatives the timing and duration of such interruptions.
.3 Where interruptions of power supply are necessary, coordinate with the Board
Representatives the timing and duration of such interruptions.
1.8 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
.1 Coordinate posting of danger signs conspicuously around property. Close doorways

and thoroughfares giving access to area of demolition with barricades.
.2 Provide a competent, experienced supervisor in charge of the Work and on Site while
Work is in progress.
.3 Should any suspect designated substance not already identified, be encountered, cease
work in the immediate area and immediately report, to the Board. Board is responsible
for removal of designated substances.
1.9 PROTECTION
.1 Prevent movement, settlement or damage of adjacent structures, services, walks,

paving, parts of existing building to remain. Make good any collateral damage caused
by demolition.
.2 Take precautions to support affected structures and, if safety of building being

demolished or adjacent structures or services appears to be endangered, cease
operations and notify Board.
.3 Prevent debris from blocking drainage systems (floor drains) or other mechanical and
electrical systems that must remain in operation.
.4 Protect building floors against damage from demolition work. Use plywood covers
over floor where lifting, moving, rolling of removed equipment is anticipated. Be
responsible for repairing any damage to flooring caused by the work defined in this
section. Execute repairs to the satisfaction of the Board at no cost to the Board.
PART2 - Products
Not applicable
PART3 - Execution
3.1 DEMOLITION
.1 At the end of each days work, leave site in a safe condition and erect safety barriers
and lights as required. Ensure that no parts of the existing building are in danger of
collapsing.
.2 Review the requirements of new equipment to be installed. Perform all demolition work
required to allow for the new equipment to be installed, wether shown on the drawings
or not.
Project #2015-09
.3 Control dust and dirt produced during demolition.
.4 Provide any additional labour, materials and services not specifically indicated on the
drawings but required to complete the work.
.5 Dispose of demolished materials in accordance with the requirements of Authorities

Having Jurisdiction.
.6 At the end of demolition work, leave site in broom-clean condition. Clean existing
surfaces specified to receive new applied finishes to ensure proper adherence.
.7 Do not disturb adjacent structures or equipment designated to remain in place.
.8 Confine operations and workers to those parts of the building which are defined on the
drawings and exercise great care not to damage existing construction beyond that
necessary for the carrying out of new work. Make good any such damage in every
respect, to the satisfaction of the Board.
Project #2015-09
CHILLER REPLACEMENT MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
Part 1 - General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification is an integral part of the Contract Documents and shall
be read accordingly.
1.2 DUTIES OF MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR
.1 The mechanical contractor shall assume the responsibilities and duties of a general
contractor including but not limited to the ones described below:
.2 Superintendence
.1 Provide full time on-site superintendent personnel and supporting staff with proven
experience in project of similar value and complexity.
.2 Site superintendent shall have over-all authority to speak for and represent the
mechanical contractor.
.3 Coordination
.1 Coordinate the work with all the sub-trades involved to ensure that the work will be
carried out on schedule and in proper sequence.
.2 Take complete responsibility for all remedial work that results from failure to
coordinate any aspect of the mechanical work prior to its fabrication and/or
installation.
.3 Take responsibility for the delivery of equipment necessary to complete the work in
accordance with the approved schedule.
.4 Staffing and Scheduling
.1 Within seven days after the award of the contract, the Mechanical Contractor shall
provide to the Board representative the following information:
1 Appointment of official representatives in the project.

2 Schedule of work.
3 Delivery schedule for specified equipment.
4 Requirements for temporary facilities, site signs, storage, etc.
.5 Work Completion Meeting
.1 Prior to application for Substantial Performance of the Work, the mechanical

contractor shall participate in the take-over meeting. Agenda to include the
following:
1 Review of outstanding deficiencies.

2 Submission of maintenance manuals, warranties and as-built drawings.
3 Results of performance tests and described further in this section.
Project #2015-09
4 Scheduling of training to Boards personnel.
1.3 INTENT
.1 Bidders for this work shall include for all labor, material, equipment and all other related
cost including all applicable taxes (except HST) and fees to provide the full chiller plant
and ancillary equipment replacement as indicated on the drawing and specified herein
.2 The scope of work includes, but is not limited to:.
.1 Demolition work as indicated in section 15005.
.2 Installation of new chiller c/w with power and controls.
.3 Installation of new chilled water and condenser pumps and connections to existing
piping and new equipment. Replace sections of existing pipes as required for the
new installation and as shown on the drawings.
.4 Installation of new open loop and closed loop chemical water treatment systems.
.5 Provide power supply for all new equipment where specified herein and noted on
the drawings.
.6 Connection of all new equipment to existing school BAS system. Provide new wiring
and devices as required. Update the graphical interface to reflect the new
equipment and sequence.
.7 Replacement of the existing refrigerant sensor; new sensor to match new

refrigerant. Test the refrigerant monitoring system at the completion of the project
and provide certification.
.8 Measure the exhaust air flow of the existing refrigerant evacuation fan at the start
of the project. Submit results to the consultant prior to continuing the work. Allow
for replacing pulleys/sheaves/belts on the existing fan in order to match the air flow
requirements based on the new refrigerant content of the chiller.
.9 Refill the system and provide chemical treatment as noted in the specifications.
.10 All concrete and metal work, all cutting and patching required to complete the
work.
.11 All electrical work required to power the new equipment, as specified herein
and indicated on the drawings.
.3 Misinterpretation of any requirement of the drawings and specifications will not relieve
the Mechanical Contractor of responsibility. If in any doubt, the Mechanical Contractor
shall contact PDSB for written clarification prior to submitting a bid for the Work.
1.4 INTERFERENCES
.1 The mechanical drawings do not show all the architectural and structural details, and
Project #2015-09
any information involving accurate measuring of the building shall be taken from the
building. Make without additional change, any necessary changes or additions to the
runs of drains, pipes, ducts, etc., to accommodate the site conditions. The location of
equipment may be altered without charge providing the change is made before
installation and does not necessitate major additional material.
.2 Wherever differences occur between specifications, riser diagrams or schematics and

drawings, the maximum conditions shall govern and the bid shall be based on
whichever information indicates the greater cost.
.3 Field verifications of dimensions on plans shall be made since actual locations,

distances, and levels will be governed by actual field conditions.
.4 Discrepancies between different plans, or between plans and actual field conditions, or
between plans and specifications shall promptly be brought to the attention of the
Consultant for a decision.
.5 Install all mechanical services including but not exclusive to pipes, and equipment, to
conserve headroom and interfere as little as possible with the free use of the space
through which they pass.
.6 Before commencing work, check and verify all grade and invert elevations, stacks,
levels, and dimensions, to ensure proper and correct installation of the work.
.7 In addition to the work specifically mentioned in the Specifications and shown on the
drawings, provide all other items that are obviously necessary to make a complete
working installation, including those required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction over
the work.
1.5 EXAMINE SITE
.1 Prior to submitting the tender price, examine the site and the local conditions affecting
the work. Examine carefully all drawings and the complete specifications to ensure that
the work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown. No allowance will be made later for
any expenses incurred through the failure to make these examinations or to report any
such discrepancies in writing to the PDSB.
1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR'S SHOP
.1 Provide Job site office, work-shop, tools, scaffolds, material storage, etc., as required
to complete the work.
1.7 CLEANING
.1 During the performance of the work and on the completion, remove from the place of
the work all debris, rubbish and waste materials caused by the performance of the work.
Remove all tools and surplus materials after completion and acceptance of the work.
.2 All equipment shall be thoroughly vacuumed out at the time of final acceptance of the
work.
Project #2015-09
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1 Protection of Equipment:
.1 Equipment and material placed on the job site shall remain in the custody of the
Contractor until phased acceptance, whether or not the Board has reimbursed the
Contractor for the equipment and material. The Contractor is solely responsible for
the protection of such equipment and material against any damage.
.2 Place damaged equipment in first class, new operating condition; or, replace same
as determined and directed by the Consultant. Such repair or replacement shall be
at no additional cost to the Board.
.3 Protect interiors of new equipment and piping systems against entry of foreign
matter. Clean both inside and outside before painting or placing equipment in
operation.
.4 Existing equipment and piping being worked on by the Contractor shall be under the
custody and responsibility of the Contractor and shall be protected as required for
new work.
.2 Cleanliness of Piping and Equipment Systems:
.1 Exercise care in storage and handling of equipment and piping material to be

incorporated in the work. Remove debris arising from cutting, threading and welding
of piping.
.2 Piping systems shall be flushed, blown or pigged as necessary to deliver clean

systems.
.3 Clean interior of all tanks prior to delivery for beneficial use by the Board.
.4 Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs, damage, and delay arising from
failure to provide clean systems.
1.9 INSTALLATION OF WORK
.1 Be responsible for:
.1 The layout of the work shown on the drawings and specified herein, and for any
damage caused to the Board by improper location or carrying out of this work.
.2 The prompt installation of the work in advance of concrete pouring or similar work.
.3 The condition of all material and equipment supplied and for the protection and
maintenance of work completed.
.2 Coordinate with other trades and schedule all work to suit the date for the substantial
performance established in the construction contract.
.3 Furnish items to be "built-up" in ample time and give necessary information and
Project #2015-09
assistance in connection with the building in of the same.
.4 Proceed with the work as quickly as practical so that construction may be completed
in as short a time as possible and in accordance with the building schedule.
.5 Ensure that all equipment and material is ordered in time to meet the building schedule.
Provide a schedule of equipment deliveries to the Board within the time limit stipulated.
.6 Furnish promptly information required for the construction schedule.
.7 Manufactured products supplied with instructions for their installation shall be installed
in strict accordance with those instructions.
1.10 CODES, PERMITS, FEES AND CONNECTIONS
.1 Conform to Federal, Provincial and Municipal regulations and perform work in

accordance with requirements of By-Laws and Regulations in force in area where the
work will take place.
.2 Apply for, obtain, and pay for all permits, fees and service connections for the work and
the inspections required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction ( including TSSA where
applicable), in the area where the work will take place.
.3 For information, a specific code or standard might be mentioned. This information must
not be taken as the only code or standard applicable.
.4 When part of equipment does not bear the required CSA label, the contractor shall
obtain from CSA or Hydro Electric Power Commission, when that part of the equipment
is an electric component, a special approval and pay the applicable fees.
.5 Furnish necessary certificates as evidence that the work installed conforms with laws
and regulations of Authorities having jurisdiction. Changes in work requested by an
Authority Having Jurisdiction shall be carried out without charge.
1.11 MATERIALS
.1 Where materials, equipment, apparatus, or other products are specified by the

manufacturer, brand name, type or catalogue number, such designation is to establish
standards of desired quality style or dimensions and shall be the basis of the Bid.
Materials so specified shall be furnished under this Contract. Where two or more
designations are listed, the contractor shall choose one of those listed and state the
choice made on the Bid Form or Supplementary Tender Form (where applicable)
1.12 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS
.1 After execution of the Contract, requests for substitution of materials of makes other
than those specifically named in the Contract Documents may be reviewed and
approved by the Consultant, subject to Boards review and acceptance of the financial
credits involved.
.2 In the absence of such express approval by the Consultant, the Mechanical Contractor
Project #2015-09
will be held to furnish specified items under the base bid.
1.13 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
.1 Within two weeks of the award of contract, submit to the Consultant detailed dimension
shop drawings and installation wiring diagrams for all mechanical and electrical
equipment. Further details and special requirements called for in these specifications
shall be shown on the shop drawings.
.2 Submit to the Consultant detailed dimensioned shop drawings for the construction and
reinforcement of the new concrete piers and steel beams supporting the cooling tower.
Indicate all sizes, footing depth, reinforcement details, concrete strength, welding details
and calculations as necessary. Structural support shop drawings for the cooling tower
to be sealed and stamped by a licensed Structural Engineer,
.3 Ensure that copies of all reviewed shop drawings are available on the job site for
reference.
.4 Provide samples of mechanical equipment as requested in the specification at the same

time as the shop drawing submission.
1.14 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
.1 Maintain up to date as built drawings on site and submit to Consultant for review in
an electronic format at completion of the project as specified in this section.
.2 The as-built drawings shall be submitted in electronic format (AutoCad 2004 or

higher). For the purpose of producing the as-built drawings, the Consultant shall
provide the Contractor a set of tender documentation files, to be used as backgrounds.
.3 Any subsequent changes found by the Consultant shall remain the responsibility of the
Contractor at no charge to the Board.
.4 Contractor shall include As-Builts as part of the close-out documents package. As-
Builts shall be provided in CAD and .PDF formats.
1.15 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USAGE
.1 After any part of the work has been completed, the Consultant will make an inspection,
and performance tests of such parts shall be carried out under the direction of the
Consultant. If deficiencies are found, they shall be immediately rectified to the
satisfaction of the Consultant. After such deficiencies have been rectified, the work shall
be placed in service at such time and in such order as the Consultant may direct. If, in
placing a portion of the equipment in service, it is necessary to make temporary
connections in the wiring in order to obtain proper operation, such connections shall be
provided to the extent and in the manner required by the Consultant.
.2 Temporary or trial usage of any mechanical devices, machinery, apparatus, equipment

or materials shall not be construed as evidence of the acceptance of same.
.3 No claims for damage will be considered for injury to, or the breaking of any parts of
Project #2015-09
such work which may be used.
1.16 CONSULTANT'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1 During construction the Consultant will issue such instructions as may be necessary for
verification and correction of the work. These instructions shall be binding as part of the
specification.
1.17 ADDITIONAL WORK AND CHANGES
.1 Unless a written order, reviewed by the Consultant and countersigned or otherwise

approved by the Board Representative, no additional work shall be undertaken by the
Contractor.
1.18 WARRANTY
.1 The Mechanical Contractor shall guarantee all work and apparatus installed under his
contract against all defects of workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year
after the Substantial Performance of the Work , unless otherwise mentioned in the
Specifications, and shall make good any and all defects developing during such time
without expense to the Board. Any materials shall be further guaranteed as may be
called for in these specifications. Where warranties on equipment extend beyond one
(1) year the Mechanical Contractor shall honor the extended warranty.
1.19 ITEMIZED PRICES
.1 Provide itemized prices for the items listed herein. Show itemized prices separately on
the Tender Form and DO include them in the overall price. The itemized prices shall
include for all labor and material required to complete the work.
.2 Provide itemized prices for the following work:
.1 Reserved.
1.20 SEPARATE PRICE
.1 Provide separate prices for the items listed as individual prices on the Supplementary
Tender Form and DO NOT include them in the overall price. The separate prices shall
include for all labor and material required to complete the work described under the
respective paragraphs in the Bid Form.
.2 Provide separate prices for the following work:
.1 Replacement of the existing refrigerant monitoring system with a new one, suitable
for R-410A (new chiller refrigerant). Separate price shall include the supply and
installation of the controller, sensor and tie in to the existing power supply and
controls, and the purge exhaust fan. Standard of Acceptance: QEL, MSA Chillguard
L series, Vulcain.
.2 For additional details, refer to section 15885
Project #2015-09
1.21 SCHEDULING OF WORK
.1 For all work to be performed under this contract, adhere to Construction Schedule
agreed upon with the Board Representative.
1.22 ENERGY CONSUMPTION
.1 The Consultant may reject equipment submitted for approval on basis of performance
or energy consumed or demanded.
.2 All equipment installed on the project shall conform to the requirements outlined in
ASHRAE 90.1.
1.23 ELECTRIC MOTORS
.1 Provide motors for mechanical equipment as specified.
.2 If delivery of specified motor will delay delivery or installation of any equipment, install
an acceptable motor for temporary use. Final acceptance of equipment will not occur
until specified motor is installed.
.3 All motors shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with CSA requirements.
.4 Motor speed shall be 1750 rpm unless otherwise specified.
.5 All motors shall be "T" frame CEMA Standard Design "B" with Class "B" insulation, 40C
ambient, standard drip-proof with a 1.15 service factor, or as otherwise specified.
Motors in air stream or exposed shall be TEFC type.
.6 Motors shall be of adequate size to operate associated equipment and drive

mechanisms under all conditions of load and service and to bring equipment up to
operating speed within 13 seconds without overloading, and be not less than the
nameplate HP specified or indicated on the Drawings.
.7 Integral HP motor sizes HP and above shall be squirrel cage induction motors rated
575 volt or 208/230volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz, unless noted otherwise.
.8 Fractional HP motors up to but not including HP shall be rated 120 volt, single phase,
60 hertz and will be capacitor start, induction motors, with adequate thrust capacity
when used with direct mounted equipment, and shall be provided with integral overload
and overheating protection. Shaded pole starting devices will not be accepted.
.9 Multi-speed motors and associated switching devices shall be circuited to protect the
motor at each speed.
.10 All motors, 1 HP and up shall comply with the Ontario Hydro EnerMark Motor
Efficiency Level as tested either CSA 390 M 1985, or IEEE 112B, and be approved
under the Canadian Electrical Safety Code.
Project #2015-09
.11 All starter panels shall be lockable and supplied with locks.
.12 Special Requirements:
.1 Where motor power requirements of equipment furnished deviate from power

shown on plans, provide electrical service designed under the requirements of
NFPA 70 without additional time or cost to the Owner.
.2 Assemblies of motors, starters, controls and interlocks on factory assembled and

wired devices shall be in accordance with the requirements of this specification.
.13 Wire and cable materials specified in the electrical division of the specifications shall
be modified as follows:
.1 Wiring material located where temperatures can exceed 71 degrees C (160 degrees
F) shall be stranded copper with Teflon FEP insulation with jacket. This includes
wiring on the boilers.
.2 Other wiring at boilers and to control panels shall be NFPA 70 designation THWN.
.3 Provide shielded conductors or wiring in separate conduits for all instrumentation

and control systems where recommended by manufacturer of equipment.
.14 Select motor sizes so that the motors do not operate into the service factor at
maximum required loads on the driven equipment. Motors on pumps shall be sized
for non-overloading at all points on the pump performance curves.
.15 Motors utilized with variable frequency drives shall be rated inverter-ready per
NEMA Standard, MG1, Part 31.4.4.2. Provide motor shaft grounding apparatus that
will protect bearings from damage from stray currents.
.16 Insulation Resistance: Not less than one half meg-ohm between stator conductors
and frame, to be determined at the time of final inspection
1.24 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS AND INSTALLATION
.1 Permit equipment maintenance and disassembly by use of unions or flanges to

minimize disturbance to connecting piping and duct systems and without interference
from building structure or other equipment.
.2 Provide accessible means for lubricating equipment including permanent lubricated

bearings.
.3 For all base mounted, chillers, pumps, provide chamfered edge housekeeping pads a
minimum of 4" high and 4" larger than equipment dimensions all around. Work shall be
performed by the trades specializing in this work.
.4 Pipe drain lines, overflows and safety relief vents to drains. If the horizontal drains
present a tripping hazard, use aluminum checkered plate covers.
.5 Line-up equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items with building walls wherever
Project #2015-09
possible.
1.25 DRIVE GUARDS
.1 For machinery and equipment, provide guards as shown in AMCA 410 for belts, chains,
couplings, pulleys, sheaves, shafts, gears and other moving parts regardless of height
above the floor to prevent damage to equipment and injury to personnel. Drive guards
may be excluded where motors and drives are inside factory fabricated air handling unit
casings.
.2 Pump shafts and couplings shall be fully guarded by a sheet steel guard, covering
coupling and shaft but not bearings. Material shall be minimum 16-gage sheet steel;
ends shall be braked and drilled and attached to pump base with minimum of four 6 mm
(1/4-inch) bolts. Reinforce guard as necessary to prevent side play forcing guard onto
couplings.
.3 V-belt and sheave assemblies shall be totally enclosed, firmly mounted, non-resonant.
Guard shall be an assembly of minimum 22-gage sheet steel and expanded or
perforated metal to permit observation of belts. 25 mm (one-inch) diameter hole shall
be provided at each shaft centerline to permit speed measurement.
.4 Materials: Sheet steel, cast iron, expanded metal or wire mesh rigidly secured so as to
be removable without disassembling pipe, duct, or electrical connections to equipment.
.5 Access for Speed Measurement: 25 mm (One inch) diameter hole at each shaft center.
1.26 LIFTING ATTACHMENTS
.1 Provide equipment with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in

its normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that
might be encountered, without bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering
and braking of load.
1.27 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES
.1 General:
.1 Locate direct reading thermometers and gauges for reading from floor or platform.
.2 Provide remote reading thermometers and gauges where direct reading instruments
cannot be satisfactorily located.
.3 Locate engraved lamacoid nameplate as specified in Section Identification,

identifying medium adjacent to thermometers and gauges.
.2 Thermometers:
.1 Industrial, 9" adjustable angle cast aluminum case, CGSB standard CAN/CGSB-
14.4-M88 red reading mercury, lens front tube, white scale black embossed figures,
clear glass or acrylic window, tapered aluminum stem.
Project #2015-09
.2 Scale shall be suitable for 2 times the temperature range of service. Scale shall be
combined Celsius and Fahrenheit.
.3 Pressure Gauges:
.1 5" dial, solid front blow out back, fibreglass reinforced polypropylene case, phosphor
bronze bourdon tube and brass 1/4" N.P.T. socket, bottom connection, stainless
steel rotary type movement, gauge to be registered with the Provincial Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Safety Branch with a registration number and conform to ANSI
B40.1. Accuracy to be grade "A".
.2 On pumps liquid filled gauges shall be utilized.
.4 Provide bronze stop cock, bronze bar stock 1/4" N.P.T. bronze porous core
pressure snubber for pulsating operation and diaphragm for corrosive service.
.5 Use materials compatible with system requirements.
.6 Gauges shall have combined kilopascal and psi scales.
1.28 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS (INDOOR)
.1 General
.1 Pipe Supports: Comply with MSS SP 58. Type Numbers specified refer to this
standard. For selection and application comply with MSS SP 69.
.2 Attachment to Concrete Building Construction:
.1 Concrete insert: MSS SP-58, Type 18.
.2 Self drilling expansion shields and machine bolt expansion anchors: Permitted in
concrete not less than 102 mm (four inches) thick when approved by the Consultant
for each job condition.
.3 Power driven fasteners: Permitted in existing concrete or masonry not less than 102
mm (four inches) thick when approved by the Resident Engineer for each job
condition.
.3 Attachment to Steel Building Construction:
.1 Welded attachment: MSS SP 58, Type 22.
.2 Beam clamps: MSS SP-58, Types 20, 21, 28 or 29. Type 23 C clamp may be used
for individual copper tubing up to 23mm (7/8 inch) outside diameter.
.4 Attachment to Metal Pan or Deck:
Project #2015-09
.1 As required for materials specified Steel Decking section of the specification.
.5 Hanger Rods
.1 Hot rolled steel, ASTM A36 or A575 for allowable load listed in MSS SP 58. For
piping, provide adjustment means for controlling level or slope. Types 13 or 15 turn
buckles shall provide 38 mm (1 1/2 inches) minimum of adjustment and incorporate
locknuts. All thread rods are acceptable.
.6 Hangers Supporting Multiple Pipes (Trapeze Hangers):
.1 Galvanized, cold formed, lipped steel channel horizontal member, not less than 41
mm by 41 mm (1 5/8 inches by 1 5/8 inches), 2.7 mm (No. 12 gage), designed to
accept special spring held, hardened steel nuts. Not permitted for steam supply and
condensate piping.
.2 Allowable hanger load: Manufacturers rating less 91kg (200 pounds).
.3 Guide individual pipes on the horizontal member of every other trapeze hanger with
6 mm (1/4 inch) U bolt fabricated from steel rod. Provide Type 40 insulation shield,
secured by two 13mm (1/2 inch) galvanized steel bands, or preinsulated calcium
silicate shield for insulated piping at each hanger.
.7 Supports for Piping Systems:
.1 Select hangers sized to encircle insulation on insulated piping.To protect insulation,

provide Type 39 saddles for roller type supports or preinsulated calcium silicate
shields. Provide Type 40 insulation shield or preinsulated calcium silicate shield at
all other types of supports and hangers including those for preinsulated piping.
.8 Piping Systems (MSS SP 58):
.1 Standard clevis hanger: Type 1; provide locknut.

.2 Riser clamps: Type 8.
.3 Wall brackets: Types 31, 32 or 33.
.4 Roller supports: Type 41, 43, 44 and 46.
.5 Saddle support: Type 36, 37 or 38.
.6 Turnbuckle: Types 13 or 15. Preinsulate.
.7 U bolt clamp: Type 24.
.8 Copper Tube:
1 Hangers, clamps and other support material in contact with tubing shall be
painted with copper colored epoxy paint, plastic coated or taped with non
adhesive isolation tape to prevent electrolysis.
2 For vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps.
3 For supporting tube to strut: Provide epoxy painted pipe straps for copper tube
or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps.
.9 Insulated Lines:
Project #2015-09
1 Provide pre-insulated calcium silicate shields sized for copper tube.
.10 Supports for plastic or glass piping: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer
with black rubber tape extending one inch beyond steel support or clamp.
.9 Piping with Vertical Expansion and Contraction:
.1 Movement up to 20 mm (3/4 inch): Type 51 or 52 variable spring unit with integral

turn buckle and load indicator.
.2 Movement more than 20 mm (3/4 inch): Type 54 or 55 constant support unit with
integral adjusting nut, turn buckle and travel position indicator.
1.29 PIPE PENETRATIONS
.1 Install sleeves during construction for other than blocked out floor openings for risers
in mechanical rooms.
.2 Penetrations are not allowed through beams or ribs, but may be installed in concrete
beam flanges. Any deviation from these requirements must receive prior approval of
Consultant.
.3 Sheet Metal: Provide for pipe passing through floors, interior walls, and partitions,
unless brass or steel pipe sleeves are specifically called for below.
.4 Cast Iron or Zinc Coated Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through exterior walls
below grade. Make space between sleeve and pipe watertight with a modular or link
rubber seal. Seal shall be applied at both ends of sleeve.
.5 Galvanized Steel or an alternate Black Iron Pipe with asphalt coating Sleeves: Provide
for pipe passing through concrete beam flanges, except where brass pipe sleeves are
called for. Provide sleeve for pipe passing through floor of mechanical rooms. Except
in mechanical rooms, connect sleeve with floor plate.
.6 Sleeve Clearance: Sleeve through floors, walls, partitions, and beam flanges shall be
one inch greater in diameter than external diameter of pipe. Sleeve for pipe with
insulation shall be large enough to accommodate the insulation. Interior openings shall
be caulked tight with fire stopping material and sealant to prevent the spread of fire,
smoke, and gases.
1.30 PAINTING
.1 General
.1 Paint the entire length of condenser water piping, fittings, outdoor supports and
accessories. .
.2 Materials
Project #2015-09
.1 Steel piping and support priming: Marine Alkyd Metal primer: MPI 79.
.2 Steel piping and supports finish: Two coats of MPI 8 (Exterior Alkyd, Flat).
.3 Unpainted or otherwise not finished metal surfaces, except aluminum, of cooling
towers exposed to view, including connected pipes, rails, and ladders: Two coats
of MPI 8 (Exterior Alkyd, Flat).
.4 Copper piping priming (outdoors): MPI 95 (Fast Drying Metal Primer).
.5 Finish color: to be selected by Consultant at shop drawing stage
.3 Atmospheric and Surface Conditions:
.1 Do not apply coating when air or substrate conditions are:
1 Less than 3 degrees C (5 degrees F) above dew point.

2 Below 10 degrees C (50 degrees F) or over 35 degrees C (95 degrees F),
unless specifically pre-approved by the Project Supervisor and the product
manufacturer. Under no circumstances shall application conditions exceed
manufacturer recommendations.
3 Maintain interior temperatures until paint dries hard.
4 Do no exterior painting when it is windy and dusty.
5 Do not paint in direct sunlight or on surfaces that the sun will soon warm.
6 Apply only on clean, dry and frost free surfaces
.4 Pre-Painting preparation:
.1 Remove pre finished items not to be painted such as lighting fixtures, escutcheon
plates, hardware, trim, and similar items for reinstallation after paint is dried.
.2 Remove items for reinstallation and complete painting of such items and adjacent
areas when item or adjacent surface is not accessible or finish is different.
.3 See other sections of specifications for specified surface conditions and prime coat.
.4 Clean surfaces for painting with materials and methods compatible with substrate
and specified finish. Remove any residue remaining from cleaning agents used. Do
not use solvents, acid, or steam on concrete and masonry.
.5 Remove oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, flux and other detrimental
foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP 1 (Solvent Cleaning).
.6 Remove loose mill scale, rust, and paint, by hand or power tool cleaning, as defined
in SSPC-SP 2 (Hand Tool Cleaning) and SSPC-SP 3 (Power Tool Cleaning).
Exception: where high temperature aluminum paint is used, prepare surface in
accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions.
.5 Paint Application
.1 Unless otherwise specified, apply paint in three coats; prime, body, and finish.
When two coats applied to prime coat are the same, first coat applied over primer
is body coat and second coat is finish coat.
Project #2015-09
.2 Apply each coat evenly and cover substrate completely.
.3 Allow not less than 48 hours between application of succeeding coats, except as
allowed by manufacturer's printed instructions, and approved by the Project
Supervisor.
.4 Finish surfaces to show solid even color, free from runs, lumps, brushmarks, laps,
holidays, or other defects.
.5 Apply by brush, roller or spray, except as otherwise specified.
1.31 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
.1 Furnish, and turn over to the Board special tools not readily available commercially, that
are required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and machinery furnished.
.2 Grease Guns with Attachments for Applicable Fittings: One for each type of grease
required for each motor or other equipment.
.3 Tool Containers: Hardwood or metal, permanently identified for in tended service and
mounted, or located, where directed by the Owner
.4 Lubricants: A minimum of 0.95 L (one quart) of oil, and 0.45 kg (one pound) of grease,
of equipment manufacturer's recommended grade and type, in unopened containers
and properly identified as to use for each different application.
1.32 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
.1 Furnish spare parts as follows:
.1 One set of packing for each pump.

.2 One glass for each gauge glass installed.
.3 One set of v-belts/bolts for each piece of machinery.
1.33 DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS
.1 Provide wherever pipes of dissimilar metals are joined.
.2 Provide insulating unions for pipe sizes larger than 2" diam. and under; same for
flanges of pipe sizes over 2" diam.
.3 Cast brass adapters may be used on domestic water systems and where approved by
the Consultant.
.4 Provide rubber gaskets to prevent dissimilar metals contact.
1.34 INSTRUCTION OF OPERATING STAFF
.1 Supply certified personnel to instruct Board operating staff on operation of new

mechanical equipment. Supply maintenance specialist personnel to instruct operating
Project #2015-09
staff on maintenance and adjustment of mechanical equipment and any changes or

modification in equipment made under terms of guarantee.
.2 Provide min. 8 hrs of instruction time during regular work hours prior to acceptance and
turn-over to operating staff for regular operation.
.3 Use operation and maintenance data manual for instruction purposes. On completion
of instruction, turn manuals over to the Consultant.
.4 Scheduling of the timing for the training of the operating staff shall be arranged 10 days
prior to the completion of the project.
.5 For training on controls, refer to section 15900
1.35 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
.1 Provide minimum of four (4) digital only on CD/DVD copies of Mechanical

Maintenance Manuals, in accordance to the following:
.1 Mechanical Maintenance Manuals to be delivered to the Consultants office 10 days

prior to the substantial completion of the Contract.
.2 Manuals to be labeled: "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS".
.3 The Maintenance Manuals shall be divided into sections with neatly labeled and tabbed
dividers between each section. The sections to be included in the manual are:
.1 Section I - General.
.2 Section II - Piping and Pump Systems, and Accessories.
.3 Section III - Chiller, chemical treatment equipment
.4 Section IV - Automatic Controls
.5 Section V - Water Balancing
.4 The following information shall be contained within the sections:
.1 SECTION I: A list giving name, address and telephone number of the Consultant,
Engineers, General Contractor, Mechanical Trade and Controls Trade. Written
guarantees for the Mechanical Systems. A copy of the Valve directory giving
number, valve location, normal valve position, and purpose of valve ( a framed copy
of Valve Directory to be hung in Chiller Room). Equipment lists and certificates
shall be provided - certificates shall be signed and sealed by the appropriate
suppliers.
.2 SECTION II, III: A copy of all pressure tests and operational tests. Inspection
reports such as ESA. A list giving name, address and telephone number of all
suppliers. Details of chemical treatment equipment and substances. A copy of all
reviewed Shop Drawings for all mechanical equipment and ancillary devices (chiller,
pumps, valves, strainers, plumbing, etc). Copies of warranties.
.3 SECTION IV: Complete Control Diagrams, Wiring Diagrams and description of

Control system and the functioning sequence of the system. Controls
Project #2015-09
commissioning report, as buits. Also refer to section 15900.
.4 SECTION V: For balancing reports and formats, refer to section 15015 of these
specifications.
1.36 CONCRETE
.1 All concrete work required to complete this project, wether shown on the drawings or
not, shall be the Contractors responsibility.
.2 Refer to this specification section for requirements for housekeeping pad.
1.37 METALS
.1 All steel construction required for the completion of this project, wether shown on the
drawings or not, shall be the Contractors responsibility.
1.38 CUTTING, PATCHING, ROOFING AND X-RAY
.1 All cutting, patching, roofing and X-Rays required for the completion of this project
wether shown on the drawings or not, shall be the Contractors responsibility. The
cutting and patching work shall be performed in accordance with the following:
.1 All cutting and patching shall be done by the trades specializing in the materials to
be cut.
.2 All flashing and equipment supports on the roof shall be done in strict accordance
with the Board standards by Board-approved roofing contractors only.
.2 Any cutting, roofing and/or repairing of finished surfaces be required, the Sub-trade
contractor for the Contractor shall employ the particular trades engaged on the site for
this type of work to do such cutting and/or repairing. Obtain the approval of the
Consultant before doing any cutting. In the event that tradesmen required for particular
cutting and/or repairing are not already on the site, bring to the site tradesmen to do this
work.
.3 Supporting members of any floor, wall or the building structure shall be cut only in such
a location and manner as approved by the Consultant.
.4 Where slabs in the portions of the building which are existing must be saw-cut or core
drilled, all locations shall be x-rayed prior to saw-cutting or core-drilling. All x-raying
shall be done by personnel qualified in the use of the type of equipment required to x-
ray the saw-cuts shall be permitted to perform this work on the site. No allowance will
be made later for expenses incurred through the failure of performing these x-rays.
1.39 MECHANICAL PROJECT COMPLETION
.1 10 (ten) days prior to substantial performance of work obtain documentation and/or

prepare certification of the following items and submit them to the Board's
representative.
Project #2015-09
.1 All inspection certificates.

.2 Guarantee certificates as called for under "Warranty".
.3 Record drawings.
.4 Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
.5 Test certifications as called for under "Testing".
.6 Provide a signed statement to the effect that all tests for mechanical systems and
equipment have been completely carried out in the Trade Sections of these
Specifications and to the manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with
the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.
1.40 PERFORMANCE TESTS AND EQUIPMENT START-UP
.1 After all equipment has been installed, adjusted, balanced and started up, subject
equipment to a series of performance tests, as soon as conditions permit.
.2 The timing of the tests shall be arranged to suit the convenience of the Consultant, and
the manner and duration shall be as the Consultant deems necessary. Record the daily
start and stop times, operating hours and functions performed. Ensure that the
performance tests are witnessed by the Consultant.
.3 All major equipment including but not limited to chillers, cooling towers, chemical
treatment and pumps are to be inspected by the manufacturer to ensure that the
equipment has been installed in accordance with their recommendations.
.4 Operate equipment under varying load conditions, demonstrate start-up sequence,

normal shutdown, simulated emergency shutdown, operation of temperature, etc., and
safety controls. Operate switches and electrical devices for correct wiring sequences.
Adjust components to achieve a proper functional relationship among all the
components of all the systems. Repeat these functions as many times as deemed
necessary by the Consultant to achieve reliable operation.
.5 Repair defects and repeat tests as necessary. During test maintain lubrication schedule,
set, align and tension drives.
.6 At the successful completion of Performance Tests and all testing and balancing, make
the systems ready for final inspection and subsequent acceptance of the Board.
Replace and clean filters, flush out lines and equipment, remove and clean strainers,
fill liquid systems and purge air. Provide water treatment to pipes and report in
accordance to Section 15602. Disinfect all domestic water as required by current by-
laws and Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
.7 Conduct tests to demonstrate operation and ability to meet requirements of all

equipment and freedom from undue noise and vibration at the time of final inspection,
having ensured that it has previously been subjected to Performance Tests.
Project #2015-09
CHILLER REPLACEMENT TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB)
1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1 TAB: means to test, adjust and balance all systems, including equipment, to perform
in accordance with Contract Documents.
.2 Follow start-up procedures as recommended by manufacturer.
.3 Special start-up procedures may be specified elsewhere.
.4 The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all assistance required by the air balancing
contractor to complete the balancing contractors work. This shall include but not be
limited to:
.1 Provision of all required shop drawings and fan and pump curves.
.2 Provision of all required test ports
.5 TAB to apply to following systems, equipment and related controls (refer to values in
equipment schedules):
.1 All new pumps

.2 Chiller
.3 Cooling Tower
.6 Prior to commencing work, shop drawings shall be submitted showing equipment, proof
of calibration, testing methods to be used with each different style of diffuser and
measuring point, and forms and diagrams to be used for air balance.
1.2 ACCURACY
.1 Do TAB to within plus or minus 5% of design values.

.2 Measurements to be accurate to within plus or minus 5 % of actual values.
.2 Instrument calibration: In accordance with referenced standard, within 3 months of

commencement of TAB.
.1 Provide proof of calibration to Consultant.
1.3 REPORT
.1 Format to be in accordance with referenced standard listed above, but using

design drawing units.
.2 Produce "as-built" full system schematics. Use as-built drawings for reference.
Project #2015-09
CHILLER REPLACEMENT TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB)
.3 Submit 2 copies of preliminary TAB reports, each in "D" ring binders, complete with
index tabs for verification and approval of Consultant.
.4 Submit 3 copies of final TAB reports after approval by the Consultant.
.2 Completion: TAB to be considered complete only when final reports are approved by
Consultant.
1.4 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
.1 General: measurements as required by referenced standards, including, but not limited

to, following:
.1 Measurements:
.1 Flow.
.2 Pressure.
.3 Temperature.
.4 Specific gravity.
.5 RPM (where applicable).
.6 Electrical power: Voltage and Current draw (where applicable).
.2 Location of equipment measurements:
.1 Inlet and outlet of each:
C new chiller (condenser and evaporator),

C cooling tower
C new pump balancing valves
.3 Provide pump curves indicating operating point with superimposed power draw, rpm
and impellor size.
2 - PRODUCTS
NIL
3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
.1 The Contractor to provide the required assistance to the balancing contractor as

deemed necessary for the performance of TAB and as instructed by the Consultant.
Project #2015-09
CHILLER REPLACEMENT IDENTIFICATION
1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
the requirements outlined in Section 15010.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1 CGSB 24-GP-3a Identification and Classification of Piping Systems.
1.3 EQUIPMENT
.1 Manufacturer's nameplates:
.1 Provide metal nameplate on each piece of equipment, mechanically fastened with

raised or recessed letters.
.2 Provide Underwriters' Laboratories or CSA registration plates, as required by

respective agency.
.3 Manufacturers nameplate to indicate size, equipment model, manufacturer's name,

serial number, voltage, cycle, phase and power of motors.
.4 Locate nameplates so that they are easily read. Do not insulate or paint over plates.
.2 System nameplates:
.1 Provide laminated plastic plates with black face and white centre of minimum size
90 x 40 x 2.5 mm nominal thickness, engraved with 6 mm high lettering. Use 25
mm lettering for major equipment.
.2 Fasten nameplates securely in conspicuous place. Where nameplates can not be

mounted on cool surface, provide standoffs.
.3 Identify equipment type and number (eg Pump No. 2) and service or areas or zone
of building served eg "Perimeter Heating".
.4 Submit list of nameplates for review prior to engraving.
1.4 PIPING
.1 Identify medium in piping with markers showing name and service including
temperature, pressure and directional flow arrows in accordance with CGSB 24-GP-3a.
.2 Block capital letters 2" high for pipes of 3" nominal and larger including insulation and
not less than 3/4" high for smaller diameters.
.3 Direction arrows 6" long by 2" wide for piping of 3" nominal or larger including insulation
and 4" long by 3/4" wide for smaller diameters. Use double headed arrows where
Project #2015-09
CHILLER REPLACEMENT IDENTIFICATION
direction of flow is reversible.
.4 Waterproof and heat resistant plastic marker tags for pipes and tubing 3/4" nominal and
smaller.
.5 Black pipe marker letters and direction arrows, white on red background for fire
protection pipe markers.
.6 Standard of Acceptance: WH Brady identification tapes, bands, markers; Seton Name

Plate Corporation; Setmark pipe markers.
.7 Location:
.1 Locate markers and classifying colours on piping systems so they can be seen from
floor or platform.
.2 Piping runs at least once in each room.
.3 Maximum 45 ft between identifications in open areas.
.4 Both sides where piping passes through walls, partitions and floors.
.5 At point of entry and leaving, where piping is concealed in pipe chase or other
confined space, and at each access opening.
.6 At start and end points of runs and at each piece of equipment.
.7 At major manual and automatic valves immediately upstream of valves.
.8 Identify branch, equipment or area served after valve.
1.5 VALVES AND CONTROLLERS
.1 Provide brass tags with 12 mm stamped code lettering and numbers filled with black
paint, secured with non-ferrous chains or "S" hooks for valves and operating controllers
except at plumbing fixtures and radiation.
.2 Provide Consultant with three identification flow diagrams of approved size for each
system. Include tag schedule, designating number, service, function, and location of
each tagged item and normal operating position of valves.
.3 Install where directed one copy of flow diagram and valve schedule mounted in glazed
frame. Provide one copy in each operating and maintenance instruction manual.
.4 Consecutively number valves in systems.
Project #2015-09
CHILLER REPLACEMENT VIBRATION ISOLATION
1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.2 Provide separate shop drawings for each isolated system complete with performance
and product data.
.3 Submit type of isolator, size, height when uncompressed and maximum allowable static
deflection weight of all isolated equipment, loads on each isolator and static deflection
of each isolator under the specific design load.
.4 Submit marked up plans indicating all locations where pipes are to be isolated in
mechanical rooms and as specified.
2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 Vibration isolator sizes and layout shall be determined by the vibration isolator supplier.
.2 All mechanical equipment not specifically identified in this specification that contains
rotating or vibrating elements shall be installed on elastomeric pads as specified below.
.3 Elastomeric elements that will be exposed to temperatures below freezing shall be

fabricated from natural rubber instead of neoprene.
.4 All isolators to be installed outdoors or exposed to weather shall be hot dipped

galvanized and shall be furnished with neoprene mounting sleeves for hold-down bolts
to prevent any metal to metal contact.
.5 Standard of Acceptance (All vibration isolators): Kinetics Noise Control, Mason, Vibron,
Vibro-Acoustics.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC PADS
.1 Neoprene waffle or ribbed; 9mm minimum thick; 50 durometer; maximum loading 350
kPa. Mason type W
.2 Application: all pumps frames where resting on the concrete pads.
2.3 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS
.1 Flexible pipe connectors shall be used on all piping connected to rotating equipment
Project #2015-09
(chiller, pumps, cooling tower) to reduce the transmission of noise and vibration, and
to eliminate stresses in piping systems due to misalignment and thermal movement of
the piping.
.2 Indoors:
.1 Flexible connectors shall be of the single- or double-sphere molded joint

configuration and shall meet or exceed specifications of the Rubber Expansion Joint
Division, Fluid Sealing Association.
.2 Connectors shall be made of molded neoprene reinforced with nylon tire cord and
shall have mild steel floating flanges or female union ends.
.3 Control rods shall be used with unanchored systems or with spring-mounted

equipment where the pressures and movements exceed those the connectors are
designed to withstand.
.4 Applications: all piping connections to pumps and chillers
.3 Outdoors:
.1 Connectors shall be made of stainless steel flexible bellows with stainless steel
braided outer cover and shall have flanged carbon steel end fittings.
.2 Application: all piping connections to cooling towers
.4 Standard of acceptance: Kinetics model Kinflex
2.4 PIPE HANGERS
.1 Colour coded springs, rust resistant, painted box type hangers. Swivel arrangement to
permit hanger box or rod to move through a 30 deg. arc without metal to metal contact.
Unless specified otherwise, the static deflection shall be 9mm, with a strain not
exceeding 15%, and spring hangers to have minimum static deflection of 2". A
neoprene sleeve shall be provided where the lower hanger rod passes through the steel
hanger box such that the hanger rod cannot contact the steel hanger. The diameter of
the clear hole in the hanger box shall be at least 19mm larger than the diameter of the
hanger rod.
.2 Standard of acceptance: Kinetics model SRH
3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Provide vibration isolation for new equipment as noted in the specification and shown
on the drawings.
.2 Install vibration isolation equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions and

adjust mountings to level equipment.
Project #2015-09
.3 Ensure piping and electrical connections to isolated equipment do not reduce system
flexibility.
.4 Inlet and outlet piping serving the chiller shall be provided with flexible pipe connections.
.5 Suction and discharge serving each new pump shall be provided with flexible pipe
connections.
.6 Unless indicated otherwise, support all piping connected to the chiller with spring
equipped hangers as described in these specifications, as follows:
.1 first 3 points of support.
.2 First point of support shall have a static deflection of twice deflection of isolated
equipment, but not more than 2".
.7 Unless specified otherwise, all pump assemblies will be mounted on concrete pads and
supported by elastomeric isolators.
.8 Unless specified otherwise, the chiller will be supported by elastomeric isolators as per
manufacturer recommendation.
.9 The last 3 ft of wiring connections to the pumps, cooling towers and chillers shall be
made using wiring in flexible liquid tight jacket; maintain wiring size and current carrying
capacity.
.10 Provide suitable supports for all equipment which does not have a frame with
adequate rigidity.
.11 There shall be a minimum of 4" clearance between isolated equipment and the
walls, ceiling, floors, columns and any other equipment not installed on vibration
isolators.
.12 Piping, ductwork, conduit or mechanical equipment shall not be hung from or
supported on other equipment, pipes or ductwork installed on vibration isolators.
It shall be supported on or suspended from building structure.
Project #2015-09
CHILLER REPLACEMENT PIPING INSULATION
1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1 Fire resistance
.1 Meet NFPA 90A-2006. Maximum flame spread rating of 25 and maximum smoke
developed rating of 50 in accordance with NFPA 255-2006 and CAN4-S102-M83.
.2 Materials tested in accordance with ASTM C411-82 shall not flame, smoulder, glow
or smoke at temperature to which exposed in service.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.2 Submit for approval manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation,

fabrication for pipe, fittings, valves and jointing recommendations.
.3 Prior to ordering insulation materials submit a sample board demonstrating the cross
section of each type of insulation that will be utilized on the project for approval.
Submission to include insulating material, exterior jacket and adhesive for each type of
insulation. After review and acceptance the sample board shall be kept on site for the
duration of the project for reference purposes.
2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMED FIBROUS GLASS WITH VAPOUR BARRIER
.1 Application:
.1 Chilled water piping including pot feeder, filter and pot feeder piping, expansion tank
fittings, automatic air eliminator and all other associated piping accessories
connected to chilled water circulating cooling system
.2 All domestic cold water piping.
.2 Material:
.1 CGSB 51-GP-9M, rigid mineral fibre sleeving for piping and CGSB 51-GP-52M,
vapour barrier jacket.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Fiberglas 850, Manson, Knauf.
Project #2015-09
.3 Thickness:
.1 Domestic cold water: 1

.2 All chilled water: 1
2.2 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC -40 TO 95 DEG. C.
.1 Application: insulation system for valves and fittings temperature range -40 to 95
degrees Celsius on:
.1 Chilled water strainers

.2 Chilled water valves (including balancing and triple-duty valves)
.3 Chilled water pumps
.4 Chilled water header connections to chiller
.2 Material:
.1 CAN2-51.40-M80+Amdt-Aug-83, flexible elastomeric unicellular sheet and pipe

covering.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong Armaflex.
.3 Thickness:
2.3 FASTENINGS
.1 For piping insulation systems:
.1 Tape: self adhesive tape rated under 25 for flame spread and under 50 for smoke
development.
.2 Lap Seal Adhesive: quick-setting adhesive for joints and lap sealing of vapour
barriers. Flame spread 10 smoke development 0. Standard of Acceptance: Foster
85-75 Drion.
.3 Self adhesive tape rated under 25 for flame spread and under 50 for smoke
development plus aluminum straps 12 x 0.05 mm with locking clips.
.4 Lagging Adhesive: fire retardant coating approved by CFFM and authorities having
jurisdiction prior to application.
.2 For valves/fittings/pumps/strainers insulation system:
.1 Contact Adhesive: quick-setting adhesive for seams and joints of flexible unicellular
insulation. Flame spread 5, smoke development 0.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong 520 Adhesive.
Project #2015-09
2.4 JACKETS
.1 PVC
.1 PVC pre-moulded fittings that meet 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed
ratings may be applied in mechanical rooms as follows:
.1 1/12" thick minimum.

.2 Fitting covers, one piece, pre-moulded to match.
.3 Fastenings standard to manufacturer.
.2 Aluminum
.1 Apply in areas where insulated piping is exposed to the outdoors. Install to CSA HA
Series-M1980. Specifically, use on all outdoor domestic cold water piping serving
cooling tower.
.2 Aluminum jacket piping systems and circular breeching and stacks: ASTM B209,
3003 alloy, H-14 temper, 0.6 mm (0.023 inch) minimum thickness with locking
longitudinal joints.
.3 Jackets for elbows, tees and other fittings shall be factory-fabricated to match
shape of fitting and of 0.6 mm (0.024) inch minimum thickness aluminum. Fittings
shall be of same construction as straight run jackets but need not be of the same
alloy.
.4 Factory-fabricated stainless steel bands shall be installed on all circumferential

joints. Bands shall be 20 mm (0.75 inch) wide on 450 mm (18 inch) centers. System
shall be weatherproof if utilized for outside service.
3- EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
.1 Apply insulation after required tests have been completed and approved by the
Consultant. Insulation and surfaces shall be clean and dry when installed and during
application of any finish.
.2 Work shall be performed by insulation journeymen.
.3 Vapour barriers and insulation to be complete over the full length of pipe or duct surface
without penetration for hangers, standing duct seams and without interruption at
sleeves.
.4 Insulated pipes having vapour barrier jacket to pass through walls, floors, etc. to
accommodate full insulation thickness. Protect insulation of exposed pipes passing
through floors with 1.2mm (18 ga.) galvanized iron 150mm (6") from finished floor.
.5 Protect insulation on chilled water lines with insulation shields consisting of high density
insulation and sheet steel support. Alternatively bury pipe hanger in insulation and
Project #2015-09
apply insulation up hanger rod not less than 4 times the insulation thickness.
.6 Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces.
.7 Apply insulation materials, accessories and finishes in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.
.8 Pack solid around all pipes where they pass through sleeves in walls, floor slabs, etc.
for full thickness of floor and/or wall with fibreglass insulation.
3.2 PIPE INSULATION
.1 Preformed insulation: sectional insulation up to 12" diam., sectional or curved

segmented above 12" diam.
.2 Multi-layered, insulation: use staggered butt joint construction.
.3 Vertical pipe over 3" diam: use insulation supports welded or bolted to pipe directly
above lowest pipe fitting. Thereafter locate on 12 ft centers and at each valve and
flange.
.4 Use factory fabricated, easily disassembled insulation, for valves, fittings and process
equipment requiring periodic maintenance of parts and sub-assemblies listed or
indicated.
.5 Terminate insulation at each end of unions and flanges on hot lines, and at other points
where indicated, with insulation cement, to CGSB 51-GP-6M, trowelled on bevel.
.6 Gouge out insulation for proper fit where there is interference between weld bead and
insulation. Bevel away from studs and nuts to permit their removal without damage to
insulation, and closely and neatly trim around extending parts of pipe saddles,
supports, hangers, and clamp guides and seal with insulating cement.
3.3 FLANGES
.1 Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
.1 Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
.2 Make width of insulation segments the same as overall width of the flange and
bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
.3 Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference
of adjacent straight pipe segments with a collar fabricated for preformed pipe
insulation.
.4 Fill all voids and seal all raw edges of insulation with vapor retarder mastic.
Project #2015-09
3.4 MECHANICAL FASTENERS
.1 Secure pipe insulation by straps. Space straps at not more than 900 mm on centres and
use at least 3 rows per length of insulation section.
3.5 VALVES AND FITTINGS INSULATION
.1 Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation to straight pipes, tubes,
and fittings.
.2 Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
3.6 JACKETS
.1 Interior:
.1 Apply either aluminum or PVC jacketing to exposed insulated pipe, valves, fittings,
and specialties, at an elevation of 8 feet or less above finished floor in
mechanical/electrical rooms, penthouses, and services aisles/pipe chases. Fittings
of aluminum jacketed piping may be either aluminum or standard PVC fitting covers.
Jacketing for piping in existing areas shall match existing jacketing.
.2 Apply PVC jacketing where indicated, with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and
at fitting covers, the maximum the cover allows. Seal longitudinal seams by joining
with PVC welding solvent. Seal circumferential ends with 1/ PVC tape.
.2 Exterior:
.1 Apply aluminum jacketing to all external piping that is insulated. Cover all fittings,
valves, and specialties with aluminum jacketing.
.2 Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints. Secure jacket with aluminum bands or sheet metal screws on 12 inches
centers and at end joints. On piping exposed to the weather, overlap longitudinal
seams arranged to shed water and seal end joints with weatherproof mastic.
Project #2015-09
CHILLER REPLACEMENT COOLING PLANT CHEMICAL TREATMENT
1 - General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section specifies the eye/face wash station, cleaning and treatment of circulating
HVAC water systems, including the following:
.1 Cleaning compounds.
.2 Pumping and storing equipment
.3 Chemical treatment for closed loops (chilled water)
.4 Chemical treatment for open loop systems (cooling tower).
.1 Provide the services of an experienced water treatment chemical engineer or technical

representative to direct flushing, cleaning, pre-treatment, training, debugging, and
acceptance testing operations; direct and perform chemical limit control during construction
period and monitor systems for a period of 12 months after acceptance, including not less
than 4 service calls and written status reports.
.2 Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section must have a
minimum ten years documented experience. Company must have local representatives,
water analysis laboratories and full time service personnel. Installer: Company specializing
in performing the work of this section must have a minimum five years experience.
.3 During this period perform monthly tests of the cooling tower for Legionella pneumophila
and submit reports stating Legionella bacteria count per millimeter. These tests shall be
conducted in a certified laboratory and not by a technician in the field. Minimum service
during construction/start-up shall be 4 hours.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit in accordance with Section 15010, shop drawings, product data, and samples,
manufacturer's literature and data including:
.1 Cleaning compounds and recommended procedures for their use.

.2 Chemical treatment for closed and open loop systems, including installation and
operating instructions.
.3 Water analysis verification.
.4 Materials Safety Data Sheet for all proposed chemical compounds,
.5 Maintenance and operating instructions in accordance with Section 15010.
1.4 WARRANTY
.1 The manufacturer of chemical treatment equipment shall guarantee equipment of its

manufacture, and bearing its identification to be free from defects in workmanship and
material for a period of 24 months for electronics and 12 months for mechanical parts from
date of delivery from the factory or authorized distributor under normal use and service and
otherwise when such equipment is used in accordance with instructions furnished by the
manufacturer and for the purposes disclosed in writing at the time of purchase, if any.
Project #2015-09
.2 In the event a component fails to perform as specified and having been returned to the
manufacturer transportation charges prepaid, and is proven defective in service during the
warranty period, the manufacturer shall repair or replace the defective part. Replaceable
elastomeric parts and glass components are expendable and are not covered by any
warranty.
.1 Magnus (no exceptions)
2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLOSED-LOOP CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS
.1 Pot Feeder
.1 Malleable cast iron or bronze, ASE Specifications S-15, pressure rating 1200 kPa,
temperature rating 110C.
.2 Feeders shall be 18.9 L (five gallon) minimum capacity
.2 Bypass Filter
.1 Four swing bolt closures allow easy access without special tools. High Quality Castings
provide easy and accurate filtration. 304SS Retainer Basket offers greater chemical
resistance. Up to 180 US GPM with less than 2 PSI pressure drop. (Based on water-like
viscosity and a clean filter bag.) Glass Bead Blast facilitates easier vessel cleanup.
Adjustable height three-leg stand. Cover rest to facilitate bag change-out. 100%
hydraulic testing ensuring quality and performance. Pressure rating of 150PSI @ -29/
C to 160/ C.
.2 By pass type, complete with necessary shut off valves, drain and air release valves,
and system connections, for introducing chemicals into system, with funnel or large
opening on top for easy chemical addition.
.3 Filter Unit size to be selected by manufacturer based on 5% of total recirculation

rate for all closed systems only.
.3 Piping
.1 Chemical feed piping, schedule 80 black steel, crosses at all changes in direction
with unconnected ports plugged.
.4 Cleaning Compounds
.1 Prior to connecting the chiller to the condenser and chilled water loop, the
piping loops shall be flushed.
.2 Flush system thoroughly with water, back flush pump, strainers, blowdown drain
valves and risers to remove all loose debris..
.3 During the flushing, a 30 mesh (max.) Y-strainers (or acceptable Equivalent) shall
be in place in the system piping and examined periodically as necessary to remove
Project #2015-09
collected residue. The use of on board chiller strainers shall not be acceptable. The
flushing process shall take no less than 6 hours or until the strainers when examined
after each flushing are clean. Old systems with heavy encrustation shall be flushed
for a minimum of 24 hours and may take as long as 48 hours before the filters run
clean. Detergent and acid concentrations shall be used in strict accordance with the
respective chemical manufacturers instructions. After flushing with the detergent
and/or dilute acid concentrations the system loop shall be purged with clean water
for at least one hour to ensure that all residual cleaning chemicals have been
flushed out.
.4 Sample water in a bottle, then add 0.5 - 0.75 % of MAGCARE 320 to the system
through a by-pass feeder or another feeding device.
.5 Circulate for 5-7 hours at ambient temperature. Note that the cleaning will be faster
at higher temperatures.
.6 During recirculation, back flush strainers, drain valves and risers at their lowest point
once every 2 hours.
.7 After the recirculation period (5-7 hours after injection of Magcare 320), sample
water from the system identified as washing water.
.8 Drain cleaning water completely.
.9 Then fill and drain system several times. Circulate 30 minutes every time the system
is refilled.
.10 Bleed system at several points until water is clear and non-foaming. Clean pump
strainers. NOTE: Spent water effluent must be neutralized before being returned
to the sewer system.
.11 Draw a water sample from the system at the end of the last washing (identified
as rinsing water) and send it to our laboratory for analysis.* Sample the city
water in another bottle. NOTE: The cleaning and rinsing settings should be
verified by using the analytical procedure AP424. To carry out this procedure,
TK424 and a fluorometer, are required. All required equipment shall be provided.
.12 If the laboratory report is satisfactory, the system must then be treated with the
appropriated formula.
.13 * The rinsing operation will be considered completed when all the following
conditions will be met:
pH and conductivity values similar to those of city water ;
foam not detected ;
absence of residue of oil and grease ;
iron level lower than 2 ppm.
Magcare 320 remaining lower than 50 ppm.
.5 Inhibitor:
.1 Supply water for the chilled water circuit shall be analyzed and treated by a
professional water treatment specialist who is familiar with the operating conditions
and materials of construction specified for the chillers heat exchangers, headers
and associated piping. Cycles of concentration shall be controlled such that
recirculated water quality for modular chillers using 316 stainless steel brazed plate
heat exchangers and carbon steel headers is maintained within the following
parameters:
.2 PH Greater than 7 and less than 9

.3 Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) Less than 1000 ppm
.4 Hardness as CaCO3 30 to 500 ppm
Project #2015-09
.5 Alkalinity as Ca CO3 30 to 500 ppm

.6 Chlorides Less than 200 ppm
.7 Sulfates Less than 200 ppm
.8 No nitrite base chemicals are acceptable. Provide all organic, phosphate treatment
only. Compounds shall be suitable for make up quality and make up rate and which
will not cause or enhance bacteria/corrosion problems or mechanical seal failure due
to excessive total dissolved solids. Maintain inhibitor residual as determined by water
treatment laboratory, taking into consideration residual and temperature effect on
pump mechanical seals.
.9 pH Control: Inhibitor formulation shall include adequate buffer to maintain pH in the

range recommended by the chiller manufacturer (see above in italic font).
.10 Performance: Protect various wetted, coupled, materials of construction

including ferrous, and red and yellow metals. Maintain system essentially free of
scale, corrosion, and fouling. Corrosion rate of following metals shall not exceed
specified mills per year penetration; ferrous, 0-2; brass, 0-1; copper, 0-1.
Inhibitor shall be stable at equipment skin surface temperatures and bulk water
temperatures of not less than 121 degrees C (250 degrees F) and 52 degrees C
(125 degrees Fahrenheit) respectively. Heat exchanger fouling and capacity
reduction shall not exceed that allowed by fouling factor 0.0005.
2.2 OPEN-LOOP COOLING TOWER SYSTEMS
.1 General
.1 Provide a factory fabricated and tested packaged, self-contained, chemical

feed/blowdown monitoring, controlling and alarming system, containing all specified
or indicated remote components, and requiring only terminal sample stream and
chemical piping/tubing connections, remote component electrical connection and
power supply.
.2 System shall be suitable for a broad spectrum make-up water supply and chemical
treatment program. Provide equipment to treat each cooling tower or evaporative
condenser individually.
.2 Supply water for the condenser water circuit shall be analyzed and treated by a
professional water treatment specialist who is familiar with the operating conditions and
materials of construction specified for the chillers heat exchangers, headers and
associated piping. Cycles of concentration shall be controlled such that recirculated
water quality for modular chillers using 316 stainless steel brazed plate heat exchangers
and carbon steel headers is maintained within the following parameters:

Project #2015-09
.3 System Functions:
.1 Automatically maintain a predetermined, selectable, total dissolved solids

concentration through a continuously monitoring conductivity controller.
.2 Maintain a predetermined, selectable, scale/corrosion inhibitor and dispersant

residual, through a continuously make-up monitoring meter/counter/timer and
inhibitor/dispersant ratio controller.
.3 Achieve a predetermined, selectable, peak concentration of one or two

microbiocides as needed on an alternating basis, through a programmable timer
controller. De-energize controller or stagger feed chemicals that would degrade or
could be incompatible if fed simultaneously.
.4 Main control panel and accessories:
.1 Packaged conductivity controller with Graphic LED display, 0-10,000 S,

selectable feeders (pulse, %, post blow down, limit and 28 day), security code to
prevent unauthorized access. Utilize microprocessor technology. Keypad or remote
control: Access all measurements and setpoints through chemical resistant key pad
or remote. Disable control outputs upon loss of water flow to prevent chemical
feeding.
.2 On-off switch
.3 NEMA 4X enclosure. Mounted on a 24" x 18" x 3/8" (600 mm x 450 mm x 10 mm)
thick wall, rigid PVC panel, mounting holes at each corner
.4 Conductivity probe and flow switch, mounting tee;
.5 Three (3) magnetic impulse solenoid pumps with a rated capacity to pump the
required amount of chemical against system pressure, complete with manual stroke
length adjustment, stroke frequency adjustment, manual stroke frequency override,
.6 Suction tubing with foot valve, and discharge tubing with injection fitting.
.7 Wye strainer.
.8 Strainer blowdown valve.
.9 Throttling valve
.10 Discharge check valves
.11 Conductivity monitor
.1 Provide linear measurements of full range.

.2 Provide two scales for selection of high and low in field to assure accurate
measurements.
.3 Provide increments of 1 microohm/cm with adjustable hysteresis.
.4 Provide bleed-off control in following manner:
.1 Standard operation-controller actuates a bleed off solenoid valve when

dissolved solids level is exceeded by trip point.
.2 Provide an adjustable bleed limit timer to prevent excessive bleed off.
.3 An alarm contact shall close when timer has timed out.
.12 Bleed Valve:
.1 Brass body actuator normally closed as required.
Project #2015-09
.2 Electrical Characteristics: 110 volts, single phase, 60 Hz

.3 Lock out cooling water bleed-off during biocide feed period.
.13 Chemical feed control
.1 Provide three timers that are capable of operating in one of following field
programmable modes.
.1 Counter-timer-chemical feed proportioned to make-up water rate.

.2 Controller shall send low voltage signal to a contacting head water meter.
.14 Alarms:
.1 Provide alarm LEDs with silence button for high and low conductivity, 10-60
minute bleed-off, chemical feed limit timers, and chemical drum level.
.2 Provide remote output relay to indicate alarm condition to Building Control

System specified under Section 15900
.15 Controller operating data history:
.1 Retain in memory all operating data for following parameters:
.1 Standard memory shall allow acquisition and storage of all analog inputs for
a one-week period.
.2 A three (3) hour minimum, maximum average of all conditions shall be stored
for a one-week period.
.3 A minute-by-minute account of operating conditions shall be available for
latest three-hour period.
.16 Provide PVC injection nozzles with corporation stop to inject chemical into main
circulating water line. Pressure rating: 700kPa (100 PSI). Size: DN20 (3/4 IN)
NPT. Quantity: Three (3).
.17 Provide with anti-siphon/pressure relief valve installed on pump head which provides
anti-siphon protection and aids in priming under pressure.
.18 Polyethylene Storage Tanks
.1 30 gallon capacity, with cover. Constructed from white, UV resistant polyethylene

with molded-in graduations in gallons and liters. Rigid covers are black
polyethylene with molded recesses for pump, mixer and level switch.
.19 Mounting Brackets for Metering Pumps
.1 Wall mount brackets position your E-class metering pumps above your chemical
drum. Also available is a mounting base for the LK Series pump that simplifies
installation and service.
.20 Water Meter
Project #2015-09
.1 Contact pulse water meter with sealed, pulse contact and volume readout;
sized to suit cooling tower tonnage rather than make-up water line size.
.21 Test Equipment
.1 Provide enamel wall hung test cabinet.

.2 Provide the following test kits:
.1 Taylor K-1503 (or equivalent) Total Hardness test kit
.2 HACH pocket colorimeter II (model 5870010 or equivalent) test kit for
molybdate
.3 HT-3P Conductivity tester: range 0 - 10,000 S
.22 Chemicals
.1 Provide sufficient chemicals for start-up and testing and twelve months operation
from date of project acceptance.
.2 Scale/corrosion inhibitor: Provide a concentrated liquid blend of high

performance inhibitors designed to control corrosion and scale in open
recirculating cooling water systems.
.1 Feed automatically. Maintain residual as determined by water treatment

laboratory.
.3 Biocide 1:
.1 A non-oxidizing liquid organic biocide formulated for use in industrial cooling
water systems. Effective for controlling growth of algae, bacteria, and fungi
at low concentrations.
.2 Applicable to cooling water systems operating in a broad pH range and high
cycles of concentration
.3 Non-foaming biocide
.4 Biocide 2:
.1 Single-feed stabilized liquid bromine biocide based on active ingredients of
sodium bromide and sodium hypochlorite
.5 All chemicals to be acceptable for discharge to sanitary sewer.
3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Ensure adequate clearances to permit performance of servicing and maintenance of

equipment.
.2 Pipe blow-off connections to nearest drain.
.3 Provide power supply to all controllers and pumps, as required.
3.2 COOLING TOWER OPEN CIRCUIT SYSTEM
Project #2015-09
.1 Install PVC injection nozzles with corporation stops in the water piping serving the
cooling tower downstream of the heat source.
.2 The inlet piping shall connect to the discharge side of the circulating water pump. The
outlet piping shall connect to the water piping serving the cooling tower downstream of
the heat source.
.3 All chemical pumps shall be mounted no higher than 5 foot above floor elevation, with 4
foot being the optimal height. All chemical pumps shall be located within 5 feet of
conductivity controller.
.4 Provide a by-pass line around water meters and bleed off piping assembly. Provide ball
valves to allow for bypassing, isolation, and servicing of components.
.5 Bleed off water piping with bleed off piping assembly shall be piped from pressure side
of circulating water piping to a convenient drain. Bleed off connection to main circulating
water piping shall be upstream of chemical injection nozzles.
Project #2015-09
CHILLER REPLACEMENT MODULAR CHILLER
1 GENERAL
.1 Section includes design, performance criteria, refrigerants, controls, and installation

requirements for water-cooled modular scroll compressor chillers.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.2 Indicate:
.1 Equipment including connections, piping and fittings, valves, strainers,

control assemblies and ancillaries, identifying factory and field assembled.
.3 Dimensions, construction details, recommended installation and support,
mounting bolt hole sizes and locations and point loads.
.5 Performance curves.
.1 Data to include:
.1 Description of equipment giving manufacturers name, type, model year, capacity

and serial numbers.
.2 Provide part load performance curves.
.5 Weight
.1 Chiller Modules shall be ETL listed in accordance with UL Standard 1995, CSA
certified per Standard C22.2#236.
.2 Chiller modules shall be AHRI certified.
.3 Modules shall ship wired and charged with refrigerant. All modules shall be
factory run tested prior to shipment on an AHRI certified or 3rd party verified test
stand.
.4 Compressors, heat exchangers, piping and controls shall be mounted on a
heavy gauge, powder coated steel frame. Electrical controls, contactors, and
relays for each module shall be mounted within that module.
.5 10-70 ton modules shall be IBC Certified per ICC-ES AC156. Proof of
certification shall be furnished upon request.
1.5 DELIVERY AND HANDLING
.1 Chiller modules shall be delivered to the job site completely assembled and charged
with refrigerant and be shipped on skids with a weather resistant cover.
Project #2015-09
.2 Comply with the manufacturer's instructions for rigging and transporting units. Leave
protective covers in place until installation.
1.6 WARRANTY
.1 Manufacturers Warranty: Manufacturer shall provide full parts-only warranty

coverage for entire chiller for a period of one year. All parts shall be warranted
against defects in material and workmanship. Similar parts-only coverage shall be
provided for the chillers compressors for a period of five years. The warranty period
shall commence either on the equipment start-up date or six months after shipment,
whichever is earlier.
.2 Warranty support shall be provided by company direct or factory authorized service

permanently located near the job site.
1.7 CAPACITY AND PERFORMANCE
.1 As indicated in the equipment schedules.
.1 MULTISTACK water cooled water chiller MODEL (4)MS070X, Arctic Chillers -

Manhattan Water Cooled Modular chiller, or equivalent.
.2 The design documentation has been based on the MULTISTACK WATER COOLED
WATER CHILLER MODEL (4)MS070X overall physical footprint and physical
footprint of modular sections and electrical data. For any other manufacturer, the
contractor shall remain responsible for all changes and costs (labour and material)
required to accommodate a different footprint, electrical requirements, any other
costs associated with the installation.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATING CONDITIONS
.1 Provide water-cooled liquid chiller with the capacity as scheduled on drawings

.2 Chiller shall be designed to operate using R-410a Refrigerant.
.3 Chiller shall be designed for parallel evaporator water flow.
.4 The liquid to be chilled will be water containing corrosion inhibitors.
2.2 GENERAL
.1 System Description: Chiller shall incorporate Scroll-type compressors and will

consist of (4) 70-ton modules. Each refrigerant circuit shall consist of an individual
compressor, common dual circuited condenser, dual circuited evaporator, thermal
expansion valves, and control system. Each circuit shall be constructed to be
independent of other circuits from a refrigeration and electrical stand-point. The
multi-circuit chiller must be able to produce chilled water even in the event of a
failure of one or more refrigerant circuits. Circuits shall not contain more than 24 lb.
Project #2015-09
of R-410a refrigerant.
2.3 SOUND REDUCTION PANEL PACKAGE
.1 Each module shall be supplied with a light weight aluminum frame with sound
reduction panels. Panels are powder coated 20 gauge steel with 1 of fiberglass
insulation to reduce sound levels. Optional sound package will reduce sound
pressure levels measured at 1 meter at a minimum of 12 dBA.
2.4 CHILLED AND CONDENSER WATER MAINS
.1 Each module shall include supply and return mains for both chilled and condenser
water. Cut grooved end connections are provided for interconnection to six inch
standard (6.625) (outside diameter) piping with grooved type couplings. Rolled
grooved shall be unacceptable. Chilled water mains shall be insulated with
closed cell insulation. Water Mains shall be installed such that they are beneath any
power or control wiring so as to insure for safe operation in the event of
condensation or minor piping leaks.
2.5 EVAPORATORS AND CONDENSERS
.1 Each evaporator and condenser shall be brazed plate heat exchangers constructed
of 316 stainless steel; designed, tested, and stamped in accordance with UL 1995
code for 650 psig refrigerant side working pressure and 360 psig water side working
pressure. Both the condenser and evaporator heat exchanger shall be mounted
below the compressor, to eliminate the effect of migration of refrigerant to the cold
evaporator with consequent liquid slugging on start-up.
2.6 TOTAL ACCESS DESIGN OPTION
.1 Isolation valves shall be installed between the heat exchangers and water supply
mains for heat exchanger isolation and removal without the requirement to remove a
module or shut down the entire chiller allowing for total access to all serviceable
components.
2.7 COMPRESSORS
.1 Each module shall contain two hermetic scroll compressors independently circuited
and with internal spring isolation mounted to the module with rubber-in-shear
isolators. Each system also includes high discharge pressure and low suction
pressure manual reset safety cut-outs.
2.8 CENTRAL CONTROL SYSTEM
.1 Scheduling of the various compressors shall be performed by a microprocessor

based control system (Master Controller). A new lead compressor is selected every
24 hours to assure even distribution of compressor run time.
.2 The Master Controller shall monitor and report the following on each refrigeration
system:
Project #2015-09
.1 Discharge Pressure Fault

.2 Suction Pressure Fault
.3 Compressor Winding Temperature
.4 Suction Temperature
.5 Evaporator Leaving Chilled Water Temp.
.3 The Master Controller shall be powered by the chillers single point power connection
and shall monitor and report the following system parameters:
.1 Chilled Water Entering and Leaving Temperature

.2 Condenser Water Entering and Leaving Temperature
.3 Chilled Water and Condenser Water Flow
.4 An out of tolerance indication from these controls or sensors shall cause a fault
indication at the Master Controller and shutdown of that compressor with the transfer
of load requirements to the next available compressor. In the case of a System
Fault the entire chiller will be shut down. When a fault occurs, the Master Controller
shall record conditions at the time of the fault and store the data for recall. This
information shall be capable of being recalled through the keypad of the Master
Controller and displayed on the Master Controllers 2 line by 40 character back-lit
LCD. A history of faults shall be maintained including date and time of day of each
fault (up to the last 20 occurrences).
.5 Individual monitoring of leaving chilled water temperatures from each refrigeration

system shall be programmed to protect against freeze-up.
.6 The control system shall monitor entering and leaving chilled water temperatures to
determine system load and select the number of compressor circuits required to
operate. Response times and set points shall be adjustable. The system shall
provide for variable time between compressor sequencing and temperature sensing,
so as to fine tune the chiller to different existing building conditions.
.7 Interoperability option: The Chiller shall be capable of interfacing to a building

automation system. Interface shall be accomplished using an Interoperability Web
Portal and shall be capable of communication over BACNet.
.8 Flow Switches: Paddle-type field-installed flow switches for Evaporator flow and
Condenser flow.
2.9 CONTROL INPUTS/OUTPUTS
.1 Chiller shall have a single point power connection and external inputs and outputs to
be compatible with the building management system. Inputs/Outputs include:
.1 Remote Start/Stop
.2 Customer Alarm Relay
.3 Customer Chilled/Load Limit Reset Signal
.4 ECW to Mechanical Cooling Module
.5 LCW from Mechanical Cooling Module
.6 ECHW to Mechanical Cooling Module
Project #2015-09
.7 LCHW from Mechanical Cooling Module
.8 Power Phase Monitor
.9 Chilled Water Flow Switch Input
.10 Condenser Water Flow Switch Input
.11 Full Load Indicator Relay
.12 Condenser Pump Relay
.13 DDRS Condenser Multiflush Relay
.14 Chilled Water Pump Relay
2.10 STRAINERS
.1 Each inlet water header shall incorporate a built in 30-mesh (maximum) in-line
strainer system per module to prevent heat exchanger fouling and accommodate
100% flow filtration with a minimum surface area of 475 sq inches per module.
2.11 VIBRATION ISOLATION
.1 See section 15241 and as per manufacturer recommendations.
2.12 CONTROLS, SAFETIES, AND OPERATION
.1 Chiller safety controls system shall be provided with the unit (minimum) as follows:
.1 Low evaporator refrigerant pressure

.2 Loss of flow through the evaporator
.3 Loss of flow through the condenser
.4 High condenser refrigerant pressure
.5 High compressor motor temperature
.6 Low suction gas temperature
.7 Low leaving evaporator water temperature
.2 Failure of chiller to start or chiller shutdown due to any of the above safety cutouts
shall be annunciated by display of the appropriate diagnostic description at the unit
control panel. This annunciation will be in plain English. Alphanumeric codes shall
be unacceptable.
.3 The chiller shall be furnished with a Master Controller as an integral portion of the
chiller control circuitry to provide the following functions:
.1 Provide automatic chiller shutdown during periods when the load level decreases
below the normal operating requirements of the chiller. Upon an increase in
load, the chiller shall automatically restart.
.2 Provisions for connection to automatically enable the chiller from a remote
energy management system.
.3 The control panel shall provide alphanumeric display showing all system
parameters in the English language with numeric data in English units.
.4 Each module shall contain a slave controller that will allow any module to run in
the event of a master controller failure or loss of communication with the master
controller via an on/off/manual toggle switch.
.4 Normal Chiller Operation
Project #2015-09
.1 When chiller is enabled, the factory supplied Master Controller stages the chiller
capacity from minimum to maximum as required by building load.
.2 The Chiller control system shall respond to Entering Water Temperature and will
have an integral reset based on entering water temperature to provide for
efficient operation at part-load conditions.
.5 Power Phase Monitor
.1 Provide a Power Phase Monitor on the incoming power supply to the chiller.
This device shall prevent the chiller from operating during periods when the
incoming power is unsuitable for proper operation.
.2 The Power Phase Monitor shall provide protection against the following
conditions:
.1 Low Voltage (Brown-Out)
.2 Phase Rotation
.3 Loss of Phase
.4 Phase Imbalance
.6 BAS interface: chiller must be provided with means of interfacing with the existing
BAS system in order to achieve the sequence of operation described on Mechanical
drawings. Mechanical contractor to coordinate between the BAS sub-contractor and
chiller manufacturer to ensure that chiller controls will be compatible with the existing
BAS.
2.13 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
.1 Single Point Power: Chiller shall be equipped with a pre-engineered genuine buss
bar electrical system for single point power at a 5,000 amp SCCR. Where the
equipment size exceeds the amp rating of the buss bar, multiple power connections
may be applied. Chiller must have a single point power connection (any
additional costs incurred by the contractor as a result of not having a single
point power connection will be the responsibility of the chiller manufacturer).
.2 Pre-engineered system shall also incorporate individual module isolation circuit

breakers for full redundancy and ability of a module to be taken off-line for repair
while the rest of the modules continue to operate. Individual power feeds to each
module shall be unacceptable.
.3 The contractor shall supply and install main electrical power line, disconnect
switches, circuit breakers, and electrical protection devices per local code
requirements and as indicated necessary by the chiller manufacturer.
.4 The contractor shall supply and install electrical wiring and devices required to
interface the chiller controls with the building control system as indicated on the
drawings.
.5 Electrical power shall be supplied to the unit at the voltage, phase, and frequency
listed in the equipment schedule.
2.14 PIPING REQUIREMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND SAFETIES:
Project #2015-09
.1 Mechanical contractor shall supply and install pressure gages in readily accessible
locations in piping adjacent to the chiller such that they can be easily read from a
standing position on the floor. Scale range shall be such that design values shall be
indicated at approximately mid-scale.
.2 Gages shall be installed in the entering and leaving water lines of the cooler and
condenser.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION

.2 Coordinate the installation of the new chiller with the existing building services.
Relocate existing utilities as required to make room for the new equipment, as
necessary.
.3 Provide a suitable concrete support pad (re-use existing pad if suitable), in

accordance with section 15010. Also refer to section 15241
.4 Ensure manufacturers field service representative approves installation and is

present to supervise start up and to instruct operators.
.5 Connect to the existing power supply. Ensure to maintain all required NEC
clearances and clearances for the chiller maintenance and operation. Make
connections to existing power source as indicated and in full conformance with NEC.
.6 At the conclusion of the work, make good all surfaces affected by the work.
.7 All new above-ground wiring to run in metallic conduit except for the last 3 ft which
can be liquid-tight flexible conduit, for vibration isolation purposes. Provide
grounding as required by code. Maintain the color coding of conductors currently in
use in the building. Label disconnects.
.8 Arrange and pay for inspection by Electrical Safety Authority. Include certificate of
inspection in Maintenance Manual (see section 15010).
.9 Re-connect the new chiller to the existing school BAS. Update graphics and
sequencing of operation as required to reflect the new equipment.
.10 Re-connect the new chiller to the existing chilled water piping and condenser
water piping.
.11 Provide all necessary piping so the chiller , piping and accessories are
serviceable, without having to dismantle excessive lengths of pipe.
.12 Provide vapour-proof flow switches in the chilled water piping properly
interlocked to ensure that units can operate only when the flow is established.
Project #2015-09
.13 Provide wells and taps for thermometers, sensors and pressure gauges in
water piping adjacent to inlet and outlet connections of evaporator and
condenser.
.14 Provide certified wiring schematics to the electrical division for chiller,
associated equipment and controls.
.15 Provide necessary wiring for control items, such as flow switches, temperature
sensors, etc., as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEM FLUSHING PROCEDURE
.1 Prior to connecting the chiller to the condenser and chilled water loop, the piping
loops shall be flushed with a detergent and hot water (110-130/ F) mixture to
remove previously accumulated dirt and other organics. In old piping systems with
heavy encrustation of inorganic materials consult a water treatment specialist for
proper passivation and/or removal of these contaminants.
.2 During the flushing, a 30 mesh (max.) Y-strainers (or acceptable Equivalent) shall
be in place in the system piping and examined periodically as necessary to remove
collected residue. The use of on board chiller strainers shall not be acceptable. The
flushing process shall take no less than 6 hours or until the strainers when examined
after each flushing are clean. Old systems with heavy encrustation shall be flushed
for a minimum of 24 hours and may take as long as 48 hours before the filters run
clean. Detergent and acid concentrations shall be used in strict accordance with the
respective chemical manufacturers instructions. After flushing with the detergent
and/or dilute acid concentrations the system loop shall be purged with clean water
for at least one hour to ensure that all residual cleaning chemicals have been
flushed out.
.3 Prior to supplying water to the chiller the Water Treatment Specification shall be
consulted for requirements regarding the water quality during chiller operation. The
appropriate chiller manufacturers service literature shall be available to the operator
and/or service contractor and consulted for guidelines concerning preventative
maintenance and off-season shutdown procedures.
3.3 WATER TREATMENT REQUIREMENTS
.1 Supply water for both the chilled water and condenser water circuits shall be
analyzed and treated by a professional water treatment specialist who is familiar with
the operating conditions and materials of construction specified for the chillers heat
exchangers, headers and associated piping. Cycles of concentration shall be
controlled such that recirculated water quality for modular chillers using 316
stainless steel brazed plate heat exchangers and carbon steel headers is maintained
within the following parameters:

Project #2015-09
3.4 START - UP SERVICE
.1 Manufacturer shall provide the services of a Factory Authorized Service Engineer to

provide complete start-up supervision. Provide a start up log by the manufacturer to
document the chiller's start-up date.
.2 Factory Authorized Service Engineer shall also be responsible for assembly of the
chillers cabinetry package and electrical bus bar system.
.3 After start-up a Manufacturers Representative shall provide a minimum of 8-hours

of operator training to the owners designated representative(s).
Project #2015-09
CHILLER REPLACEMENT HVAC PIPING
1 - GENERAL
.1 Do piping system work in accordance with ANSI B31.1-1983.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.2 Indicated on manufacturers catalogue literature the following: - valves.
.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 15010.
2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE
conforming to ASTM A53-84a Grade B, with threaded ends.
.2 Type L hard drawn copper tubing conforming to ASTM B88. Type L soft
annealed copper tubing may be used within convector enclosures.
conforming to ASTM A53-84a Grade B, with bevelled ends.
conforming to ASTM A53-84a Grade B, with grooved ends conforming to CSA
B242-M.
2.2 PIPE JOINTS
.1 Wrought copper solder joint pressure type, with PS to copper adapters at screwed
connections. Solder to be tin antimony 95:5: To ASTM 832
Project #2015-09
.2 Class 2000 forged steel socket welding type, conforming to ASTM A1O5 Grade 2
and ANSI/ASME B16.1 1.
.1 Schedule 40, seamless carbon steel butt welding fittings conforming to ASTM A234
WPB and ANSI/ASME B16.9
2.3 UNIONS
.1 All brass construction with ground joint and either solder joint or screwed ends as
required.
.2 Class 150 black malleable iron construction with brass to iron ground joint and
screwed ends, conforming to ASTM A197 and ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.
.3 Provide dielectric unions or couplings at all connections between copper tubing and
ferrous piping or equipment.
2.4 FLANGES
.1 Class 150 forged steel slip-on or weldneck raised face type conforming to ASTM A181
Grade 1 and ANSI/ASME B16.5. Remove raised face where flanges connect to Class
125 cast iron valves.
.2 Hinged, two piece, shouldered or keyed cast malleable iron
.3 Conforming to ASTM A47 Grade 32510 with elastomeric gasket suitable for service and
lock bolt.
2.5 GASKETS AND BOLTS
.1 Gaskets
.1 1.6 mm (1/16") Garlock 3200 with SBR binder or equivalent asbestos free material.
.2 Bolts
.1 Semi finished hex head machine bolts and semi finished hex nuts, both of carbon
steel conforming. to ASTM A307 Class A.
2.6 PLUGS
.1 Class 3000 screwed, square head, machined from solid steel or forging to ASTM
A105 Grade 2.
Project #2015-09
2.7 GLOBE VALVES
.1 To MSS SP-80-1974, class 150, 1 MPa, bronze body, screwed over bonnet,
renewable composition disc.
.2 Lockshield handles: as indicated.
.3 Standard of Acceptance: Crane Fig. 7, Jenkins Fig IO6BJ, Toyo 221, Kitz Fig 09
and Grinnell 3240.
.2 2 and over, flanged:
.1 To MSS SP-85, Class 125, 860 kPa, F.F. flange, cast iron body, bronze trim, OS&Y,
bolted bonnet, bronze disc and renewable and regrindable seat ring.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Crane Fig 351, Jenkins Fig. 2342J, Toy 400A, Kitz Fig. 76
and Grinnell 6200A.
2.8 BUTTERFLY VALVES
.1 2 diam and over, full lug body:
.1 To MSS SP-67-1976, Class 150, 1 MPa WOG water, cast iron body with cast iron
or bronze disc, stainless steel stem, replaceable EPDM liner, with notched top plate
and leverl lock handle for valve sizes NPS 6 and smaller, and worm gear operator
with hand wheel for valves NPS 8 and larger. For glycol service utilize stainless
steel trim. Lugs to be tapped. Shutoff up to 200 psi (1720 kPa) rating if downstream
equipment is removed.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Centerline Fig L200L-E/G200L-E, Bray, Apollo 141-143.
2.9 SWING CHECK VALVES
.1 To MSS SP-80, class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap,
regrindable seat.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Crane Fig. 37, Jenkins Fig 4092.1,. Toyo 236, Kitz Fig. 22
and Grinnell 3300..
.2 2 diam and up, flanged:
.1 To MSS SP-70, class 125, 860 kPa, cast iron body, FF flange, regrind renewable
seat, bronze disc, bolted cap.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Crane Fig. 373, Jenkins Fig 587.1, Toyo 435A, Kitz Fig.
78 and Grinnell 6300A.
Project #2015-09
.3 2" to 4" diam. for grooved end pipe:
.1 To MSS SP-71, Class 125, 860 kPa, ductile iron body, bronze or stainless steel
discs, stainless steel spring, stainless steel shaft, EPDM seat.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic, Gruvlock.
2.10 BALL VALVES
.1 2" diam and under, branch isolators, screwed:
.1 Rated for 600 WOG, bronze body, bronze ball, with Teflon seal.
.2 Ball valves shall have 111 port opening.
.3 All ball valves shallot provided with lockable handles where specified.
.4 Standard of Acceptance: Toyo 5049, Jenkins 902BJ, Crane 9322, Kitz 69 and
Grinnell 3700, Apollo 70-200.
.2 Soldered ends are only acceptable for valves that are NPS 3/4" installed in copper
piping.
3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING
.1 The drawings show the general arrangement of pipe and equipment but do not show
all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect pipes to equipment,
fan-coils, coils, radiators, etc., and to coordinate with other trades. Provide all necessary
fittings, offsets and pipe runs based on field measurements and at no additional cost
to the government. Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location
of HVAC equipment and accessories to be connected on ceiling grid. Pipe location on
the drawings shall be altered by contractor where necessary to avoid interferences and
clearance difficulties.
.2 Store materials to avoid excessive exposure to weather or foreign materials. Keep

inside of piping relatively clean during installation and protect open ends when work is
not in progress.
.3 Support piping securely.
.4 Install piping generally parallel to walls and column center lines, unless shown otherwise
on the drawings. Space piping, including insulation, to provide 25 mm (one inch)
minimum clearance between adjacent piping or other surface. Unless shown otherwise,
slope drain piping down in the direction of flow not less than 25 mm (one inch) in 12 m
(40 feet). Provide eccentric reducers to keep bottom of sloped piping flat.
.5 Locate and orient valves to permit proper operation and access for maintenance of
packing, seat and disc. Generally locate valve stems in overhead piping in horizontal
position. Provide a union adjacent to one end of all threaded end valves. Control valves
usually require reducers to connect to pipe sizes shown on the drawing. Install butterfly
Project #2015-09
valves with the valve open as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent binding of
the disc in the seat.
.6 Offset equipment connections to allow valving off for maintenance and repair with
minimal removal of piping. Provide flexibility in equipment connections and branch line
take offs with 3 elbow swing joints where noted on the drawings.
.7 Tee water piping runouts or branches into the side of mains or other branches. Avoid
bull-head tees, which are two return lines entering opposite ends of a tee and exiting
out the common side.
.8 Connect to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instruction unless otherwise

indicated.
.9 Connect to the cooling tower, chiller and pumps using vibration isolators as indicated
in section 15241.
.10 No cooling tower piping shall be supported by the roof; use the new cooling tower
steel structure or the enclosure structural elements.
.11 Slope piping up in direction of flow. Use eccentric reducers at pipe size change
installed to provide positive drainage or positive venting.
.12 Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access for maintenance of
equipment, valves and fittings.
.13 Ream pipes, clean scale and dirt, inside and outside, before and after assembly.
3.2 PIPE PAINTING - COOLING TOWER/CONDENSER
.1 Refer to section 15010 and notes on Mechanical drawings
3.3 VALVES
.1 Install valves as shown on drawings with stems upright or horizontal unless approved
otherwise.
.2 Provide ball valves at all branch take-offs 2" diam and under to isolate each piece of
equipment and as indicated. Provide butterfly valves on all branch take-offs to isolate
each piece of equipment for 2 and over and as indicated.
.3 Install globe valves where indicated and in bypass around control valves.
.4 Provide a drain valve at the base of all risers.
3.4 TESTING
.1 Test system in accordance with Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions.
Project #2015-09
3.5 SPARE PARTS
.1 Furnish following spare parts:
.1 Valve seats: one for every ten valves, each size. Minimum one.
.2 Discs: one for every ten valves, each size. Minimum one.
.3 Stem packing: one for every ten valves, each size. Minimum one.
.4 Valve handles: two of each size.
.5 Gaskets for flanges: one for every ten flanges.
3.6 VALVE PACKING
.1 All valve packing shall be asbestos free.
3.7 VALVE STEMS
.1 All valves for this project shall be rising stem unless stated otherwise.
3.8 BRAZING
.1 Flux shall not be allowed to penetrate to the inside of the pipe. The outside of the tube
and fittings shall be cleaned by washing with hot water in order to remove any residual
flux.
.2 During the brazing of the pipe connections, except when performing final connections
and emergency repairs, the interior of the pipe shall be maintained with a nitrogen
atmosphere. This shall be done by purging the pipe a sufficient number of times to
remove all air and oxygen and by maintaining a small purge flow to prevent reentry of
air or oxygen.
.3 Erection: Cut all pipe and tubing accurately to measurements obtained at the site of the
system and install without springing or forcing. Protect all pipe and tubing against
mechanical injury.
.4 2 diam and over: welded fittings and flanges to CSA W47.1-1973.
.5 Flanges: plain or raised face.
.6 Flange gaskets: to ANSI 816.21-1978, ANSI B16.20-1973 or ANSI A21.11-1980.
.7 Pipe thread taper: to ANSI 82.1-1968.
.8 Bolts and nuts: to ANSI 818.2.1-1972 and ANSI 818.2.2-1972.
.9 Rolled grooved coupling gaskets: type EPDM for temperature range minus 35 C. to plus
100 C.
3.9 FITTINGS
.1 Pipe fittings, screwed, flanged or welded:
Project #2015-09
.1 Cast iron pipe flanges: Class 125 to ANSI 816.1-1975.
.2 Malleable iron screwed fittings: Class 150 to ANSI 816.3-1977.
.3 Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings: to ANS1B16.5-1981.
.4 Steel butt-welding fittings: to ANSI B16.9a-1981.
.5 Unions, malleable iron: to ANSI 816.3- 1977.
.2 Fittings for roll grooved piping: malleable iron to ASTM A47-77 ductile iron to ASTM
A536-80.
Project #2015-09
CHILLER REPLACEMENT HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
1 - GENERAL
1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
.2 Indicate on manufacturers catalogue literature: strainers and pump valving and

accessories.

Section 15010.
2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR SEPARATORS
.1 Furnish and install as shown on the drawings an air separator with tangential inlet
nozzles. The air separator shall be designed and constructed in accordance with
Section VIII, Div 1 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
.2 The unit shall be fitted with an NPT vent connection for connection to a compression
tank or an air vent. An additional NPT tapping shall be provided on the bottom of the
air separator to facilitate blow-down.
.3 The air separator shall be equipped with a system strainer with a free area of not less
than four (4) times the cross sectional area of the connecting piping. The strainer
should be able to be removed for routine cleaning.
.4 Models up to 3" (75 mm) diam. are to be equipped with stainless steel strainers. Larger
Models are to be equipped with carbon steel strainers
.5 Models up to 3" (75 mm) diam. shall be supplied with a cast iron body and NPT system
connections, while larger models shall be supplied with a cast iron body and ANSI
flanges. 8 to 24 models are to be supplied with a fabricated steel body and carbon
steel ANSI flanges.
.6 Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong model Vortex VAS.
2.2 STRAINERS
.1 Basket or Y Type. Tee type is acceptable for water service.
.2 Screens: Bronze, monel metal or 18 8 stainless steel, free area not less than 2 1/2
times pipe area, with perforations as follows: 1.1 mm (0.045 inch) diameter perforations.
.3 100 mm (4 inches) and larger: 3.2 mm (0.125 inch) diameter perforations.
Project #2015-09
2.3 AUTOMATIC SELF CLEANING FILTER
.1 An automatic self-cleaning filtration system. The filter shall be complete with 200 micron
screen and Omnitrol 401 control system to filter up to 1320 GPM. The filter shall be
made of high grade low carbon steel and the finish shall be electrodeposited polyester
epoxy coating, oven cured over a zinc phosphate primer coat. The Omintrol controller
shall require a single 120V power connection.
.2 Maximum Working Pressure 150 PSIG

Minimum Working Pressure 30 PSIG
Screen Open Area 648 Sq. In.
Maximum Temperature 150 F
.3 The filter will have a 316 stainless steel woven 200 micron screen, a 1-1/2 NPT
rinse valve, 8 inlet and outlet ANSI 300# connections, a differential pressure switch
preset to 7 psi and operate using the hydraulic pressure conditions. The filter
package shall remain on-line during the cleaning cycle incoming water still passes
through the filter screen. Some filtered water is drawn back through the screen to
the dirt collector nozzles, while the remaining filtered water maintains flow to the
outlet. There shall be only one valve operated to initiate the cleaning cycle and only
one moving hydraulic rinse piston during the cleaning cycle. The filter shall not
require any electric motors to operate a cleaning cycle or rinse piston. Electric
motors not acceptable.
.4 Standard of Acceptance: The Orival filtration system, ORG-080-LS (manufacturer to

confirm that selected model is suitable for this project) (by GPA Inc. 905-851-3991)
3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
.1 Install according to piping layout. Pipe drains and blow off connections to
nearest drain.
.2 Maintain proper clearance around equipment to permit performance of service

maintenance. Check final location with Consultant if different from that indicated
prior to installation.
.3 Refer to manufacturer's installation drawings.
.4 Check that all openings for appurtenances and equipment operating weight
conform to shop drawings.
3.2 STRAINERS
.1 Install in horizontal or down flow lines.
.2 Ensure clearance for removal of basket.
Project #2015-09
.3 Install ahead of each pump, at each automatic control valve and as indicated.
.4 In cooling tower water systems an in-line strainer shall be installed in addition to the
suction diffuser.
3.3 AIR SEPARATORS
.1 Install where indicated and to manufacturers instructions.
Project #2015-09
CHILLER REPLACEMENT HVAC PUMPS
1 General
1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
.2 Submit shop drawings of pump curves for review.
.3 Indicate piping, valves and fittings shipped loose by packaged equipment supplier,
showing their final location in field assembly.

Section 15010.
2 Products
2.1 VERTICAL IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
.1 Furnish and install, as indicated on the plans and specifications, end suction, radially
split casing type pumps of center line discharge design with back pull out feature
permitting removal of the complete rotating assembly without disturbing pipe
connections.
.2 Pump construction shall be BF (Bronze Fitted) suitable for a maximum working

pressure of 175 PSIG. The pump shaft shall be supported by two heavy duty ball
bearings. Casing gasket shall be confined within pump casing.
.3 The driving motor shall be of the squirrel cage induction type with ODP enclosure.
Pump and motor to be mounted on a rigidly constructed fabricated steel baseplate and
directly connected through a flexible coupling.
.4 Seal flush line accessories: required to improve seal chamber cleanliness: Supply in
the flush line to the mechanical seal a 50 micron cartridge filter and sight flow indicator,
to suit the working pressure encountered.
2.2 SUCTION GUIDES
.1 Furnish and install on the suction of each pump a suction guide, with outlet flow
stabilizing guide vanes, removable stainless steel strainer and fine mesh start-up
strainer.
.2 For 150 psig flanged pipe: Supply valve with Cast Iron body with 125 psig flanged ports.
.3 For 300 psig flanged pipe: Supply valves with Ductile Iron body and 250 psig flanged
ports.
.4 Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong SG series, Taco, Bell & Gossett
Project #2015-09
2.3 TRIPLE DUTY VALVES
.1 The valve stem shall be stainless steel with flat surfaces provided for adjustment with
open-end wrench.
.2 Flange adapters, where necessary, are to be Armstrong ArmgripTM PN16 or PN25

ductile iron flanges with anti-rotation lugs and EPT gaskets.
.3 For Welded Flange Piping: For 10 bar flanges: Valve body shall be Cast Iron with PN16
flanged ports. For 20 bar flanges: Valve body shall be Ductile Iron with PN25 flanged
ports.
.4 The valve shall be selected and installed in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions and be suitable for the pressure and temperature specified.
.5 Insulation
.1 Each valve shall be furnished with a pre-formed removable PVC insulation jacket
to meet ASTM D1784 Class 14253- C, MEA #7-87, ASTM-E-84 and ASTM136 with
a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke development rating of 50 or less.
There will be provided sufficient mineral fiberglass insulation to meet ASHRAE
90.1-1989 specifications in operating conditions with maximum Fluid Design
Operating Temperature Range of 141/F-200/F (60/C-93/C) and Mean Rating
Temperature of 125/F (52/C).
.6 Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong Flo-Trex series, Taco, Bell & Gossett.
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install with bearing lubrication points accessible. Check rotation.
.2 Ensure that pump body does not support piping or equipment. Provide stanchions or
hangers for this purpose. Refer to drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions
for details.
.3 Provide vibration isolation between the pumps and pipes, and between the pumps and
the concrete curbs. Refer to section 15241.
.4 Insulate pump body and accessories; refer to section 15260.
.5 Pipe drain tapping to floor drain.
.6 Install volute venting pet cock in accessible location.
.7 Change cartridge filter on regular basis prior to, and at turn over to owner.
Project #2015-09
.8 Install a suction guide upstream of each vertical in-line pump. The mechanical
contractor shall inspect the strainer prior to activating the pump and, further, shall
remove the fine mesh start-up strainer after a short running period. (24 hours
maximum). Space shall provided for removal of the strainer and connection of a
blow-down valve.
.9 Install a triple duty valve on the discharge of each vertical in-line pump.
.10 Contractor to provide and install one pressure gauge, piped to pump suction, pump
discharge and strainer inlet. Pressure gauge tappings with necessary isolating
valves to enable differential pressure reading across pump and strainer to be taken.
.11 Contractor shall cover motor during construction and have area clean of
construction debris before starting the motor.
.12 Contractor to follow the manufacturer's instructions for start-up and venting of
mechanical seal.
.13 If pump is used during temporary flushing of system, contractor shall be responsible
for changing mechanical seal or replacing motor bearings if so instructed by the
board representative.
.14 The pump manufacturer shall coordinate with the hydronic balancer to balance the
system to the required flows.
.15 Provide drip pan and piped to nearest drain for each pump. Drip pan shall be sized
to suit pump dimensions.
Project #2015-09
CHILLER REPLACEMENT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 This specification covers variable frequency drives (VFDs) designated on the drawing
schedules to be variable speed. All standard and optional features shall be included within
the VFD panel.
.2 The VFD shall be UL Type 1 or UL Type 12 as required on the schedule. The VFD shall
have been evaluated by UL and found acceptable for mounting in a plenum or other air
handling compartment. Manufacturer shall supply a copy of the UL plenum evaluation upon
request.
.3 The VFD shall be tested to UL 508C. The appropriate UL label shall be applied. When the
VFDs are to be located in Canada, C-UL certifications shall apply. VFD shall be
manufactured in ISO 9001, 2000 certified facilities.
.4 The VFD shall be CE marked and conform to the European Union ElectroMagnetic
Compatibility directive. The VFD shall be UL Clisted for a short circuit current rating of 100
kAIC and labeled with this rating.
.5 The VFD manufacturer shall supply the VFD and all necessary controls as herein specified.
The manufacturer shall have been engaged in the production of this type of equipment for
a minimum of twenty years.
.1 To ensure quality, the complete VFD shall be tested by the manufacturer. The VFD shall
drive a motor connected to a dynamometer at full load and speed and shall be cycled
during the automated test procedure.
.2 All optional features shall be functionally tested at the factory for proper operation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 This specification lists the minimum VFD performance requirements for this project.
.2 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010. Indicate the
following: dimensional drawings, connection drawings, power circuit diagrams, warranty
description, certification agency file numbers.
.3 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section
15010.
.1 ABB ACH series, Danfoss VLT series c/w electro-mechanical by-pass

2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 The VFD shall convert incoming fixed frequency three-phase AC power into an adjustable
frequency and voltage for controlling the speed of three-phase AC motors. The motor
current shall closely approximate a sine wave. Motor voltage shall be varied with frequency
to maintain desired motor magnetization current suitable for the driven load and to eliminate
the need for motor derating.
.2 When properly sized, the VFD shall allow the motor to produce full rated power at rated
motor voltage, current, and speed without using the motor's service factor. VFDs utilizing
sine weighted/coded modulation (with or without 3rd harmonic injection) must provide data
verifying that the motors will not draw more than full load current during full load and full
speed operation.
.3 The VFD shall include an input full-wave bridge rectifier and maintain a fundamental
(displacement) power factor near unity regardless of speed or load.
.4 The VFD shall have a dual 5% impedance DC link reactor on the positive and negative rails
of the DC bus to minimize power line harmonics and protect the VFD from power line
transients. The chokes shall be non-saturating. Swinging chokes that do not provide full
harmonic filtering throughout the entire load range are not acceptable.
.5 VFDs with saturating (non-linear) DC link reactors shall require an additional 3% AC line
reactor to provide acceptable harmonic performance at full load, where harmonic
performance is most critical.
.6 The VFDs full load output current rating shall meet or exceed NEC Table 430-150. The
VFD shall be able to provide full rated output current continuously, 110% of rated current
for 60 seconds and 135% of rated torque for up to 0.5 second while starting.
.7 The VFD shall provide full motor torque at any selected frequency from 20 Hz to base
speed while providing a variable torque V/Hz output at reduced speed. This is to allow
driving direct drive fans without high speed derating or low speed excessive magnetization,
as would occur if a constant torque V/Hz curve was used at reduced speeds.
.8 A programmable automatic energy optimization selection feature shall be provided standard

in the VFD. This feature shall automatically and continuously monitor the motors speed and
load to adjust the applied voltage to maximize energy savings.
.9 The VFD must be able to produce full torque at low speed to operate direct drive fans.
.10 The VFD must be capable of connection and disconnection to motor while the VFD is
under load. This switching shall be accomplished without interlocks or damage to the
VFD.
.11 An automatic motor adaptation algorithm shall measure motor stator resistance and
reactance to optimize performance and efficiency. It shall not be necessary to run the
motor or de-couple the motor from the load to perform the test.
.12 Galvanic isolation shall be provided between the VFDs power circuitry and control
circuitry to ensure operator safety and to protect connected electronic control equipment
from damage caused by voltage spikes, current surges, and ground loop currents.
VFDs not including either galvanic or optical isolation on both analog I/O and discrete
digital I/O shall include additional isolation modules.
.13 VFD shall minimize audible motor noise through the use of an adjustable carrier
frequency. The carrier frequency shall be automatically adjusted to optimize motor and
VFD operation while reducing motor noise. VFDs with fixed carrier frequency are not
acceptable.
.14 All VFDs shall contain integral EMI filters to attenuate radio frequency interference
conducted to the AC power line.
.1 A minimum of Class 20 I2t electronic motor overload protection for single motor
applications shall be provided. Overload protection shall automatically compensate for
changes in motor speed.
.2 Protection against input transients, loss of AC line or load phase, output short circuit, output
ground fault, over voltage, under voltage, VFD over temperature and motor over
temperature. The VFD shall display all faults in plain language. Codes are not acceptable.
.3 Protect VFD from input phase loss. The VFD should be able to protect itself from damage
and indicate the phase loss condition. During an input phase loss condition, the VFD shall
be able to be programmed to either trip off while displaying an alarm, issue a warning while
running at reduced output capacity, or issue a warning while running at full commanded
speed. This function is independent of which input power phase is lost.
.4 Protect from under voltage. The VFD shall provide full rated output with an input voltage as
low as 90% of the nominal. The VFD will continue to operate with reduced output, without
faulting, with an input voltage as low as 70% of the nominal voltage.
.5 Protect from over voltage. The VFD shall continue to operate without faulting with a
momentary input voltage as high as 130% of the nominal voltage.
.6 The VFD shall incorporate a programmable motor preheat feature to keep the motor warm
and prevent condensation build up in the motor when it is stopped in a damp environment
by providing the motor stator with a controlled level of current.
.7 VFD shall include a signal loss detection algorithm with adjustable time delay to sense the
loss of an analog input signal. It shall also include a programmable time delay to eliminate
nuisance signal loss indications. The functions after detection shall be programmable.
.8 VFD shall function normally when the keypad is removed while the VFD is running. No
warnings or alarms shall be issued as a result of removing the keypad.
.9 VFD shall catch a rotating motor operating forward or reverse up to full speed without VFD
fault or component damage.
.10 Selectable over-voltage control shall be provided to protect the drive from power
regenerated by the motor while maintaining control of the driven load.
.11 VFD shall include current sensors on all three output phases to accurately measure
motor current, protect the VFD from output short circuits, output ground faults, and act
as a motor overload. If an output phase loss is detected, the VFD will trip off and
identify which of the output phases is low or lost.
.12 If the temperature of the VFDs heat sink rises to a critical level, the VFD shall
automatically reduce its carrier frequency to reduce the heat sink temperature. It shall
also be possible to program the VFD so that it reduces its output current limit value if
the VFDs temperature becomes too high.
.13 In order to ensure operation during periods of overload, it must be possible to program
the VFD to automatically reduce its output current to a programmed value during
periods of excessive load. This allows the VFD to continue to run the load without
tripping.
.14 The VFD shall have temperature controlled cooling fan(s) for quiet operation, minimized
losses, and increased fan life. The drive fan speed can be preprogrammed at preset
speeds or run in Auto mode. At low loads or low ambient temperatures, the VFD may
even turn the fan(s) off even when the VFD is running.
.15 The VFD shall store in memory the last 10 alarms. A description of the alarm, and the
date and time of the alarm shall be recorded. The VFD shall include graphing capability
for the last 2 alarms to provide additional diagnostic analysis.
.16 When used with a pumping system, the VFD shall be able to detect no-flow situations,
dry pump conditions, and operation off the end of the pump curve. It shall be
programmable to take appropriate protective action when one of the above situations
is detected.
2.3 INTERFACE FEATURES
.1 Hand, Off and Auto keys shall be provided to start and stop the VFD and determine the
source of the speed reference. It shall be possible to either disable these keys or password
protect them from undesired operation.
.2 There shall be an Info key on the keypad. The Info key shall include on-line context
sensitive assistance for programming and troubleshooting.
.3 The VFD shall be programmable to provide a digital output signal to indicate whether the
VFD is in Hand or Auto mode. This is to alert the Building Automation System whether the
VFD is being controlled locally or by the Building Automation System.
.4 Password protected keypad with alphanumeric, graphical, backlit display can be remotely
mounted. Two levels of password protection shall be provided to guard against
unauthorized parameter changes.
.5 All VFDs shall have the same customer interface. The keypad and display shall be identical
and interchangeable for all sizes of VFDs.
.6 To set up multiple VFDs, it shall be possible to upload all setup parameters to the VFDs
keypad, place that keypad on all other VFDs in turn and download the setup parameters
to each VFD. To facilitate setting up VFDs of various sizes, it shall be possible to download
from the keypad only size independent parameters. Keypad shall provide visual indication
of copy status.
.7 Display shall be programmable to communicate in multiple languages including English,

Spanish, German, French, Chinese, Portuguese, and Danish.
.8 A red FAULT light, a yellow WARNING light and a green POWER-ON light shall be
provided. These indications shall be visible both on the keypad and on the VFD when the
keypad is removed.
.9 A quick setup menu with factory preset typical HVAC parameters shall be provided on the
VFD. The VFD shall also have individual Fan, Pump, and Compressor menus specifically
designed to facilitate start-up of these applications.
.10 A three-feedback PID controller to control the speed of the VFD shall be standard.
.11 This controller shall accept up to three feedback signals. It shall be programmable to
compare the feedback signals to a common setpoint or to individual setpoints and to
automatically select either the maximum or the feedback signal as the controlling signal.
It shall also be possible to calculate the controlling feedback signal as the average of
all feedback signals or the difference between a pair of feedback signals.
.12 The VFD shall be able to apply individual scaling to each feedback signal.
.13 For fan flow tracking applications, the VFD shall be able to calculate the square root of
any or all individual feedback signals so that a pressure sensor can be used to measure
air flow.
.14 The VFDs PID controller shall be able to actively adjust its setpoint based on flow. This
allows the VFD to compensate for a pressure feedback sensor which is located near
the output of the pump rather than out in the controlled system.
.15 The VFD shall have three additional PID controllers which can be used to control
damper and valve positioners in the system and to provide setpoint reset.
.16 Floating point control interface shall be provided to increase/decrease speed in

response to contact closures.
.17 Five simultaneous meter displays shall be available. They shall include at a minimum,
frequency, motor current, motor voltage, VFD output power, VFD output energy, VFD
temperature in degrees, among others.
.18 Programmable Sleep Mode shall be able to stop the VFD. When its output frequency
drops below set sleep level for a specified time, when an external contact commands
that the VFD go into Sleep Mode, or when the VFD detects a no-flow situation, the VFD
may be programmed to stop. When the VFDs speed is being controlled by its PID
controller, it shall be possible to program a wake-up feedback value that will cause the
VFD to start. To avoid excessive starting and stopping of the driven equipment, it shall
be possible to program a minimum run time before sleep mode can be initiated and a
minimum sleep time for the VFD.
.19 A run permissive circuit shall be provided to accept a system ready signal to ensure
that the VFD does not start until dampers or other auxiliary equipment are in the proper
state for VFD operation. The run permissive circuit shall also be capable of initiating an
output run request signal to indicate to the external equipment that the VFD has
received a request to run.
.20 VFD shall be programmable to display feedback signals in appropriate units, such as
inches of water column (in-wg), pressure per square inch (psi) or temperature (/F).
.21 VFD shall be programmable to sense the loss of load. The VFD shall be programmable
to signal this condition via a keypad warning, relay output and/or over the serial
communications bus. To ensure against nuisance indications, this feature must be
based on motor torque, not current, and must include a proof timer to keep brief periods
of no load from falsely triggering this indication.
2.4 STANDARD CONTROL AND MONITORING INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
.1 Four dedicated, programmable digital inputs shall be provided for interfacing with the
systems control and safety interlock circuitry.
.2 Two terminals shall be programmable to act as either as digital outputs or additional digital
inputs.
.3 Two programmable relay outputs, Form C 240 V AC, 2 A, shall be provided for remote
indication of VFD status. Each relay shall have an adjustable on delay / off delay time.
.4 Two programmable analog inputs shall be provided that can be either direct-or-reverse
acting. Each shall be independently selectable to be used with either an analog voltage or
current signal. The maximum and minimum range of each shall be able to be independently
scalable from 0 to 10 V dc and 0 to 20 Ma.
.5 A programmable low-pass filter for either or both of the analog inputs must be included to
compensate for noise.
.6 The VFD shall provide front panel meter displays programmable to show the value of each
analog input signal for system set-up and troubleshooting,
.7 one programmable analog current output (0/4 to 20 mA) shall be provided for indication of
VFD status. This output shall be programmable to show the reference or feedback signal
supplied to the VFD and for VFD output frequency, current and power. It shall be possible
to scale the minimum and maximum values of this output.
.8 It shall be possible through serial bus communications to read the status of all analog and
digital inputs of the VFD.
.9 It shall be possible to command all digital and analog output through the serial
communication bus.
2.5 ADDITIONAL CONTROL AND MONITORING INPUTS AND OUTPUTS TO BE

PROVIDED
.1 It shall be possible to add optional modules to the VFD in the field to expand its analog and
digital inputs and outputs. These modules shall use rigid connectors to plug into the VFDs
control card.
.2 The VFD shall automatically recognize the option module after it is powered up. There shall
be no need to manually configure the module.
.3 Modules may include such items as:
.1 Additional digital outputs, including relay outputs

.2 Additional digital inputs
.3 Additional analog outputs
.4 Additional analog inputs, including Ni or Pt temperature sensor inputs
.4 It shall be possible through serial bus communications to control the status of all analog and
digital outputs of the VFD.
.5 A real-time clock shall be an integral part of the VFD. It shall be possible to use this to
display the current date and time on the VFDs display.
.6 Ten programmable time periods, with individually selectable ON and OFF functions shall
be available. The clock shall also be programmable to control start/stop functions, constant
speeds, PID parameter setpoints and output relays. Is shall be possible to program unique
events that occur only during normal work days, others that occur only on non-work days,
and others that occur on specific days or dates. The manufacturer shall provide free
PC-based software to set up the calendar for this schedule.
.7 All VFD faults shall be time stamped to aid troubleshooting.
.8 It shall be possible to program maintenance reminders based on date and time, VFD
running hours, or VFD operating hours.
.9 The real-time clock shall be able to time and date stamp all faults recorded in the VFD fault
log.
.10 The VFD shall be able to store load profile data to assist in analyzing the system
demand and energy consumption over time.
.11 The VFD shall include a sequential logic controller to provide advanced control interface
capabilities. This shall include:
.1 Comparators for comparing VFD analog values to programmed trigger values

.2 Logic operators to combine up to three logic expressions using Boolean algebra
.3 Delay timers
.4 A 20-step programmable structure
.5 The VFD shall include a Cascade Controller which allows the VFD to operate in closed
loop set point (PID) control mode one motor at a controlled speed and control the
operation of additional constant speed motor starters.
2.6 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
.1 The VFD shall include a standard EIA-485 communications port and capabilities to be
connected to the following serial communication protocols at no additional cost and without
a need to install any additional hardware or software in the VFD:
.1 Johnson Controls Metasys N2

.2 Modbus RTU
.3 Siemens FLN
.4 BACnet MS/TP
.2 Additional boards for the following protocols shall be provided if necessary:
.1 BACnet
.2 Ethernet
.3 DeviceNet
.4 Profibus DP V1
.5 Profinet SRT
.6 Modbus TCP
.7 LonWorks Free Topology (FTP) certified to LonMark standard 3.3
.3 VFD shall have standard USB port for direct connection of Personal Computer (PC) to the
VFD. The manufacturer shall provide no-charge PC software to allow complete setup and
access of the VFD and logs of VFD operation through the USB port. It shall be possible to
communicate to the VFD through this USB port without interrupting VFD communications
to the building management system.
.4 The VFD shall have provisions for an optional 24 V DC back-up power interface to power
the VFDs control card. This is to allow the VFD to continue to communicate to the building
automation system even if power to the VFD is lost.
2.7 ADJUSTMENTS
.1 The VFD shall have a manually adjustable carrier frequency to allow the user to select the
desired operating characteristics. The VFD shall also be programmable to automatically
reduce its carrier frequency to avoid tripping due to thermal loading.
.2 Four independent setups shall be provided. Four preset speeds per setup shall be provided
for a total of 16. Each setup shall have two programmable ramp up and ramp down times.
Acceleration and deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable over the range from 1 to
3,600 seconds.
.3 Each setup shall be programmable for a unique current limit value. If the output current
from the VFD reaches this value, any further attempt to increase the current produced by
the VFD will cause the VFD to reduce its output frequency to reduce the load on the VFD.
If desired, it shall be possible to program a timer which will cause the VFD to trip off after
a programmed time period.
.4 If the VFD trips on one of the following conditions, the VFD shall be programmable for
automatic or manual reset: external interlock, under-voltage, over-voltage, current limit,
over temperature, and VFD overload.
.5 The number of restart attempts shall be selectable from 0 through 20 or infinitely and the
time between attempts shall be adjustable from 0 through 600 seconds.
.6 An automatic start delay may be selected from 0 to 120 seconds. During this delay time,
the VFD shall be programmable to either apply no voltage to the motor or apply a DC
braking current if desired.
.7 Four programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from operating the
load at a speed that causes vibration in the driven equipment shall be provided.
Semi-automatic setting of lockout ranges shall simplify the set-up.
2.8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES TO BE PROVIDED
.1 All optional features shall be built, mounted and tested by the VFD manufacturer. The VFD
manufactures warranty shall apply to the entire assembly as shipped. Packages built by
third parties and do not carry the VFD manufactures warranty shall not be allowed. All
options shall carry a UL / C-UL Enclosed Industrial Control Panel label.
.2 All panels shall be marked for 100,000 amp short circuit current rating.
.3 The enclosure rating of the VFD w/ options shall be consistent with the VFD rating of either
NEMA/UL type 1 or NEMA/UL type 12, as required for the installation location and/or as
called for on the schedule. The package shall include ALL optional devices and shipped
as a complete factory tested assembly.
.4 Three-Contactor bypass shall be provided that allows operation of the motor via line power
in the event of a failure of the VFD. Motor control selection shall be though either a VFD
output contactor or a bypass contactor that are electrically interlocked to ensure that both
contactors are not energized simultaneously. A third contactor, the drive input contactor,
shall be supplied as standard. This allows the powering of the VFD with the motor off or
operating in bypass mode for testing, programming and troubleshooting purposes.
.5 The Three-Contactor bypass shall include the following interface and control features:
.1 Mode selection via a four position DRIVE/OFF/BYPASS/TEST switch.

.2 DRIVE Mode: Both the drive input and output contactors are closed and the motor is
operated via VFD power
.3 OFF mode: DRIVE input, drive output and bypass contactors are all open.
.4 Bypass mode: Bypass contactor is closed and motor is operating from line power.
Both the drive input and drive output contactors are open for servicing of the VFD
without power.
.5 Test mode: Bypass contactor is closed and the motor is operated from line power. The
drive input contactor is closed but the drive output contactor is open. This allows for the
testing and programming of the VFD while the motor is operated via line power.
.6 Contactors shall operate from a 24vdc power supply that shall function off of any two
legs of the AC line and shall maintain power on the loss of any one of the AC lines.
.6 A Bypass pilot light is supplied to indicate that the motor is operating from line power.
.7 Common start/stop command when operating in either Bypass or VFD mode.

.8 Selectable Run Permissive logic shall operate in either VFD or bypass operation. When
activated, any command to start the motor, in either Hand Bypass, Remote Bypass, Hand
VFD or Remote VFD shall not start the motor, but instead close a relay contact that is used
to initiate operation of another device, such as an outside air damper. A contact closure
from this device shall confirm that it is appropriately actuated and the motor shall then start.
.9 Bypass package shall include an External Safety interlock that will disable motor operation
in either bypass or VFD when open.
.10 Fire-mode bypass operation shall be standard. When activated via a contact closure,
the motor shall transfer to bypass (line power) regardless of the mode selected. All
calls to stop the motor shall be ignored. These include the opening of the start
command, an external safety trip or the tripping of the motor overload. Fire-mode
operation will take precedence over all other commands.
.11 The bypass must include a selectable time delay of 0 to 60 seconds before the initiation
of bypass operation. When transferring from VFD to bypass modes, the time delay
starts after the motor has decelerated to zero speed. This delay allows the BAS to
prepare for bypass operation. Bypass packages that do not include a time delay, or do
not include a selectable delay period, will not be acceptable.
.12 Automatic bypass shall be selectable. When active, the motor shall be transferred to
line power on a VFD fault condition. The bypass time delay shall be activate prior to
this transfer to line power to allow the VFD time to attempt to recover from the fault
condition prior to running in bypass.
.1 Main input disconnect shall be provided that removes power from both the bypass and VFD.
Main input motor rated fuses that protect the entire package.
.2 VFD only fast acting input fuses shall be provided. Packages that include only main input
motor rated fusing or circuit breaker are not acceptable.
.3 Overload protection shall be supplied in bypass mode.
.1 This overload shall supply minimum class 20 protection as well as wide adjustable
current setting for complete motor protection when operating on line power. Those
overloads that are not class 20 or current selectable will not be acceptable.
.2 Overload protection shall include phase loss and phase imbalance protection.
.3 For 460V/600V units 75 Hp and below and 208V/230V units 40 Hp and below, low
voltage contactor operation shall be maintained down to 70% of the units nominally
rated voltage, to ensure VFD operation.
.4 For 460V/600V units 75 Hp and below and 208V/230V units 40 Hp and below, the VFD
shall be able to operate the motor at a reduced load with the loss of any one of the
three phases of power. Contactors shall remain closed regardless of which phase is
lost to ensure VFD operation.
.4 Line/load conditioners
.1 VFDs that do not include 5% DC link impedance shall include 5% AC line reactors in
the options enclosure. Lower levels of impedance will not be acceptable.
2.10 SERVICE CONDITIONS
.1 Ambient temperature, continuous, full speed, full load operation:
.1 0 to 40/C (14 to 104/F) on Bypass units

.2 5 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing.
.3 Elevation to 3,300 feet without derating.
.2 AC line voltage variation, -10 to +10% of nominal with full output.
.3 All power and control wiring shall be from the bottom.
.4 All VFDs shall be plenum rated.
3 PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1 The manufacturer shall provide start-up commissioning of the VFD and its optional circuits
by a factory certified service technician who is experienced in start-up and repair services.
Sales personnel and other agents who are not factory certified shall not be acceptable as
commissioning agents. Start-up services shall include checking for verification of proper
operation and installation for the VFD, its options and its interface wiring to the building
automation system.
.2 Harmonic filtering. The VFD supplier shall, with the aid of the buyers detailed electrical
power single line diagram showing all impedances in the power path to the VFDs, perform
an analysis to initially demonstrate the supplied equipment will met the IEEE
recommendations after installation. If, as a result of the analysis, it is determined that
additional filter equipment is required to meet the IEEE recommendations, then the cost of
such equipment shall be included in the drive supplier quotation.
.3 Program the VFD to operate in a manner compatible with the sequence of operation
indicated on the drawings; coordinate the VFD programming with the pump manufacturer
to ensure that the operation of the pumps maintains the flow in the heating loops running
at optimal performance.
.4 At 100% RPM, the pumps shall operate at rated hot water flow. Drives shall be set to
prevent the minimum RPM to drop below 30% of the nominal rating.
.5 Disconnect switches wired between the VFD and the motor shall be provide with auxiliary
contacts which shall be wired into the VFDs safety trip circuitry such that the VFD shall de-
energize when the switch is opened. When the switch is closed the VFD shall energize and
go through normal start-up routines.
3.2 WARRANTY
.1 The complete VFD shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of 36 months from
date of shipment. The warranty shall include parts, labor, travel costs and living expenses
incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory authorized on-site service. The warranty
shall be provided by the VFD manufacturer and not a third party. A written warranty
statement shall be provided with the submittals.
.2 The manufacturer shall offer an extended warranty allowing the VFD warranty to be
extended to up to 6 years.
.3 The manufacturer shall maintain a fully stocked depot within 100 km of the site.
.4 The motors which are connected to the VFD shall be warranted by the VFD manufacturer
against insulation breakdown which is directly attributed to the VFD for a period of 36
months from the date of substantial completion.
CHILLER REPLACEMENT REFRIGERANT MONITORING SYSTEM
1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification is applicable only for reference purposes associated
with the separate price as identified in section 15010. Its requirements will become
applicable only if the current refrigerant monitoring system is not compatible with new
chiller refrigerant and can not accurately detect its presence.
.2 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed
by the requirements of Section 15010.
.3 Coordinate the installation of the refrigeration monitoring system with the current school
BAS.
.4 The operation of the refrigerant monitoring equipment to be interlocked with the

emergency purge fan. Also refer to section 15900.
.1 CSA B52-M1992.
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
.2 Indicate:
.1 Equipment including sensors and controllers

.3 Dimensions, construction details, recommended installation and support
.5 Performance and accuracy.
.1 Data to include:
.1 Description of equipment giving manufacturers name, type and model year.

.1 MSA Chillguard L series, Vulcain.
Project #2015-09
2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 The gas monitoring system shall continuously measure and display the specified gas
concentration. The system shall provide visual indicators when preset limits are
exceeded. Relay output for alarms and control shall be provided.
.2 The system shall include all the required components to make a complete installation
in accordance with the CSA-B52 code, including sensors, visual and audible alarms,
interlocks and wiring.
.3 Number and Types of Monitoring Points
.1 The number and type of monitors shall be as follows:
! R-410a 0-1000 ppm: 1 (one) monitoring point
2.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.1 Stand-alone type with integrated control and sensing modules in a single enclosure.
.2 The unit shall be wall mount type. It shall conform to the following:
.1 Photoacoustic IR sensor
.2 Diffusion operation or pumped with up to 4 sampling points.
.3 20 PPM detection limit
.4 Digital signal processing
.5 Digital display with optional remote display
.6 4-20 mA, 0-10VDC and RS-232 Outputs standard.
.7 Three levels of Alarm and Fault status indicators.
.8 System configured via the front panel keypad.
.9 Enclosure Type - The enclosure shall be a NEMA 4X version.
2.3 OPERATING PRINCIPLE
.1 The principle of operation shall be of the infrared photoacoustic absorption type.
.2 Analyzer Sample
.1 Any version of the analyzer may be configured as a diffusion type monitor or be

equipped with an internal pump and filter that can draw a sample from a distance
of 300 feet. All sample connections shall be on the bottom of the enclosure.
.3 Analyzer Sensitivity
.1 The analyzer limit of detection for all refrigerants shall be 20 PPM.
Project #2015-09
.4 Analyzer Linearity
.1 The analyzer shall be within +/-5 PPM of a linear response in the range of 0-100
ppm and + 5% of full scale in the range of 100-1000 ppm.
.5 Temperature
.1 The system shall operate over the range of 0OC to 45OC.
.6 Stability
.1 The 24 hour zero or span drift must be less than 5 PPM. The long term (1year) zero
drift shall be less than 5 PPM. The long term span drift shall be less 10 PPM.
.7 Calibration of all versions shall be performed using standard RP cylinders and existing
calibration equipment.
2.4 MONITOR UNIT REQUIREMENTS
.1 Readout Displays
.1 A 2 line x 20 character alpha numeric display shall be provided for the purpose of
displaying the gas concentration, diagnostics, set-up and calibration menu.
.2 Visual Alarm Indicators
.1 All alarm indications shall be displayed on the front panel display.
.2 Three separate alarm set point levels shall be provided. The set points shall be
independently adjustable for any value for a given range. The set points shall
provide drive signals to user interface relays. The alarm set points shall have the
capability of providing the user a selection of latching or nonlatching.
.3 Audible Alarm
.1 An audible buzzer is included, it sounds when one of the three preselected alarm
conditions or a trouble condition occurs.
2.5 RELAY OUTPUTS
.1 The alarm set point drive signals shall activate user relays as specified below:
.1 Number of Relays: As a minimum, one relay for each alarm set point level shall be
provided on the control unit.
.2 Contact Rating: All relays shall be Form C, single pole, double throw. Dry contacts
shall be rated for 5 amps resistive at 240 VAC.
.3 Contact Selection: The contacts shall be capable of being selected normally

energized or non-energized, latching or non-latching.
Project #2015-09
.4 The Trouble (Fault) relay is normally energized and closed for normal conditions.
If a system fault is detected the Trouble relay will de-energize.
.5 Malfunction Indication: The readout display described above shall display full
diagnostics when a fault exists without the use of codes.
2.6 FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
.1 The function listed in this paragraph shall be accomplished using a keypad readily
accessible on the front panel. No tool or special adapters shall be used for:
.1 Display of alarm set point level on the readout display

.2 Resetting any alarm set point
.3 Zero and Span calibration adjustments.
.2 System must be capable of allowing the user, through the front panel keypad, to
determine which of the four (4) points are to be active in the sequencer.
.3 A method of detecting a flow blockage shall be provided.
2.7 SAMPLE GAS FILTER
.1 There shall be an internal sample gas filter on pumped units. This filter shall be easily
serviced or replaced.
2.8 OUTPUT SIGNALS
.1 The output signal shall be compatible with the existing building BAS.
.2 The output signal shall have the following features:
.1 Scalable to 1-10% of the full scale. The default shall be 100% full scale.
.2 The output shall be sourcing current to module ground.
.3 For refrigerants, software will have a dead-banding feature not allowing a value less
than 10 PPM to be displayed on the front panel.
.4 RS-485 using ModBus communication protocol will be included in all sensor
modules.
.5 The control modules will have an ATO output option of RS-232, 4-20mA, or 0-
10VDC.
2.9 SYSTEM POWER REQUIREMENTS:
.1 Standard at 24 VDC or VAC.
2.10 SEQUENCER PROGRAMMING LIMITS
.1 The sequencer system parameters shall be within the following limits.
.1 Sample Tubing Connection - Fittings suitable for the connection of 1/4" O.D. tubing
Project #2015-09
shall be provided on the bottom of the enclosure for the purposes of connection,
sample lines, calibration gases and exhaust.
.2 Alarm - Three alarm set point levels shall be provided for each sample location. Any
alarm set point shall be capable of activating one relay (SPDT, 8 amp at120 VAC,
resistive).
.3 Indicating Lights - All indications related to the Multi Point Sequencer shall appear
on the front panel display.
.4 Software shall be installed in the pumped versions to allow the user to enter the
station dwell time to allow for the line length and sample transport time for each
sensor.
2.11 SAMPLE HANDLING
.1 The sample handling system shall conform to the paragraphs below:
.1 Sample Line Compatibility - The system shall be capable of drawing a sample

through 1/8" I.D. tubing for a distance of 300 feet.
.2 Sequencer Operation - A sample shall be drawn from the next line in sequence
regardless of which location is being analyzed.
.3 Sample Conditioning - The system shall provide adequate filtration of the sample
suitable to protect the analyzer.
.4 Exhaust - Exhaust fitting shall be provided on the bottom of the enclosure for the
purpose of attaching lines to the exhaust and bypass flows.
2.12 MAXIMUM SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1 The system shall require no periodic maintenance other than periodic checking.
Periodic checking or adjustments of the unit shall be capable of being accomplished by
one person at the unit location.
2.13 MANUFACTURER CAPABILITY REQUIREMENTS
.1 As a minimum, the Gas Monitoring Equipment manufacturer must meet the following
requirements:
.1 Be capable of supplying all equipment used to check or calibrate the unit
.2 Be capable of providing on site service with factory trained personnel
.3 Be capable of providing start-up assistance and training for the owner / operator
.4 The Gas Monitoring System shall be tested, approved, and certified for electrical
safety.
Project #2015-09
.1 Provide a factory-trained service technician without additional charge to set up, adjust
and certify the monitoring system.
.2 The manufacturer shall provide instruction to the owner's personnel on the operation
startup and shall continue for a period of one year. Manufacturers warranty shall include
all parts and labour to install parts.
3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL


.3 Connect the refrigerant monitoring system unit to the existing power source and ensure
that it is interlocked with the purge exhaust fan and motorized dampers and boilers
burners.
.4 Connect the system to the audio-visual alarms located outside of all entrances to the
chiller room and inside the chiller room.
Project #2015-09
CHILLER REPLACEMENT DIGITAL CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed
by the requirements outlined in Section 15010 of the specification.
.1 JBS Services
1.3 GENERAL INTENT
.1 The general outline of the scope of work includes but is not limited to the following:
.1 Remove all pneumatic (where applicable) and redundant electric control devices,
sensors, operators and controllers serving the existing cooling plant. Work includes
removal of all redundant pneumatic tubing and wiring.
.2 Remove all existing obsolete controllers and wiring.
.3 Expand the existing BAS system, add new equipment as required to cover the
operation of the new cooling plant, (including existing cooling tower) in accordance
with the sequences of operation indicated on the drawings and the materials
specified herein.
.4 The work shall include all new sensors, operators, controllers and other devices, all
hardware and software required to make a complete operational system connected
to the Board main server, including upgrade of the graphical display to include:
! the operation of the new chiller

! The operation of the existing cooling tower and its VFD
! The operation of the chilled water and condenser water pumps.
! The status of the refrigerant monitoring equipment.
.5 Provide all necessary power wiring and hardware to complete the entire project,
including but not limited to, wiring, fittings, connectors, conduits, hangers/supports,
box covers and all other accessories required to ensure complete, safe and fully
operational systems. This shall include the power wiring for all the equipment.
.6 Make good all surfaces affected by the work.
.2 Arrange for Electrical Authority inspection of all electrical work. Submit the Certificate
of Inspection and Product Approval Certificate with the as-built documentation.
.1 Installer and Manufacturer Qualifications
.1 Installer shall have an established working relationship with Control System
Project #2015-09
Manufacturer.
.2 Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer's control

system training. Upon request, Installer shall present record of completed training
including course outlines.
.3 The Building Automation System supplier shall be a subcontractor to General

Contractor who shall be responsible for the complete installation of the controls
devices and wiring and guarantee its proper function.
.4 The new controls sensors and devices shall be supplied and installed by one of the
two suppliers listed in these specifications. No other suppliers are acceptable,
General Contractors shall name the Control supplier at the time of tender.
1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS
.1 Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the most restrictive of local,
provincial, and federal authorities' codes and ordinances or these plans and
specifications. As a minimum, the installation shall comply with current editions in effect
30 days prior to receipt of bids of the following codes:
.1 National Electric Code (NEC)

.2 ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004: Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation
and Control Systems (BACNET)
1.6 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.1 Performance Standards. System shall conform to the following minimum standards over
network connections. Systems shall be tested using manufacturer's recommended
hardware and software for operator workstation (server and browser for web-based
systems).
.2 Graphic Display. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall display with current data within
10 sec.
.3 Graphic Refresh. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall update with current data within
8 sec. and shall automatically refresh every 15 sec.
.4 Configuration and Tuning Screens. Screens used for configuring, calibrating, or tuning
points, PID loops, and similar control logic shall automatically refresh within 6 sec.
.5 Object Command. Devices shall react to command of a Digital object within 2 sec.
Devices shall begin reacting to command of an analog object within 2 sec.
.6 Alarm Response Time. An object that goes into alarm shall be annunciated at the
workstation within 15 sec.
.7 Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of

running as often as once every 5 sec. Select execution times consistent with the
mechanical process under control.
Project #2015-09
.8 Performance. Programmable controllers shall be able to completely execute DDC PID

control loops at a frequency adjustable down to once per sec. Select execution times
consistent with the mechanical process under control.
.9 Multiple Alarm Annunciation. Each workstation on the network shall receive alarms
within 5 sec of other workstations.
.10 Reporting Accuracy. System shall report values with minimum end-to-end accuracy
listed in Table 1.
.11 Control Stability and Accuracy. Control loops shall maintain measured variable at
setpoint within tolerances listed in Table 2.
Table 1 - Reporting Accuracy
Measured Variable Reported Accuracy

Water Temperature 0.5C (1F)
Delta-T 0.15C (0.25F)
Water Flow 2% of full scale
1.7 SUBMITTALS
.1 Provide three copies of shop drawings and other submittals on hardware, software, and
equipment to be installed or furnished. Begin no work until submittals have been
reviewed for conformity with design intent. Provide drawings as AutoCAD 2004 (or
newer) compatible files on magnetic or optical disk (file format: .DWG, .DXF, .VSD, or
comparable) and 3 prints of each drawing on 11" x 17" paper. When manufacturer's cut
sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, clearly indicate
applicable data by highlighting or by other means. Clearly reference covered
specification and drawing on each submittal. General catalogs shall not be accepted as
cut sheets to fulfill submittal requirements. Select and show submittal quantities
appropriate to scope of work.
.2 Submittal approval does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to supply sufficient

quantities to complete work. Provide submittals within 2 weeks of contract award on the
following:
.3 Direct Digital Control System Hardware - Distributed
.1 Complete bill of materials indicating quantity, manufacturer, model number, and

relevant technical data of equipment to be used.
.2 Manufacturer's description and technical data such as performance curves, product

specifications, and installation and maintenance instructions for items listed below
and for relevant items not listed below:
! Direct digital controllers (controller panels)
Project #2015-09
! Transducers and transmitters

! Sensors (include accuracy data)
! Actuators
! Valves
! Relays
! Electrical and electro-pneumatic switches
! Control panels
! Power supplies
! Batteries
! Operator interface equipment
! Wiring
! Wiring diagrams and layouts for each control panel. Show termination numbers.
wire types.
.4 Central System Hardware and Software
.1 Web server, software, local workstation: existing to remain. Expand hardware and
modify software as required to accommodate the new sensors and controlled
devices.
.2 Controlled Systems

wire types.
! Schematic diagram of each controlled system. Label control points with point
names. Graphically show locations of control elements.
! Schematic wiring diagram of each controlled system. Label control elements
and terminals. Where a control element is also shown on control system
schematic, use the same name.
! Instrumentation list (Bill of Materials) for each controlled system. List each
control system element in a table. Show element name, type of device,
manufacturer, model number, and product data sheet number.
! Complete description of control system operation including sequences of
operation. Include and reference schematic diagram of controlled system. List
I/O points and software points specified. Indicate alarmed and trended points.
! Description of process, report formats, and checklists to be used in Control
System Demonstration and Acceptance.
! BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for each
submitted type of controller and operator interface.
.5 Schedules
.1 Schedule of work provided within one month of contract award, indicating:
! Intended sequence of work items

! Start date of each work item
! Duration of each work item
! Planned delivery dates for ordered material and equipment and expected lead
times
! Milestones indicating possible restraints on work by other trades or situations
Project #2015-09
! Monthly written status reports indicating work completed and revisions to

expected delivery dates. Include updated schedule of work.
1.8 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION
.1 Project Record Documents. Submit three copies of record (as-built) documents upon
completion of installation for approval prior to final completion. Submittal shall consist
of:
.1 Project Record Drawings. As-built versions of submittal shop drawings provided as

AutoCAD 2004 (or newer) compatible files on magnetic or optical disk (file format:
.DWG, .DXF, .VSD, or comparable) and 6 prints of each drawing on 11" x 17"
paper.
.2 Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. Completed versions of reports,

checklists, and trend logs used to meet requirements of Control System
Demonstration and Acceptance.
.3 Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. Printed, electronic, or online help

documentation of the following:
! As-built versions of submittal product data.

! Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of installing contractors and service
representatives for equipment and control systems.
! Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems: logging on
and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding
computer control, and changing setpoints and variables.
! Programming manual or set of manuals with description of programming
language and syntax, of statements for algorithms and calculations used, of
point database creation and modification, of program creation and modification,
and of editor use.
! Engineering installation, and maintenance manual or set of manuals that
explains how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; how
to perform preventive maintenance and calibration; how to debug hardware
problems; and how to repair or replace hardware.
! Documentation of programs created using custom programming language
including setpoints, tuning parameters, and object database. Electronic copies
of programs shall meet this requirement if control logic, setpoints, tuning
parameters, and objects can be viewed using furnished programming tools.
! Graphic files, programs, and database on magnetic or optical media.
! List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers.
! Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance
information for furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment
and sensors.
! Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating
systems, custom programming language, operator workstation or web server
software, and graphics software.
! Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents for equipment and systems.
! Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components,
including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time
Project #2015-09
between tasks; and task descriptions.
.4 Training Materials: Provide course outline and materials for each class at least two
weeks before first class. Training shall be furnished via instructor-led sessions,
computer-based training, or web-based training. Consultant will modify course
outlines and materials if necessary to meet Board's needs. Consultant will review
and approve course outlines and materials at least three weeks before first class.
1.9 WARRANTY
.1 Warrant work as follows:
.1 Warrant labor and materials for specified control system free from defects for a
period of 24 months after final acceptance. Control system failures during warranty
period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in
service to the Board. Respond during normal business hours within 24 hours of
Board's warranty service request.
.2 Work shall have a single warranty date, even if Board receives beneficial use due
to early system start-up. If specified work is split into multiple contracts or a
multi-phase contract, each contract or phase shall have a separate warranty start
date and period.
.3 If Consultant determines that equipment and systems operate satisfactorily at the

end of final start-up, testing, and commissioning phase, Consultant will certify in
writing that control system operation has been tested and accepted in accordance
with the terms of this specification. Date of acceptance shall begin warranty period.
.4 Provide updates to operator workstation or web server software, project-specific

software, graphic software, database software, and firmware that resolve
Contractor-identified software deficiencies at no charge during warranty period. If
available, The Board can purchase in-warranty service agreement to receive
upgrades for functional enhancements associated with above-mentioned items. Do
not install updates or upgrades without Board's written authorization.
1.10 PROPRIETARY OF MATERIAL
.1 Project-specific software and documentation shall become Board's property. This

includes, but is not limited to:
.1 Graphics
.2 Record drawings
.3 Database
.4 Application programming code
.5 Documentation
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Project #2015-09
.1 Use new products the manufacturer is currently manufacturing and selling for use in
new installations. Do not use this installation as a product test site unless explicitly
approved in writing by the Board. Spare parts shall be available for at least five years
after completion of this contract.
2.2 COMMUNICATION
.1 Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers shall
comprise a BACnet internetwork. Controller and operator interface communication shall
conform to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004, BACnet.
.2 Install new wiring and network devices as required to provide a complete and workable
control network. Use existing Ethernet backbone for network segments marked
"existing" on project drawings.
.3 Each controller shall have a communication port for temporary connection to a laptop
computer or other operator interface. Connection shall support memory downloads and
other commissioning and troubleshooting operations.
.4 Internetwork operator interface and value passing shall be transparent to internetwork

architecture.
.5 An operator interface connected to a controller shall allow the operator to interface with
each internetwork controller as if directly connected. Controller information such as
data, status, and control algorithms shall be viewable and editable from each
internetwork controller.
.6 Inputs, outputs, and control variables used to integrate control strategies across multiple
controllers shall be readable by each controller on the internetwork. Program and test
all cross-controller links required to execute control strategies specified herein and
shown on the drawings. An authorized operator shall be able to edit cross-controller
links by typing a standard object address or by using a point-and-click interface.
.7 Controllers with real-time clocks shall use the BACnet Time Synchronization service.
System shall automatically synchronize system clocks daily from an
operator-designated controller via the internetwork. If applicable, system shall
automatically adjust for daylight saving and standard time.
.8 System shall be expandable to at least twice the required input and output objects with
additional controllers, associated devices, and wiring.
2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE
.1 PDSB Central Server
.1 New site databases and graphics files shall be installed on the designated central
PDSB central server located in Mississauga, Ontario.
.2 Provide written notification to the PDSB representative prior to installing new site
databases to the PDSB server. Do not install software or make any changes to the
Project #2015-09
server without the written consent of the PDSB representative.
.3 Set up and configure the server software and area routers (where required) to allow
for seamless access to the site BAS via the PDSB WAN.
.4 Coordinate all activities related to the central server with the PDSB representatives.
Provide the PDSB with detailed documentation related to any changes made to the
server software, settings or protocols.
.2 Local Service Ports
.1 Every DDC panel shall be provided with a local network access port to connect to
laptop computer. A user connected to the local access port shall have the same
level of system access and functionality as being connected to the site workstation
PC.
.2 Where BAS points (4 or more) are located in a mechanical room that does not have
a local BAS panel installed, a remote network access port shall be provided. The
access port shall be installed in a hinged metal enclosure with key-lock set and
lamicoid ID label.
.3 Communication.
.1 Web server or workstation and controllers shall communicate using BACnet

protocol. Web server or workstation and control network backbone shall
communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and
BACnet/IP addressing as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex J.
2.4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE.
.1 Operating System. Web server shall have an industry-standard professional-grade

operating system. Acceptable systems include Microsoft Vista, Microsoft Windows XP
Pro, Red Hat Linux, or Sun Solaris.
.2 System Graphics. Operator interface shall be graphically based and shall include at
least one graphic per piece of equipment or occupied zone, graphics for each chilled
water and hot water system, and graphics that summarize conditions on each floor of
each building included in this contract. Indicate thermal comfort on floor plan summary
graphics using dynamic colors to represent zone temperature relative to zone setpoint.
.3 Functionality. Graphics shall allow operator to monitor system status, to view a

summary of the most important data for each controlled zone or piece of equipment, to
use point-and-click navigation between zones or equipment, and to edit setpoints and
other specified parameters.
.4 Animation. Graphics shall be able to animate by displaying different image files for
changed object status.
.5 Alarm Indication. Indicate areas or equipment in an alarm condition using color or other
visual indicator.
Project #2015-09
.6 Format. Graphics shall be saved in an industry-standard format such as BMP, JPEG,

PNG, or GIF. Web-based system graphics shall be viewable on browsers compatible
with World Wide Web Consortium browser standards. Web graphic format shall require
no plug-in (such as HTML and JavaScript) or shall only require widely available no-cost
plug-ins (such as Active-X and Macromedia Flash).
.7 System Tools. System shall provide the following functionality to authorized operators
as an integral part of the operator interface or as stand-alone software programs. If
furnished as part of the interface, the tool shall be available from each workstation or
web browser interface. If furnished as a stand-alone program, software shall be
installable on standard IBM-compatible PCs with no limit on the number of copies that
can be installed under the system license.
.8 Automatic System Database Configuration. Each workstation or web server shall store
on its hard disk a copy of the current system database, including controller firmware and
software. Stored database shall be automatically updated with each system
configuration or controller firmware or software change.
.9 Controller Memory Download. Operators shall be able to download memory from the
system database to each controller.
.10 System Configuration. Operators shall be able to configure the system.
.11 Online Help. Context-sensitive online help for each tool shall assist operators in
operating and editing the system.
.12 Security. System shall require a user name and password to view, edit, add, or
delete data.
.13 Operator Access. Each user name and password combination shall define
accessible viewing, editing, adding, and deleting functions in each system
application, editor, and object.
.14 Automatic Log Out. Automatically log out each operator if no keyboard or mouse
activity is detected. Operators shall be able to adjust automatic log out delay.
.15 Encrypted Security Data. Store system security data including operator passwords
in an encrypted format. System shall not display operator passwords.
.16 System Diagnostics. System shall automatically monitor controller and I/O point
operation. System shall annunciate controller failure and I/O point locking (manual
overriding to a fixed value).
.17 Alarm Processing. System input and status objects shall be configurable to alarm
on departing from and on returning to normal state. Operator shall be able to enable
or disable each alarm and to configure alarm limits, alarm limit differentials, alarm
states, and alarm reactions for each system object. Configure and enable alarm
points as specified herein and indicated in the sequences of operation shown on the
Project #2015-09
drawings. Alarms shall be BACnet alarm objects and shall use BACnet alarm
services.
.18 Alarm Messages. Alarm messages shall use an English language descriptor without
acronyms or mnemonics to describe alarm source, location, and nature.
.19 Alarm Reactions. Operator shall be able to configure (by object) actions workstation
or web server shall initiate on receipt of each alarm. As a minimum, workstation or
web server shall be able to log, print, start programs, display messages, send
e-mail, send page, and audibly annunciate.
.20 Alarm Maintenance. Operators shall be able to view system alarms and changes
of state chronologically, to acknowledge and delete alarms, and to archive closed
alarms to the workstation or web server hard disk from each workstation or web
browser interface.
.21 Trend Configuration. Operator shall be able to configure trend sample or change
of value (COV) interval, start time, and stop time for each system data object and
shall be able to retrieve data for use in spreadsheets and standard database
programs. Controller shall sample and store trend data and shall be able to archive
data to the hard disk.. Trends shall be BACnet trend objects.
.22 Object and Property Status and Control. Operator shall be able to view, and to edit
if applicable, the status of each system object and property by menu, on graphics,
or through custom programs.
.23 Reports and Logs. Operator shall be able to select, to modify, to create, and to print
reports and logs. Operator shall be able to store report data in a format accessible
by standard spreadsheet and word processing programs.
.24 Standard Reports. Furnish the following standard system reports:
.1 Objects. System objects and current values filtered by object type, by status (in
alarm, locked, normal), by equipment, by geographic location, or by combination of
filter criteria.
.2 Alarm Summary. Current alarms and closed alarms. System shall retain closed
alarms for an adjustable period.
.3 Logs. System shall log the following to a database or text file and shall retain data
for an adjustable period:
.4 Alarm History.
.5 Trend Data. Operator shall be able to select trends to be logged.
.25 Operator Activity. At a minimum, system shall log operator log in and log out, control
parameter changes, schedule changes, and alarm acknowledgment and deletion.
System shall date and time stamp logged activity.
Project #2015-09
.26 Graphics Generation. Graphically based tools and documentation shall allow
Operator to edit system graphics, to create graphics, and to integrate graphics into
the system. Operator shall be able to add analog and Digital values, dynamic text,
static text, and animation files to a background graphic using a mouse.
.27 Graphics Library. Complete library of standard HVAC equipment graphics shall
include equipment such as chillers, boilers, air handlers, terminals, fan coils, and
unit ventilators. Library shall include standard symbols for other equipment including
fans, pumps, coils, valves, piping, dampers, and ductwork. Library graphic file
format shall be compatible with graphics generation tools.
.28 Custom Application Programming. Operator shall be able to create, edit, debug, and
download custom programs. System shall be fully operable while custom programs
are edited, compiled, and downloaded. Programming language shall have the
following features:
.1 Language. Language shall be graphically based or English language oriented. If

graphically based, language shall use function blocks arranged in a logic diagram
that clearly shows control logic flow. Function blocks shall directly provide functions
listed below, and operators shall be able to create custom or compound function
blocks. If English language oriented, language shall be based on the syntax of
BASIC, FORTRAN, C, or PASCAL, and shall allow for free-form programming that
is not column-oriented or "fill-in-the-blanks."
.2 Programming Environment. Tool shall provide a full-screen,

cursor-and-mouse-driven programming environment that incorporates word
processing features such as cut and paste. Operators shall be able to insert, add,
modify, and delete custom programming code, and to copy blocks of code to a file
library for reuse in other control programs.
.3 Independent Program Modules. Operator shall be able to develop independently

executing program modules that can disable, enable and exchange data with other
program modules.
.4 Debugging and Simulation. Operator shall be able to step through the program
observing intermediate values and results. Operator shall be able to adjust input
variables to simulate actual operating conditions. Operator shall be able to adjust
each step's time increment to observe operation of delays, integrators, and other
time-sensitive control logic. Debugger shall provide error messages for syntax and
for execution errors.
.5 Conditional Statements. Operator shall be able to program conditional logic using

compound Boolean (AND, OR, and NOT) and relational (EQUAL, LESS THAN,
GREATER THAN, NOT EQUAL) comparisons.
.6 Mathematical Functions. Language shall support floating-point addition, subtraction,

multiplication, division, and square root operations, as well as absolute value
calculation and programmatic selection of minimum and maximum values from a
list of values.
Project #2015-09
.7 Variables: Operator shall be able to use variable values in program conditional
statements and mathematical functions.
.8 Time Variables. Operator shall be able to use predefined variables to represent time
of day, day of the week, month of the year, and date. Other predefined variables or
simple control logic shall provide elapsed time in seconds, minutes, hours, and
days. Operator shall be able to start, stop, and reset elapsed time variables using
the program language.
.9 System Variables. Operator shall be able to use predefined variables to represent

status and results of Controller Software and shall be able to enable, disable, and
change setpoints of Controller Software as described in Controller Software section.
.29 Portable Operator's Terminal. Provide all necessary software to configure an

IBM-compatible laptop computer for use as a Portable Operator's Terminal.
Operator shall be able to connect configured Terminal to the system network or
directly to each controller for programming, setting up, and troubleshooting.
.30 BACnet. Web server or workstation shall have demonstrated interoperability during
at least one BMA Interoperability Workshop and shall substantially conform to
BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS) device profile as specified in
ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2001, BACnet Annex L.
2.5 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE
.1 Building and energy management application software shall reside and operate in
system controllers. Applications shall be editable through operator workstation or web
browser interface.
.2 Scheduling. System shall provide the following schedule options as a minimum:
.1 Weekly. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. Each schedule shall
be able to include up to 5 occupied periods (5 start-stop pairs or 10 events).
.2 Exception. Operator shall be able to designate an exception schedule for each of

the next 365 days. After an exception schedule has executed, system shall discard
and replace exception schedule with standard schedule for that day of the week.
.3 Holiday. Operator shall be able to define 24 special or holiday schedules of varying

length on a scheduling calendar that repeats each year.
.3 System Coordination. Operator shall be able to group related equipment based on

function and location and to use these groups for scheduling and other applications.
.4 Remote Communication. System shall automatically contact operator workstation or

server on receipt of critical alarms. If no network connection is available, system shall
use a modem connection.
Project #2015-09
.5 PID Control. System shall provide direct- and reverse-acting PID (proportional, integral,
derivative) algorithms. Each algorithm shall have anti-windup and selectable controlled
variable, setpoint, and PID gains. Each algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog
value that can be used to position an output or to stage a series of outputs.
.6 Staggered Start. System shall stagger controlled equipment restart after power outage.
Operator shall be able to adjust equipment restart order and time delay between
equipment restarts.
2.6 CONTROLLERS
.1 General. Provide Building Controllers (BC), Advanced Application Controllers (AAC),

Application Specific Controllers (ASC), Smart Actuators (SA), and Smart Sensors (SS)
as required to achieve performance specified herein and indicated on the drawings.
Every device in the system which executes control logic and directly controls HVAC
equipment must conform to a standard BACnet Device profile as specified in
ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L. Unless otherwise specified, hardwired
actuators and sensors may be used in lieu of BACnet Smart Actuators and Smart
Sensors.
2.7 BACNET.
.1 Building Controllers (BCs). Each BC shall conform to BACnet Building Controller (B-BC)
device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L and shall be
listed as a certified B-BC in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.
.2 Advanced Application Controllers (AACs). Each AAC shall conform to BACnet

Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC) device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE
135-2004, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-AAC in the BACnet
Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.
.3 Application Specific Controllers (ASCs). Each ASC shall conform to BACnet Application
Specific Controller (B-ASC) device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004,
BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-ASC in the BACnet Testing
Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.
.4 Smart Actuators (SAs). Each SA shall conform to BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA) device
a certified B-SA in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.
.5 Smart Sensors (SSs). Each SS shall conform to BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS) device
a certified B-SS in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.
2.8 BACNET COMMUNICATION.
.1 Each BC shall reside on or be connected to a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3

(Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and BACnet/IP addressing.
.2 BACnet routing shall be performed by BCs or other BACnet device routers as
Project #2015-09
necessary to connect BCs to networks of AACs and ASCs.
.3 Each AAC shall reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data
network using the ARCNET or MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.
.4 Each ASC shall reside on a BACnet network using the ARCNET or MS/TP Data
.5 Each SA shall reside on a BACnet network using the ARCNET or MS/TP Data
.6 Each SS shall reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data
network using ARCNET or MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.
2.9 COMMUNICATION.
.1 Service Port. Each controller shall provide a service communication port for connection
to a Portable Operator's Terminal. Connection shall be extended to space temperature
sensor ports where shown on drawings.
.1 Signal Management. BC and ASC operating systems shall manage input and output
communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object
information and to allow for central monitoring and alarms.
.2 Data Sharing. Each BC and AAC shall share data as required with each networked
BC and AAC.
.3 Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for anticipated ambient

conditions.
.4 Controllers used outdoors or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted in

waterproof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at -29/C to 60/C (-20/F to
140/F).
.5 Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust-protective

enclosures and shall be rated for operation at 0/C to 50/C (32/F to 120/F).
.6 Real-Time Clock. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.
2.10 SERVICEABILITY.
.1 Controllers shall have diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor.
.2 Wires shall be connected to a field-removable modular terminal strip or to a termination

card connected by a ribbon cable.
.3 Each BC and AAC shall continually check its processor and memory circuit status and
shall generate an alarm on abnormal operation. System shall continuously check
Project #2015-09
controller network and generate alarm for each controller that fails to respond.
2.11 MEMORY.
.1 Controller memory shall support operating system, database, and programming

requirements.
.2 Each BC and AAC shall retain BIOS and application programming for at least 72 hours
in the event of power loss.
.3 Each ASC and SA shall use nonvolatile memory and shall retain BIOS and application
programming in the event of power loss. System shall automatically download dynamic
control parameters following power loss.
.4 Each controller shall have a min. 25% spare memory to allow for future expansion.
.5 Immunity to Power and Noise. Controllers shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of
nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal
voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from
keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).
.6 Transformer. ASC power supply shall be fused or current limiting and shall be rated at
a minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption.
2.12 INPUT AND OUTPUT INTERFACE
.1 General. Hard-wire input and output points to BCs, AACs, ASCs, or SAS.
.2 Protection. Shorting an input or output point to itself, to another point, or to ground shall
cause no controller damage. Input or output point contact with up to 24 V for any
duration shall cause no controller damage.
.3 Digital Inputs. Digital inputs shall monitor the on and off signal from a remote device.
Digital inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 mA and shall be protected
against contact bounce and noise. Digital inputs shall sense dry contact closure without
application of power external to the controller.
.4 Pulse Accumulation Inputs. Pulse accumulation inputs shall conform to Digital input
requirements and shall accumulate up to 10 pulses per second.
.5 Analog Inputs. Analog inputs shall monitor low-voltage (0-10 Vdc), current (4-20 mA),
or resistance (thermistor or RTD) signals. Analog inputs shall be compatible with and
field configurable to commonly available sensing devices.
.6 Digital Outputs. Digital outputs shall send an on-or-off signal for on and off control.
Building Controller Digital outputs shall have three-position (on-off-auto) override
switches and status lights. Outputs shall be selectable for normally open or normally
closed operation.
.7 Analog Outputs. Analog outputs shall send a modulating 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA signal
Project #2015-09
as required to properly control output devices. Each Building Controller analog output
shall have a two-position (auto-manual) switch, a manually adjustable potentiometer,
and status lights. Analog outputs shall not drift more than 0.4% of range annually.
.8 Tri-State Outputs. Control three-point floating electronic actuators without feedback with
tri-state outputs (two coordinated Digital outputs). Tri-State outputs may be used to
provide analog output control in zone control and terminal unit control applications such
as VAV terminal units, duct-mounted heating coils, and zone dampers.
.9 Universal Inputs and Outputs. Inputs and outputs that can be designated as either
Digital or analog in software shall conform to the provisions of this section that are
appropriate for their designated use.
2.13 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING
.1 Power Supplies. Control transformers shall be UL listed. Furnish Class 2 current-limiting

type or furnish over-current protection in primary and secondary circuits for Class 2
service in accordance with NEC requirements. Limit connected loads to 80% of rated
capacity.
.2 DC power supply output shall match output current and voltage requirements. Unit shall
be full-wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak-to-peak.
Regulation shall be 1.0% line and load combined, with 100-microsecond response time
for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage and over-current protection
and shall be able to withstand 150% current overload for at least three seconds without
trip-out or failure.
.3 Unit shall operate between 0/C and 50/C (32/F and 120/F). EM/RF shall meet FCC
Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B and MILSTD 810C for shock and vibration.
.4 Line voltage units shall be UL recognized and CSA listed.
2.14 POWER LINE FILTERING.
.1 Provide internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations
and controllers. Surge protection shall have:
.1 Dielectric strength of 1000 V minimum

.2 Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less
.3 Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greater
.4 Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or greater at 40-100 Hz
2.15 CONTROL DEVICES AND SENSORS
.1 Space Temperature Sensors.
.1 Mount sensors at a height of 5'-6" above the finished floor. Unless indicated
otherwise, mount new sensors where the old pneumatic sensors were located.
.2 End-to-end accuracy +/- 0.3OC over the entire operating range.
Project #2015-09
.3 Equipment supplied by the unit ventilator manufacturer and installed by the controls
sub-contractor.
.4 Do not mount sensors on outside walls or other locations influenced by external

thermal sources (e.g. computers, boiler rooms ).
.2 Immersion Temperature Sensors
.1 Use immersion temperature sensors with thermwells for all applications where a
temperature of a fluid in a pipe is being sensed.
.2 Provide well-mounted water temperature sensors with the following minimum

characteristics:
! The sensors shall be 10k ohm thermistor encapsulated in a 6mm OD, 50m long
probe, with screw fitting for insertion into a standard thermowell.
! Operating range -10 to +100 degrees C.
! End-to-end accuracy +/- 0.3 deg. C over the entire operating range.
! The sensors shall be complete with brass thermowell. Provide a stainless steel
thermowell where exposed to corrosive liquids.
.3 Use conductive gel when mounting the sensor in the thermowell
.4 The sensors to be mounted on insulated piping shall be installed clear of the

insulation.
.3 Current Transmitters.
.1 AC current transmitters shall be self-powered, combination split-core current

transformer type with built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifier with 4-20 mA
two-wire output. Full-scale unit ranges shall be 10 A, 20 A, 50 A, 100 A, 150 A, and
200 A, with internal zero and span adjustment. Unit accuracy shall be 1% full-scale
at 500 ohm maximum burden.
.2 Transmitter shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be

UL/CSA recognized.
.3 Unit shall be split-core type for clamp-on installation on existing wiring.
.4 Current Transformers.
.1 AC current transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized and shall be completely

encased (except for terminals) in approved plastic material.
.2 Transformers shall be available in various current ratios and shall be selected for
Project #2015-09
1% accuracy at 5 A full-scale output.
.3 Use fixed-core transformers for new wiring installation and split-core transformers
for existing wiring installation.
.5 Voltage Transmitters.
.1 AC voltage transmitters shall be self-powered single-loop (two-wire) type, 4-20 mA

output with zero and span adjustment.
.2 Adjustable full-scale unit ranges shall be 100-130 Vac, 200-250 Vac, 250-330 Vac,
and 400-600 Vac. Unit accuracy shall be 1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum
burden.
.3 Transmitters shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be

UL/CSA recognized at 600 Vac rating.
.6 Voltage Transformers.
.1 AC voltage transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized, 600 Vac rated, and shall
have built-in fuse protection.
.2 Transformers shall be suitable for ambient temperatures of 4/C-55/C (40/F-130/F)

and shall provide 0.5% accuracy at 24 Vac and 5 VA load.
.3 Windings (except for terminals) shall be completely enclosed with metal or plastic.
.7 Current Switches.
.1 Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip

current. Select switches to match application current and DDC system output
requirements.
.8 Current Sensors (Analog)
.1 Current sensors (CT) shall be used for status monitoring of all motor-driven
equipment, where specified.
.2 Technical Performance Output should be only 4-20mA only. Voltage output will
not be accepted. End-to-end accuracy +/- 1% of full scale at each range.
.3 The current sensors shall be mounted inside the starter cabinets whenever
possible. If this is not possible due to space limitation, provide an enclosure to
house the sensor.
.9 Status Relays (Solid State)
.1 The status relays shall be mounted inside newly provided enclosures mounted near
Project #2015-09
the respective equipment starter cabinets.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Omron
.10 Firestopping and Smoke Seal Materials
.1 Asbestos-free elastomeric materials tested, listed and labelled by ULC in

accordance with CAN4-S115-M85, for installation in U.L.C. designated firestopping
and smoke seal Systems. These Systems shall provide a positive fire, water and
smoke seal and a fire- resistance rating (flame, smoke hose stream and
temperature) not less than the fire resistance rating of surrounding construction.
.2 Materials shall form ULC listed or UL classified assemblies and be compatible with
abutting dissimilar materials and finishes.
! 3M Canada Limited
! A/D Fire Protection System Ltd.
! Fire Stop System
.11 Wall Opening Covering Plates
.1 All hole covering plates used on this project shall be stainless steel 18-8 chrome
metal alloy, type 302, non-magnetic type for finished areas and pressed steel for
unfinished areas. Finish brush marks shall be run in a vertical direction.
.12 Access Doors
.1 Access doors installed in unfinished areas shall be constructed of 12 ga prime

coated steel and of stainless steel for all areas finished with tile or marble surfaces.
.2 Access doors shall be complete with 180? opening door, round safety corners,
concealed hinges, screwdriver latches, plaster lock and anchor straps.
.3 Access doors shall be 24x 24 or 12x 18 as per site condition.
.4 Access doors in fire rated construction shall be ULC listed and labeled and of a
rating to maintain the fire separation integrity.
! Zurn Industries Canada Limited

! LeHage Industries Limited
! Acudor Acorn Limited.
2.16 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS.
.1 Indoor control panels shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 construction with hinged door
key-lock latch and removable sub-panels. A common key shall open each control panel
Project #2015-09
and sub-panel.
.2 Prewire internal and face-mounted device connections with color-coded stranded

conductors tie-wrapped or neatly installed in plastic troughs. Field connection terminals
shall be UL listed for 600 V service, individually identified per control and interlock
drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring.
.3 Each local panel shall have a control power source power switch (on-off) with
overcurrent protection.
2.17 FAIL STATE POSITION OF OUTPUTS
.1 Unless specified otherwise, configure BAS output points for the following fail state (e.g.
device position upon panel failure):
.1 Purge Fan ON at 100%

.2 Chilled water pumps ON
.3 Condenser water pumps ON
.4 Cooling Tower VFD ON at 100%
.5 Chiller ON
2.18 LAN CABLING
.1 All LAN cabling shall be Category V as defined by EIA/TIA 568A. The contractor shall
test all cabling to verify that 100Mb bandwidth is supported. See commissioning
requirements.
.2 Cabling shall be 4 pair, 100 ohm UTP, #24 AWG solid copper conductor PVC insulated,
with blue or grey colour coded jacket. FT6 rated cable shall be used unless otherwise
required to meet building codes or by-laws.
.3 Data outlets shall be RJ45, 8 pin connectors, with 50 microns of hard gold over nickel,
minimum durability of 750 mating cycles and contact pressure of 100 grams per
contact. Transmission characteristics shall meet TSB-40 Category V.
.4 Provide one RJ45 data outlet adjacent to each device to be terminated (e.g. workstation
PC, DDC panel, hub, etc.) Use a flexible patch cable to connect from the data outlet
to the end device. For Delta Controls installations, provide a duplex data outlet at the
workstation PC to accommodate the remote security key wiring. LAN cabling shall not
be directly terminated to any device.
.5 Provide protection from EMI sources in accordance with CSA-T530 article 4
.6 The contractor shall test all cabling to verify conformance with TIA /EIA TSB-67 - Basic
Link Test using a Level 2, bi-directional tester. See commissioning requirements.
.7 Where there are more than 2-90 degree in a conduit run, provide a pull box between
sections so that there are two bends or less in any one section.
Project #2015-09
.8 Where a conduit run requires a reverse bend, between 100 degrees and 180 degrees,
insert a pull box at each bend having an angle from 100 degrees to 180 degrees.
.9 Ream all conduit ends and install insulated bushings on each end.
.10 Terminate all conduits that protrude through the structural floor 2 above the
concrete base.
.11 Do not use a pull box in lieu of a conduit bend. Align conduits that enter a pull box
from opposite ends with each other.
2.19 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM
.1 Optical Cable. Optical cables shall be duplex 900 mm tight-buffer construction designed
for intra-building environments. Sheath shall be UL listed OFNP in accordance with
NEC Article 770. Optical fiber shall meet the requirements of FDDI, ANSI X3T9.5 PMD
for 62.5/125mm.
.2 Connectors. Field terminate optical fibers with ST type connectors. Connectors shall
have ceramic ferrules and metal bayonet latching bodies.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 Thoroughly examine project plans for control device and equipment locations. Report
discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions to Consultant for resolution before starting
rough-in work.
.2 Inspect site to verify that equipment can be installed as shown. Report discrepancies,
conflicts, or omissions to Consultant for resolution before starting rough-in work.
.3 Remove all existing field and panel mounted control devices (e.g. transducers,
controllers, thermostats, etc.) that have been made redundant or inoperative by the new
BAS equipment and control strategies. Remove any other controls as specified or
directed by the Consultant
.4 The control sequences indicate only the principal items of equipment controlling the
systems. Supplement each control system with relays and auxiliaries to enable each
system to perform as specified and to permit proper operation and supervision of it.
.5 Provide complete identification and labeling for new and existing devices and
equipment.
.6 Provide new cabling, conduits, control cabinets, power supplies and other auxiliary
equipment, as required for a complete operational system.
.7 The layout drawings do not show all controlled devices and operators and are intended
to indicate the general location of equipment to be controlled; for full extent of
instrumentation refer to the controls diagrams and sequences of operation.
Project #2015-09
.1 All cutting, patching, painting and making good for the installation of the BAS work shall
be done by the BAS Contractor. All cutting shall be performed in a neat and true
fashion, with proper tools and equipment to the Consultants and/or Boards approval.
The surfaces shall be made good to reasonably match existing finishes
.2 Location of the existing services concealed in the construction, if any, shall be

determined prior to drilling or cutting an opening. If required, the Contractor is to x-ray
the walls or slabs and in any case he shall not drill or cut any surface without the
Boards representatives approval.
.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any damage to existing services,
exposed or concealed, caused as a result of this Work.
3.3 PROTECTION
.1 Controls Contractor shall protect against and be liable for damage to work and to
material caused by Contractor's work or employees.
.2 Controls Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until inspected, tested,
and accepted. Protect material not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with
temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign
objects.
3.4 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP
.1 Install equipment, piping, and wiring or raceway horizontally, vertically, and parallel to
walls wherever possible.
.2 Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for piping and equipment
vibration isolation.
.3 Install equipment in readily accessible locations as defined by National Electrical Code

(NEC) Chapter 1 Article 100 Part A.
.4 Verify wiring integrity to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and ground faults.
.5 Equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with industry specifications and
standards and local codes for performance, reliability, and compatibility.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1 Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with rules and regulations of applicable
local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in this section.
.2 Continually monitor field installation for code compliance and workmanship quality.
.3 Contractor shall arrange for work inspection by local or provincial authorities having
Project #2015-09
jurisdiction over the work.
3.6 EXISTING EQUIPMENT
.1 Wiring. Interconnecting control wiring shall be removed and shall become Contractor's
property unless specifically noted or shown to be reused.
.2 Local Control Panels. Remove and deliver existing control panels to Board.
.3 Repair. Unless otherwise directed, Contractor is not responsible for repair or

replacement of existing energy equipment and systems, valves, dampers, or actuators.
Notify Consultant in writing immediately of existing equipment that requires
maintenance.
.4 Indicator Gauges. Ensure operation of and recalibrate for reasonable accuracy or

replace existing gauges.
.5 Room Thermostats. Remove and deliver existing room thermostats to Board unless
otherwise noted. Patch and finish holes and marks left by removal to match existing
walls.
.6 Electronic Sensors and Transmitters. Remove and deliver existing sensors and
transmitters to Board.
.7 Controllers and Auxiliary Electronic Devices. Remove and deliver existing controllers
and auxiliary electronic devices to Board.
.8 Existing System Operating Schedule. Existing mechanical system may be disabled

during this work.
.9 Patch holes and finish to match existing walls.
.10 At Board's request, items to be delivered to Board shall instead be properly

disposed of. Hazardous materials shall be disposed in accordance with current
regulations and applicable by-laws.
3.7 WIRING
.1 Control and interlock wiring and installation shall comply with national and local
electrical codes, and manufacturer's recommendations.
.2 NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring shall be UL listed in approved raceway as specified
by NEC.
.3 All wiring shall be installed in EMT conduit unless specified otherwise. Exposed wiring
in finished areas (e.g. corridors, classrooms, gymnasiums, etc.) shall be installed in
wiremold (colour to match surrounding area).
.4 Wiring from DDC controllers to sensors and actuators and control system network and
low voltage wiring running in accessible ceilings may be installed using LVT cable.
Project #2015-09
Where the ceiling is used as a return air plenum, plenum rated cable shall be used in
lieu of LVT cable.
.5 Install EMT and cable at right angles to building lines, securely fastened, and in
accordance with current electrical codes and standards.
.6 Power and control wiring shall be copper conductor (RW90). For power wiring, provide
#12 AWG (minimum) with a 3% maximum voltage drop in accordance with CEC
requirements. Control wiring shall be a minimum of #14 AWG, unless otherwise
specified.
.7 The wires smaller than 18 gauge shall not be used and will not be accepted on the
project except for: wiring between terminal computer devices, wire in standard
communication cables, such as printers and short haul modems, wire used in
communication networks, i.e. any cable transferring digital data, using twisted shielded
pairs.
.8 The wiring from panels to devices shall be installed without splices. The use of crimp
connectors is not allowed when connecting field wiring to sensor or device leads. The
use of wire nuts is acceptable in this application.
.9 Power for control system shall not be obtained by tapping into miscellaneous circuits
that could be inadvertently switched off. Only dedicated circuit(s) shall power the control
system. Provide additional breakers or electrical panels as required.
.10 Mount transformers and other peripheral equipment in panels located in serviceable
areas. Provide line-side breakers/fuses for each transformer.
.11 All 120 VAC power for any controls equipment shall be from dedicated circuits.
Provide a breaker lock for each breaker used to supply the control system. Update
the panel circuit directory.
.12 A dedicated power circuit may be used to power DDC panels and equipment within
the same or adjoining mechanical rooms. The use of one power circuit to power
DDC panels distributed throughout the building is not acceptable.
.13 The controller may be powered from the equipment that it is directly controlling (i.e.
heat pump, rooftop unit) only if the controller controls no other equipment and the
power supply to the controller remains energized independently of unit operation or
status.
.14 Provide all required code gauge boxes, connectors and other wiring accessories.
.15 For all DC wiring, positive conductors shall be WHITE or RED in colour while
negative conductors shall be BLACK in colour.
3.8 COMMUNICATION WIRING
.1 Communication wiring shall be low-voltage Class 2 wiring.
Project #2015-09
.2 Install communication wiring in separate raceways and enclosures from other Class 2
wiring.
.3 During installation do not exceed maximum cable pulling, tension, or bend radius
specified by the cable manufacturer.
.4 Verify entire network's integrity following cable installation using appropriate tests for
each cable.
.5 Install lightning arrestor according to manufacturer's recommendations between cable

and ground where a cable enters or exits a building.
.6 Each run of communication wiring shall be a continuous length without splices when
that length is commercially available. Runs longer than commercially available lengths
shall have as few splices as possible using commercially available lengths.
.7 Label communication wiring to indicate origination and destination.
.8 Ground coaxial cable according to NEC regulations article on "Communications

Circuits, Cable, and Protector Grounding."
3.9 FIBER OPTIC CABLE
.1 During installation do not exceed maximum pulling tensions specified by cable

manufacturer. Post-installation residual cable tension shall be within cable
manufacturer's specifications.
.2 Install cabling and associated components according to manufacturers' instructions. Do

not exceed minimum cable and unjacketed fiber bend radii specified by cable
manufacturer.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS
.1 Install sensors according to manufacturer's recommendations.
.2 Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for operating environment.
.3 Install room temperature sensors on concealed junction boxes properly supported by

wall framing.
.4 Air seal wires attached to sensors in their raceways or in the wall to prevent sensor
readings from being affected by air transmitted from other areas.
3.11 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING
.1 Label wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, with control
system address or termination number at each end within 5 cm (2 in.) of termination.
.2 Label pneumatic tubing at each end within 5 cm (2 in.) of termination with a descriptive
identifier.
Project #2015-09
.3 Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show instrument or item
served.
.4 Label control panels with minimum 1 cm ( in.) letters on laminated plastic nameplates.
.5 Label each control component with a permanent label. Label plug-in components such
that label remains stationary during component replacement.
.6 Label room sensors related to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.
.7 Manufacturers' nameplates and UL or CSA labels shall be visible and legible after
equipment is installed.
.8 Label identifiers shall match record documents.
3.12 PROGRAMMING
.1 Point Naming. Name points as shown on the equipment points list provided with each
sequence of operation. See sequences of operation on the drawings. If character
limitations or space restrictions make it advisable to shorten the name, the
abbreviations given in Appendix B may be used. Where multiple points with the same
name reside in the same controller, each point name may be customized with its
associated Program Object number. For example, "Zone Temp 1" for Zone 1, "Zone
Temp 2" for Zone 2.
.2 Software Programming. Programming shall provide actions for each possible situation.
Graphic- or parameter-based programs shall be documented. Text-based programs
shall be modular, structured, and commented to clearly describe each section of the
program.
.3 Application Programming. Provide application programming that adheres to sequences

of operation specified and shown on the drawings. Program documentation or comment
statements shall reflect language used in sequences of operation.
.4 System Programming. Provide system programming necessary for system operation.
3.13 OPERATOR INTERFACE.
.1 Standard Graphics. Provide graphics as specified herein. Show on each equipment

graphic input and output points and relevant calculated points such as indicated on the
applicable Points List as indicated on the drawings. Point information on graphics shall
dynamically update.
.2 Install, initialize, start up, and troubleshoot operator interface software and functions
(including operating system software, operator interface database, and third-party
software installation and integration required for successful operator interface
operation).
Project #2015-09
3.14 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES AND LOCATIONS
.1 Provide new enclosures for all field equipment (e.g. DDC panels, transducers, relays,
etc.). Enclosures shall be equipped with a hinged door and latch. Provide a
Board-standard key/lock set for each enclosure.
.2 Obtain written approval of the Consultant prior to re-using existing enclosures or

cabinets. Provide a Board-standard lockset for all re-used enclosures or cabinets.
.3 Mount all enclosures in serviceable areas of mechanical rooms, storage rooms or

janitor closets. Obtain written approval of the Consultant prior to mounting any
enclosure in ceiling spaces or more than 5-6 above the finished floor.
.4 All transformers and power supplies for control equipment shall be installed in new
dedicated metal cabinets with hinged, lockable covers located in the proximity of their
dedicated controller cabinets.
.5 Include within a DDC panel enclosure one 120 VAC duplex receptacle for portable PC
power, if the controller cabinet is located further than 5-0 from the nearest wall
receptacle.
.6 Ensure that enclosures are sized to allow for ease of servicing of all equipment
contained within. Enclosures containing DDC panels shall be sized to allow for the
installation of the maximum allowable number of expansion panels/boards. Do not
mount other equipment in a manner that may interfere with the future installation of
expansion panels/boards.
.7 For enclosures containing pneumatic transducers or devices, provide one pressure

gauge (1-1/2 dial, 0-30psi) for the main air line supply.
3.15 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING OF CONTROL EQUIPMENT
.1 All panels must have a lamicoid tag (min. 3x1) affixed to the front face indicating panel
designation and function (i.e. BAS Panel 1 or Relay Panel 3).
.2 All field sensors or devices must have a lamicoid tag (min. 3x1) attached with tie-wrap
or adhesive indicating the point software name and hardware address (i.e. AHU1_MAT,
2.IP4). Tags must be secured by screws where mounted outside of the building, in
un-heated spaces, in high humidity areas or where subject to vibration.
.3 Room sensors or other sensors in finished areas must have a lamicoid tag affixed to
the front cover. This tag shall be minimum 1x and indicate the point software name
and hardware address.
.4 All devices within a field enclosure shall be identified via a label or tag.
.5 All BAS panel power sources must be identified by a label (min. 3x1) indicating the
source power panel designation and circuit number (i.e. 120vac fed from LP-2A cct
#1).
Project #2015-09
.6 All field control equipment panels fed from more than one power source must have a
warning label on the front cover.
.7 All wires shall be identified with the hardware address with a band-type self-adhesive
strips or clip-on plastic wire markers at both ends.
.8 All rotating equipment controlled by the BAS shall have a tag or label affixed indicating
that the equipment may start without warning.
.9 The location of the phone line manager shall be indicated via a label affixed to the
inside cover of the modem enclosure or BAS panel.
.10 All BAS panels will be supplied with a points list sheet (within a plastic sleeve)
attached to the inside door.
.11 The points list shall identify the following for each point:
.1 Panel number.
.2 Panel location.
.3 Hardware address.
.4 Software name.
.5 Point description.
.6 Field device type.
.7 Point type (i.e. AI or DO).
.8 Device fail position.
.9 Device manufacturer.
.10 Model number or reference.
.11 Wire tag reference.
.12 Provide laminated wiring diagrams for all field mounted relay enclosures. Securely
attach to the inside door. Identify power panels and circuit numbers of the
equipment being controlled.
.13 Provide laminated wiring diagrams or modify existing equipment wiring diagrams
wherever the BAS interfaces to other equipment. (e.g. boilers, chillers, etc.).
Securely attach to the inside of the respective control cabinet.
.14 Provide lamacoid labels indicating the required operating sequences, on the boilers
and valves, where the boiler plants have manual or automatic isolating valves.
Submit actual wording to the Consultant for approval prior to fabrication and
installation.
.15 Provide lamicoid or machine labels (as outlined above) for all interposing relays or
contactors used in control circuits. The labels shall include the related point
software name and hardware address
.16 Provide a lamicoid label to identify the location of concealed devices above the
ceiling space. Mount the label on the ceiling grid t-bar or a permanent surface
adjacent to the devices. The label shall contain the wording BAS Devices Above.
Project #2015-09
.17 Provide lamicoid labels for all auxiliary HVAC equipment (e.g. force flow cabinets,
unit ventilators, unit heater, window AC units, etc.) controlled by the BAS. Mount
the labels in the vicinity of the existing thermostat or power switch for the unit. The
label shall contain the wording Under BAS Control.
.18 Where directed by the Consultant, provide any and all additional labelling, diagrams.
schematics or instructions as may be required to facilitate the correct operation and
maintenance of controlled building systems.
3.16 SYSTEMS HARDWARE COMMISSIONING
.1 This contractor shall be responsible for the end to end commissioning, testing,
verification and start-up of the complete control system hardware including panels,
sensors, transducers, end devices, relays and wiring. Where applicable, this shall
include any points from an existing and/or re-used automation system in the building.
.2 The contractor shall conduct the hardware commissioning at the facility.
.3 When the site hardware installation is 100% completed (including all labeling and
documentation), the contractor shall provide written notification to the Board to schedule
the hardware commissioning dates for each facility.
.4 Board reserves the right, at its sole discretion, to discontinue site commissioning at any
time if any part of the site hardware installation is found to be incomplete on the date
of commissioning. If this occurs, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for any
additional costs related to rescheduling of the site commissioning.
.5 The Contractor shall prepare a hardware commissioning report containing the following
information and test results:
.1 Analogue inputs (i.e. temperatures, pressure, etc.) shall be verified with an

approved calibration device. All actual temperature readings should be with +/- 1C
of the readings observed at the workstation. Record calibration adjustments and
settings.
.2 Analogue outputs shall be verified by manually commanding the output channel

from the operator workstation to two or more positions within the 0-100% range and
verifying the actual position of the actuator or device. All devices shall operate over
their entire 0-100% range from a minimum control range of 10-90%. Record the
actual output scale range (channel output voltage versus controller command) for
each analogue end device
.3 Digital outputs shall be verified by witnessing the actual start/stop operation of the
equipment under control.
.4 Digital inputs shall be verified by witnessing the status of the input point as the
equipment is manually cycled on and off.
.5 Record all out-of-season or unverified points in the commissioning report as
Project #2015-09
non-commissioned.
.6 Identify any existing equipment (valves, dampers, fan starters, etc..) that are
inoperative or require maintenance or repair.
.6 The BAS field panel power source shall be toggled on and off to ensure reboot
functionality and power down memory retention of all parameters. During the power
down test, all controlled system outputs shall go to their fail-safe position.
.7 Verify PID loop tuning parameters by applying a step change to the current setpoint and
observing the response of the controlled device. Setpoint should be reached in an
acceptable period of time without excessive cycling or hunting of the controlled device.
Provide a graph of the trend response to setpoint change for important controlled
devices (e.g. valves 1-inch or larger, dampers on major air handlers, etc.)
.8 Provide confirmation that a series of test alarms has been successfully received at a
designated remote monitoring workstations.
.9 Include with the hardware commissioning report a site floor plan indicating the location
of all equipment installed in concealed or recessed locations (e.g. interposing relays in
ceiling spaces).
.10 Provide testing of all LAN cabling to ensure that 100Mb bandwidth is supported.
.11 Verify conformance with TIA /EIA TSB-67 - Basic Link Test using a Level 2,
bi-directional tester. Provide all equipment necessary to carry out the required
tests.
.12 The hardware commissioning report must be signed and dated by the Contractors
technician performing the tests and participating Board representative.
.13 At the completion of site commissioning, submit four (4) copies of hardware
commissioning report to the Board.
3.17 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION
.1 At the completion of the site hardware inspection, the Contractor shall test and verify
that the system programming, graphics and alarm software is operating correctly and
is in compliance all requirements of the specifications.
.2 The Contractor shall provide written notification to the PDSB that the site is ready for
the Substantial Completion Inspection by the Consultant.
.3 At the conclusion of the Substantial Completion Inspection, the Consultant shall issue
a comprehensive site deficiency report to the Contractor for his immediate action.
.4 The Contractor shall correct all items noted in the site deficiency report within ten (10)
business days of receipt.
.5 The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Board that all items on the
Consultants site deficiency report have been corrected.
Project #2015-09
3.18 CONTROL SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE
.1 Demonstration. Prior to acceptance, perform the following performance tests to

demonstrate system operation and compliance with specification after and in addition
to tests specified above. Provide Consultant with log documenting completion of
Substantial Completion Inspection.
.2 Consultant will be present to observe and review system demonstration. Notify

Consultant at least 10 days before system demonstration begins.
.3 Demonstration shall follow process submitted and approved. Complete approved

checklists and forms for each system as part of system demonstration.
.4 Demonstrate actual field operation of each sequence of operation as specified herein.

Provide at least two persons equipped with two-way communication. Demonstrate
calibration and response of any input and output points requested by Consultant.
Provide and operate test equipment required to prove proper system operation.
.5 Demonstrate compliance with sequences of operation through each operational mode.
.6 Demonstrate complete operation of operator interface.
.7 Demonstrate each of the following.
.1 DDC loop response. Supply graphical trend data output showing each DDC loop's
response to a setpoint change representing an actuator position change of at least
25% of full range. Trend sampling rate shall be from 10 seconds to 3 minutes,
depending on loop speed. Each sample's trend data shall show setpoint, actuator
position, and controlled variable values. Consultant will require further tuning of
each loop that displays unreasonably under- or over-damped control.
.2 Building fire alarm system interface.
.3 Trend logs for each system. Trend data shall indicate setpoints, operating points,
valve positions, and other data as specified in the points list provided with each
sequence of operation. Each log shall cover three 48-hour periods and shall have
a sample frequency not less than 10 minutes or as specified on its points list. Logs
shall be accessible through system's operator interface and shall be retrievable for
use in other software programs.
.4 Tests that fail to demonstrate proper system operation shall be repeated after
Contractor makes necessary repairs or revisions to hardware or software to
successfully complete each test.
3.19 ACCEPTANCE.
.1 After tests described in this specification are performed to the satisfaction of both
Consultant and PDSB, Consultant will accept control system as meeting completion
requirements. Consultant may exempt tests from completion requirements that cannot
Project #2015-09
be performed due to circumstances beyond Contractor's control. Consultant will provide
written statement of each exempted test. Exempted tests shall be performed as part of
warranty.
.2 System shall not be accepted until completed demonstration forms and checklists are
submitted and approved as required.
3.20 CLEANING
.1 Each day clean up debris resulting from work. Remove packaging material as soon as
its contents have been removed. Collect waste and place in designated location.
.2 On completion of work in each area, clean work debris and equipment. Keep areas free
from dust, dirt, and debris.
.3 On completion of work, check equipment furnished under this section for paint damage.
Repair damaged factory-finished paint to match adjacent areas. Replace deformed
cabinets and enclosures with new material and repaint to match adjacent areas.
3.21 TRAINING
.1 Provide training for a designated staff of Board's representatives. Training shall be

provided via self-paced training, web-based or computer-based training, classroom
training, or a combination of training methods.
.2 Training shall enable students to accomplish the following objectives:
.1 Proficiently operate system

.2 Understand control system architecture and configuration
.3 Understand DDC system components
.4 Understand system operation, including DDC system control and optimizing
routines (algorithms)
.5 Operate workstation and peripherals
.6 Log on and off system
.7 Access graphics, point reports, and logs
.8 Adjust and change system setpoints, time schedules, and holiday schedules
.9 Recognize common HVAC system malfunctions by observing system graphics,
trend graphs, and other system tools
.10 Understand system drawings and Operation and Maintenance manual
.11 Understand job layout and location of control components
.12 Access data from DDC controllers
.13 Operate portable operator's terminals
.14 Create and change system graphics
.15 Create, delete, and modify alarms, including configuring alarm reactions
.16 Create, delete, and modify point trend logs (graphs) and multi-point trend
graphs
.17 Configure and run reports
.18 Add, remove, and modify system's physical points
.19 Create, modify, and delete application programming
.20 Add operator interface stations
Project #2015-09
.21 Add a new controller to system
.22 Download firmware and advanced applications programming to a controller
.23 Configure and calibrate I/O points
.24 Maintain software and prepare backups
.25 Interface with job-specific, third-party operator software
.26 Add new users and understand password security procedures
.3 Divide presentation of objectives into three sessions (1-13, 14-23, and 24-26).
Participants will attend one or more of sessions, depending on knowledge level
required.
.1 Day-to-day Operators (objectives 1-13)
.2 Advanced Operators (objectives 1-13 and 14-23)
.3 System Managers and Administrators (objectives 1-13 and 24-26)
.4 Provide course outline and materials. Provide one copy of training material per student.
.5 Instructors shall be factory-trained and experienced in presenting this material.
.6 Perform classroom training using a network of working controllers representative of

installed hardware.
Project #2015-09
CHILLER REPLACEMENT ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 Furnish all labor, materials, services and equipment required to make the mechanical
equipment fully functional. The Work covered by this section of the specifications consists
of performing all operations, including cutting, channeling, and chasing, necessary for
providing power supply to the mechanical equipment forming part of this project.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
.1 Shop drawings shall be submitted for all equipment furnished by Contractor with internal
wiring and controls, in accordance with the requirements of Section 15010.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 All electrical materials shall be new and as listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories Canada,
Inc. for the application, except as otherwise specified herein.
.2 All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer or listed
by an independent testing laboratory as an assembly thereof.
.3 Materials and equipment shall be the standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged
in the production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current and standard
design.
2.2 CONDUIT AND TUBING
.1 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
.1 Mild steel, zinc-coated on the outside and either zinc-coated or coated with an approved
corrosion-resistant coating on the inside.
.2 Exterior conduits: rigid aluminum
.3 Expansion Fittings
.1 Malleable iron, hot-dipped galvanized with factory installed packing and a grounding
ring.
2.3 CONDUCTORS
.1 Unless otherwise noted, all conductors shall be annealed copper with minimum 98%
conductivity and shall conform with the applicable standards of UL, ANSI, and ICEA.
.2 Branch circuit conductors shall not be smaller than No. 12 AWG copper wire.
.3 All conductors No. 8 and larger shall be stranded.
Project #2015-09
.4 Unless otherwise specified, the minimum size for Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits
shall be No. 16 AWG and for Class 2 low-energy control and signal circuits shall be No. 20
AWG.
.5 The use of solid or stranded wire shall meet the equipment manufacturer installation
requirements.
.6 Unless otherwise specified, all conductor insulation shall be type THHN-THWN for 600V
and below.
2.4 OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULL BOXES
.1 Outlet Boxes
.1 Only zinc-coated or cadmium-plated sheet-steel boxes, of a class to satisfy the

conditions for each outlet, shall be used in concealed work.
.2 Boxes mounted on the outside of the building walls shall be cast construction, with
threaded hubs and gasketed covers.
.3 Outlet boxes for exposed work shall not be less than 4 inches square with appropriate
covers for surface work. "Handy" boxes may be utilized in accordance with the NEC
requirements. Cut-in boxes are allowed to be installed for non-exposed work.
.4 Each box containing an equipment grounding conductor serving motors, lighting,

fixtures, or receptacles shall be provided with a grounding terminal.
.5 A device plate shall be provided for each outlet to suit the device installed.
.6 All outlet cover plates on unfinished walls or on any surface mounted devices shall be
of zinc-coated sheet metal, having rounded or beveled edges.
.7 Unless otherwise indicated, all plates on finished walls shall be of ivory- colored metal
or heavy-duty (unbreakable) nylon.
.8 Screws shall be of metal with counter sunk heads with a finish to match the finish of the
plate.
.9 The use of sectional device plates is not permitted.
.2 Junction/Pull Boxes
.1 Pull boxes shall be constructed of code-gage galvanized sheet metal not less than the
minimum size recommended by the National Electrical Code.
.2 Boxes shall be furnished with screw fastened covers unless otherwise specified.
2.5 CABINETS
.1 Cabinet boxes shall be constructed of zinc-coated sheet steel and shall conform to the
requirements of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Standard for Cabinets and boxes (UL #50).
Project #2015-09
.1 Trims and doors shall have a suitable primer coat and a finish coat of a color specifically
designated.
.2 Cabinet trim shall be fitted with hinged door and flush latch.
.3 Boxes shall be provided with a 3/4 inch exterior grade, one-faced "B" grade, or equal
plywood backboard inside painted white unless otherwise specified on Drawings.
.4 Cabinets shall have their identification letters shown on engraved plastic plates as
shown on Standard Drawing E-0006STD.
.1 Grounding and bonding products, whether or not indicated on the Contract documents,
shall be of sizes and ratings to comply with the NEC. Where types, sizes, ratings, and
quantities indicated are in excess of NEC requirements, the more stringent requirements
and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern.
.2 Grounding and bonding conductors shall be copper. Equipment ground conductors run
with circuit conductors and grounding electrode conductor shall be insulated with green
outer finish, unless noted otherwise on the Contract documents.
.3 Unless noted otherwise, all conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded, Class B
in accordance with ASTM B8.
.4 Uninsulated conductors shall be bare copper in accordance with ASTM B3, tinned in
accordance with ASTM B33, or alloy-coated in accordance with ASTM B189.
.5 Use tinned or alloy-coated in corrosive environments.
.6 Grounding connectors shall be listed and labeled for grounding application. Connectors
shall be high-conductivity, heavy-duty units.
.7 Compression Connectors: Shall comply with IEEE STD 837, ANSI/UL-467.
.8 Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit-form, and selected per manufacturers

written instructions.
.9 Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel with high-strength steel core and electrolytic-grade
copper outer sheath, molten welded to core. The minimum rod size shall be 3/4 inch by 10
feet long.
2.7 MOTOR CONTROLLERS (STARTERS)
.1 All controllers shall conform to the adopted standards and recommended practices of the
Industrial Control Standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association and the
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
.2 Each motor or group of motors requiring a single control shall be provided with a suitable
controller and devices which will perform the functions as specified for the respective
Project #2015-09
motors in other sections of these specifications.
.3 Each motor, except those whose impedance is sufficiently high to prevent over heating due
to failure to start, such as clock motors, shall be provided with overload protection, either
integral with the motor or controller, or mounted in a separate enclosure.
.4 Unless otherwise specified, protective devices shall be of the manual reset type. Manual
controllers for motors, larger than 1/4 horsepower, shall be specifically designed for the
purpose and shall have a horsepower rating adequate for the motor.
.5 Where overloads are supplied with controllers, these shall be sized after receipt of the
equipment to be protected in accordance with nameplate data.
.6 Overload protection for substituted multispeed motors shall be arranged to protect all
windings and shall be so designed that if an overload occurs in one winding, all windings
will be disconnected simultaneously.
.7 Starters shall be full voltage, non-reversing magnetic starters. Full protection is to be

provided in the starters by means of one thermal overload relay per phase per starter with
manual reset button to suit the service factor and acceleration time of the motor served.
.8 Starters shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts to satisfy interlocking and automatic
control requirements, Hand-Off-Automatic switches, pilot lights (green-On; red-Off),
thermal overloads, necessary fuses and control transformer (if required) for operation of all
controls on 120V single phase.
.9 Where required by applicable codes, starters shall be equipped with quick-make and
quick-break fused disconnects.
.1 Square D Co. Ltd.

.2 Allen-Bradley Canada Ltd.
.3 Westinghouse Canada Inc.
.11 Fuses in starters to be CSA certified Form 1, current and energy limiting type 200,000
ampere interrupting capacity with NEMA Class J rejection type mountings.
.12 Size fuses installed in starters or in disconnect switches used in conjunction with
magnetic starters, for motor and branch circuit protection in accordance with fuse
manufacturers recommendations. Provide one spare set of three fuses for each rating
and type of fuse used.
.13 Enclosures for loose starters are to be EEMAC 1A, unless otherwise specified.
2.8 PANEL BOARDS
.1 Panel boards shall be provided from the following approved manufacturers:
.1 Cutler-Hammer.
.2 GE.
Project #2015-09
.3 Siemens.
.4 Square D.
.2 Ampere interrupting capacity (AIC) as indicated on panel schedules. Series AIC ratings will
not be accepted.
.3 Main circuit breaker (MCB) or main lug only (MLO) as indicated on panel schedules; double
or dual main lugs or subfeed lugs are not acceptable.
.4 Panel boards shall be in a single enclosure; two section panels are not acceptable.
.5 Provide panelboards with size and number of single, double, or three-pole circuit breakers
as indicated on panel schedules.
.6 Arrange and number circuit breakers exactly as shown on drawings and panel schedules.
Single-branch mounted or subfeed breakers are not acceptable.
.7 Where the word space occurs on panel schedules, provide all necessary hardware in the
space, including connection straps, mounting brackets, and filler plates so that only the
addition of a future circuit breaker is required. Connection straps shall be rated a minimum
of 100A in panelboards of 400A rating or less and a minimum of 225A in panel boards
above 400A rating, unless otherwise noted on panel schedules.
.8 Provide Micarta buttons, small window-frame, or permanent strip type identification labels
on interior trim to identify circuit number. Do not use adhesive-backed fabric or paper
labels alone.
2.9 ENCLOSURES
.1 Shall be NEMA type enclosure as indicated on panel schedules.
.2 Provide flush or surface cover, as indicated on panel schedules.
.3 Front cover shall be factory manufactured, UL/NRTL listed, one-piece, hinged

door-in-door type with:
.1 Interior hinged door with hand-operated latch or latches as required to provide access
to circuit breaker operating handles only; not to energized parts.
.2 Outer hinged door to provide access to the entire enclosure including deadfront and all
wiring gutters.
.4 Outer door shall be securely mounted to the panelboard box with factory bolts, screws, clips
or other fasteners requiring a tool for entry; hand operated latches are not acceptable.
.5 Both inner and outer doors shall open left to right.
.6 Include one-piece, removable, inner deadfront cover, independent of the panelboard cover.
.7 Provide enclosure with the following side gutter dimensions:
Project #2015-09
.1 Left side minimum 4-1/2 measured from inside lip of the box to the installed deadfront.
.2 Right side; minimum 4-1/2 measured from inside lip of the box to the installed
deadfront. With the door-in-door cover in place; minimum 3-1/4 from installed outer
door hinge to the installed deadfront.
.8 Prepare, prime, and paint front trim cover with light gray enamel electro-deposited over
phosphatized steel, or baked-on polyester coating.
2.10 BUS
.1 Phase buses shall be hard-drawn 98 percent conductivity copper.
.2 Neutral Bus:

.2 Shall be 100% rated (current rating same as phase buses).
neutral lug.
.3 Grounding Bus:

.2 Shall be factory-installed, bonded to enclosure.
grounding conductor lug.
2.11 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
.1 Provide circuit breakers as integral components of panel board with indicated features,
ratings, characteristics, and settings.
.2 Each circuit breaker shall be bolted into position in the panel board, whether by direct bolted
connection to the bus or by being bolted to the panel board frame. Each circuit breaker
shall be replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. Plug-on circuit breakers held in place
only by spring force of the bus lug and the pressure of the deadfront are not acceptable.
.3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:
.1 Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, voltage, frequency, number of poles, and
short-circuit interrupting capacity rating as indicated on panel schedules.
.2 Tripping Device: Quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism with inverse-time delay
and instantaneous overcurrent trip protection for each pole.
.3 Multi-pole molded-case circuit breakers shall include common internal tripping of all
poles.
.4 Circuit breakers with handle-ties are not acceptable.
.5 Half-size circuit breakers with two circuits occupying a single position on the same
phase bus are not acceptable.
.6 Terminal Lugs: Provide load side of circuit breaker with front-connected UL-listed lugs
for copper cable at full frame rating. Provide terminals rated for minimum 75OC.
.7 All single-pole circuit breakers shall be switching duty rated.
Project #2015-09
.8 All multi-pole circuit breakers shall be HACR duty rated.

.9 Provide factory-installed circuit breaker handle padlocking devices on all multi-pole
circuit breakers.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
.1 No employer shall permit an employee to work in such proximity to any part of an electric
power circuit that the employee could contact the electric power circuit in the course of
work, unless the employee is protected against electric shock by de-energizing the circuit
and grounding it or by guarding it effectively by insulation or other means.
.2 Fabrication, erection and installation per National Electrical Installation Standards and the
complete electrical system shall be done in a first-class workmanlike manner by qualified
personnel experienced in such work.
.3 Conduit and equipment shall be level, plumb and true with the structure and other
equipment, and in a horizontal or vertical position as intended.
.4 The installation shall comply with all provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC) (NFPA
70). Immediately prior to acceptance, Contractor shall clean all electrical equipment, both
on the exterior and interior.
3.2 CONDUIT AND TUBING INSTALLATION
.1 Conduit systems that are 2 or larger, installed out doors and terminate on an exterior
enclosure that houses an over-current device (circuit breakers or fuses) shall enter through
the side or bottom.
.2 EMT shall utilize ULC-listed water-tight compression-type threadless fittings in outdoor

applications.
.3 EMT box connectors shall be securely fastened to all boxes and cabinets with one locknut.
.4 Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit in exterior, wet or damp locations, for connections to
wet-pipe mechanical systems or where specified on Drawings.
.5 All EMT, IMC, and rigid conduit couplings will be installed wrench tight; threads shall be
brushed clean to ensure good electrical contact.
.6 Exposed conduits shall be run parallel and perpendicular to the building surface of exposed
structural members and follow the surface contours as much as practical to present a neat
appearance. Exposed parallel or banked conduits shall be run together to provide neat
appearance.
.7 Bends and Offsets shall be avoided where possible, but when necessary, shall be made
with an approved hickey or conduit-bending machine. The use of pipe tee or vise for
bending conduit or tubing will not be permitted.
Project #2015-09
.8 Conduit or tubing which has been crushed, wrinkled, or deformed in any way shall not be
installed.
.9 Each conduit that is buried in or rigidly secured to the building construction on opposite
sides of a building expansion joint and each long run of exposed conduit that may be
subjected to excessive stresses shall be provided with an expansion fitting.
.10 Contractor shall exercise the necessary precautions to prevent the lodgment of dirt,
plaster, or trash in conduit, tubing, fittings, and boxes during the course of installation.
.11 Care shall be taken to ensure that raceways do not contain any type of debris. A run of
conduit or tubing, which has become clogged, shall be entirely freed of these
accumulations, or shall be replaced.
.12 All empty conduits shall have a conduit measuring tape cord (Greenlee #435) provided
with 2 feet of slack at each end, unless otherwise shown on plans.
3.3 SUPPORTS/ANCHORS
.1 Runs of conduit or tubing shall have supports spaced not more than 5 feet apart, unless
shown otherwise.
.2 Conduit and tubing shall be supported on approved types of galvanized wall brackets,
ceiling trapeze, strap hangers, or pipe straps, secured by means of toggle bolts on hollow
masonry units, expansion bolts in concrete or brick, machine screws on metal surface, and
wood screws on wood construction. Conduit and tubing shall not be hung from or attached
to hanger support wires used for suspended ceilings.
.3 Conduit and tubing risers, exposed in wire shafts, shall be supported at each floor level by
means of approved U-clamp hangers.
.4 All metal angles, channels, straps, and other similar pieces to be used to support electrical
apparatus shall have all corners ground smooth and all edges filed or ground smooth
before installation.
3.4 CONDUCTORS
.1 Power conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, and no splices shall be made
except within outlet or junction boxes. (Junction boxes shall be utilized where required).
.2 Requirements of the NEC (2002) Articles 374.6 and 390.6, for splicing in underfloor
raceways, shall be strictly followed. However, under no circumstances shall conductors be
"Looped" or "fed-through." Conductors shall be removed back to the nearest used tap.
NEC (2002) Articles 374.7 and 390.7 for abandoned outlets shall also be strictly followed.
.3 Conductor color coding as per Standard Drawing E-0006STD shall be limited to all new
installations unless otherwise specified on Drawings.
.4 Splices and Terminations
.1 For wiring below 600 volts, splices shall be made with insulated pressure type
Project #2015-09
connectors (wire nuts) except for conductors sized No. 8 and larger. No splices will be
allowed on any alarm, communication or facility control systems.
.2 All splicing connectors shall be furnished with an insulated cover that is equivalent to
the conductor insulation. (Taping alone will not be acceptable.) Split bolt connectors
will only be allowed where specific approval for each use is obtained prior to use from
the Owner.
.3 A connector aid compound shall be used at all splices to existing aluminum wire.
.4 Terminal lugs shall be used on all stranded conductors.
.5 Conductor Identification
.1 All conductors in panels shall be tagged, including neutral and ground conductors.
Install a Bradey slip on label on conductors sized less than # 6 AWG and install a
Panduit #MP-350C tag and tie wrap on conductors sized # 6 AWG or larger. Use a
Panduit marking pen PX-O or a Sharpie permanent marker for labels. These tags shall
list the circuit number.
.2 All conductors shall be additionally tagged in every box and cabinet, including device
or fixture (lighting) outlet, and light fixture compartment, with Brady slip on labels. Wrap
around stick on labels are allowed only where slip-on labels cannot be used. These
labels shall identify each conductor as to panel and circuit number or terminal numbers.
.3 Neutral and grounding conductors shall be similarly tagged as to all the circuits they
serve in each box and at the panelboard.
3.5 CABINETS
.1 Mount cabinets plumb and rigid without distortion of box.
.2 Arrange flush mounted cabinets so that the enclosure front surface is uniformly flush with
wall, and exterior door covers wall to enclosure mating surfaces.
.3 If not shown on drawings, stub a minimum of four one-inch (25mm) empty conduits from
cabinet into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in future.
.4 If not shown on Drawings, stub a minimum of four one-inch (25mm) empty conduits into
raised floor space, or below slab other than slabs-ongrade.
.5 All surface mounted cabinets located on finished walls within office and light laboratory
areas shall be furred from the floor to the ceiling to provide a chase for conduits. The
panels used for furring shall be removable by sheet metal screws or wood screw
attachment or a similar method.
.1 As a minimum, grounding and bonding shall comply with NFPA 70 (NEC), and as shown
on Drawings.
Project #2015-09
.1 Work shall be carefully laid out, in advance, and where cutting, channeling, chasing, or
drilling of floors, wall partitions, ceiling, or other surfaces is necessary for the proper
installation, support, or anchorage of the conduit, raceways, or other electrical work, the
affected areas shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved, at no additional
Contract cost.
3.8 INTERRUPTION OF ELECTRICAL UTILITIES
.1 Work to be performed during an interruption of electrical utilities will be preceded by all

possible preparation and will be carefully coordinated to minimize the duration of the
interruption and Work will proceed continuously until the system is restored to normal.
.2 Contractor shall not interrupt any main interior or exterior electrical utility without written
request for an outage and subsequent approval by the Board nor shall the Contractor
interrupt any branch circuit to an outlet or item of equipment without approval from the
Board
.3 Written request for outages shall be submitted prior to performing the work.
.4 Unless otherwise noted on Drawings, or directed, any tie-ins or connections to existing

utilities or equipment that necessitate interruptions of service shall be performed on a
Saturday or Sunday, without additional Contract costs.
3.9 TESTS/INSPECTIONS
.1 After the system installation is complete and at such time as directed by the Board.
Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval.
.2 Also, when requested, Contractor shall test any designated wire, cable devices, and
equipment after their installation, to assure that all of the material continues to possess all
the original characteristics, as required by all governing codes and standards listed in these
specifications.
Project #2015-09

Final

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Final

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Request for Quotations

Chiller and Cooling Tower Replacement at Meadowvale SS and Chiller

Request for Quotation No.: L15-3811

Issued: March 12, 2015

Submission Deadline: April 1, 2015 at 3:00 p.m., Toronto Time

Peel District School Board Page 1 of 15

OTHER APPENDICES AS ATTACHED:

Peel District School Board Page 2 of 15

1.1 Invitation and Type of Contract

For further information about the Board please visit www.peelschools.org.

1.2 RFQ Timetable

Issue Date of RFQ March 12, 2015

Morning Star Public School at 1:30 P.M.

Meadowvale Secondary School at 2:30 P.M.

All potential Respondents to meet at the front

Peel District School Board Page 3 of 15

FAILURE TO ATTEND THE MANDATORY SITE

1.3 Agreement on Internal Trade

1.4 Submission Instructions

Quotations should be submitted at:

Board Contact: A. Ljubijankic

Peel District School Board Page 4 of 15

1.5 Respondents to Review RFQ

1.6 All New Information to Respondents by Way of Addenda

1.8 Bid Protest Procedure

The name and address of the respondent;

Peel District School Board Page 5 of 15

2.1 Stages of Evaluation

2.2 Mandatory Requirements

2.2.1 Quotation Form

Quotation Form (Appendix B) completed and signed by the Respondent.

Rate Bid Form(s) (Appendix 2) completed in their entirety.

2.2.2 Other Mandatory Criteria

2.3 Rated Criteria

2.4 Tie Score

Peel District School Board Page 6 of 15

(g) disqualify a respondent for any conduct, situation or circumstance that

(h) the respondent consents to the Boards collection of the information as

Peel District School Board Page 7 of 15

Peel District School Board Page 8 of 15

Peel District School Board Page 9 of 15

2. Acknowledgement of Terms of Reference and Governing Law

3. Ability to Provide Deliverables

4. Non-binding Price Estimates

Peel District School Board Page 10 of 15

Peel District School Board Page 11 of 15

The respondent declares that there is an actual or potential Conflict of Interest

Brief Description of Nature of Individuals Participation in the Preparation of the

(Repeat above for each identified individual)

7. Confidential Information of Respondent

Peel District School Board Page 12 of 15

Name and Title

Peel District School Board Page 13 of 15

2. AWARDING OF WORK FOR MULTIPLE SITES

3. SUBMITTALS FOR RESPONDENT(S) UNDER CONSIDERATION

b) WORKPLACE SAFETY AND INSURANCE BOARD (WSIB)

The successful Respondent will secure an original Irrevocable Letter of Credit or a

Peel District School Board Page 14 of 15

Price and Non-Price Factors

Peel District School Board Page 15 of 15

Pursuant to the request of our customer,

PROVIDED, however, that you are to deliver to

WE HEREBY AGREE WITH THE DRAWERS, ENDORSERS OF THE BILLS DRAWN IN